E Series Service Manual: 9650-1450-01 Rev. D January 2014

E Series® Service Manual
9650-1450-01 Rev. D January 2014

The issue date for the E Series® Service Manual (REF 9650-1450-01 Rev. D) is January, 2014.
If more than 3 years have elapsed since this date, contact ZOLL Medical Corporation to determine if additional product information updates are available.
Copyright © 2014 by ZOLL Medical Corporation. All rights reserved. AutoPulse, Base Power Charger, CPR-D-padz, E Series, Pedi-padz, Protocol Assist Code
Markers, Real CPR Help, Rectilinear Biphasic, RescueNet, See-Thru CPR, SmartAlarms, Stat-padz, SurePower, and ZOLL, are trademarks or registered
trademarks of ZOLL Medical Corporation in the United States and/or other countries.
All other trademarks are the property of their respective owners.
ZOLL Medical Corporation

269 Mill Road
Chelmsford, MA USA
01824-4105
ZOLL International Holding B.V.

Newtonweg 18
6662 PV ELST
The Netherlands
0123
9650-1450-01 Rev. D
Table of Content
Chapter 1 Maintenance Tests

Overview .................................................................................................................................................................... 1-1
Before You Begin the Maintenance Tests............................................................................................................... 1-2
Equipment that You Need to Perform the E Series Maintenance Tests............................................................... 1-3
Equipment You Need for the E Series Options Maintenance Tests ..................................................................... 1-3
Physical Inspection of the Unit .............................................................................................................................. 1-5
Front Panel Button Test ........................................................................................................................................ 1-7
3, 5, and 12 Leads Test ...................................................................................................................................... 1-10
Power Supply Test (Optional) ............................................................................................................................. 1-11
Leakage Current Test ......................................................................................................................................... 1-13
Paddles Test (If applicable) ................................................................................................................................ 1-14
Heart Rate Display Test ...................................................................................................................................... 1-15
Calibrating Pulses on Strip Chart Test ................................................................................................................ 1-16
Notch Filter Test ................................................................................................................................................. 1-17
Heart Rate Alarm Test ........................................................................................................................................ 1-18
Defibrillator Self Test .......................................................................................................................................... 1-20
Synchronized Cardioversion Test ....................................................................................................................... 1-22
Shock Test .......................................................................................................................................................... 1-23
Summary Report Test ......................................................................................................................................... 1-25
Advisory Message Test ...................................................................................................................................... 1-26
Pacer Test .......................................................................................................................................................... 1-27
SpO2 Monitor Test for SpO2 Option ................................................................................................................... 1-29
EtCO2 Monitor Test (for EtCO2 Option) ............................................................................................................. 1-31
Barometric Pressure Calibration Check .............................................................................................................. 1-32
CO2 Accuracy Check (Optional test to check EtCO2 sensor) ............................................................................ 1-33
NIBP Volume Leak Test with Fluke Biomedical NIBP Analyzer ......................................................................... 1-35
NIBP Transducer Calibration Test ...................................................................................................................... 1-37
NIBP Monitor Test .............................................................................................................................................. 1-39
Bluetooth Test ..................................................................................................................................................... 1-41
9650-1450-01 Rev. D 1
Chapter 2 Troubleshooting
Overview .................................................................................................................................................................... 2-1
Troubleshooting........................................................................................................................................................ 2-2
ZOLL E Series Error Messages ............................................................................................................................... 2-5
Chapter 3 Replacement Parts

Replacement Parts.................................................................................................................................................... 3-2
Parts Diagrams.......................................................................................................................................................... 3-7
Chapter 4 Functional Description

Main System Board................................................................................................................................................... 4-2
High Voltage Module................................................................................................................................................. 4-7
AC/DC Charger Module .......................................................................................................................................... 4-10
System Interconnect Module ..................................................................................................................................4-11
E Series Options ..................................................................................................................................................... 4-12
Chapter 5 Disassembly Procedures

Required Equipment................................................................................................................................................. 5-2
Safety Precautions.................................................................................................................................................... 5-2
Front Panel Disassembly ......................................................................................................................................... 5-5
Bottom Panel Removal........................................................................................................................................... 5-10
NIBP Pump Removal ...............................................................................................................................................5-11
System Board Removal.......................................................................................................................................... 5-13
System Interconnect Board Removal ................................................................................................................... 5-16
Isolated Power Supply Removal............................................................................................................................ 5-18
Bridge Board Removal ........................................................................................................................................... 5-20
9650-1450-01 Rev.D 2
High Voltage Assembly Removal .......................................................................................................................... 5-23
Battery Interconnect Board Removal.................................................................................................................... 5-24
A/C Charger Assembly Removal ........................................................................................................................... 5-26
Access Detect Cable Removal .............................................................................................................................. 5-27
Capacitor Removal ................................................................................................................................................. 5-28
Connector Panel Removal ..................................................................................................................................... 5-29
Communication Board & PCMCIA Module Removal ........................................................................................... 5-31
Recorder Removal .................................................................................................................................................. 5-32
Appendix A Overview .......................................................................................................................................A-1

Interconnect Diagram .............................................................................................................................................. A-2
Maintenance Check List .......................................................................................................................................... A-3
9650-1450-01 Rev. D 3
9650-1450-01 Rev.D 4
E Series Service Manual
Preface
ZOLL® Medical Corporation’s E Series® Service Manual is intended for the service technician whose responsibility is to identify malfunctions and/or
make repairs at the subassembly level. The ZOLL E Series Service Manual has five main sections and one appendix.
Preface—Contains safety warnings and an overview of the manual’s contents. Be sure to review this section thoroughly before attempting to use or service
the E Series unit.
Chapter 1—Maintenance Tests explains how to check the defibrillator’s performance using a series of recommended checkout procedures to be
conducted every six months.
Chapter 2—Troubleshooting provides a listing of the procedures and error messages to help the service technician detect faults and repair them.
Chapter 3—Replacement Parts List displays a complete list of ZOLL part numbers for replaceable parts available for the E Series unit, allowing the
service person to identify and order replacement parts from ZOLL.
Chapter 4—Functional Description provides technical descriptions for the E Series major subassembly modules.
Chapter 5—Disassembly Procedure describes step-by-step procedures for removing subassemblies from the E Series unit.
Appendix A—E Series interconnect diagrams and maintenance checklists.
Safety Considerations
The following section describes general warnings and safety considerations for operators and patients. Service technicians should review the safety
considerations prior to servicing any equipment and read the manual carefully before attempting to disassemble the unit. Only qualified personnel should
service the E Series unit.
Federal (U.S.A.) law restricts this unit for use by or on the order of a physician.
Safety and effectiveness data submitted by ZOLL Medical Corporation to the Food and Drug Administration (FDA) under section 510(K) of the Medical
Device Act to obtain approval to market is based upon the use of ZOLL accessories such as disposable electrodes, patient cables and batteries. The use of
external pacing/defibrillation electrodes and adapter units from sources other than ZOLL is not recommended. ZOLL makes no representations or
warranties regarding the performance or effectiveness of its products when used in conjunction with pacing/defibrillation electrodes and adapter units from
other sources. If unit failure is attributable to pacing/defibrillation electrodes or adapter units not manufactured by ZOLL, this may void ZOLL’s warranty.
Only qualified personnel should disassemble the E Series unit.
9650-1450-01 Rev. D 4
WARNING! This unit can generate up to 2250 volts with sufficient current to cause lethal shocks.
All persons near the equipment must be warned to STAND CLEAR prior to discharging the defibrillator.
Do not discharge the unit’s internal energy more than three times in one minute or damage to the unit may result.
Do not discharge a battery pack except in a ZOLL SurePower™ Charger Station or compatible ZOLL Battery Charging/Testing unit.
Do not use the E Series in the presence of flammable agents (such as gasoline), oxygen-rich atmospheres, or flammable anesthetics. Using the unit near the
site of a gasoline spill may cause an explosion.
Do not use the unit near or within puddles of water.
Note: The E Series is protected against interference from radio frequency emissions typical of two-way radios and cellular phones (digital and analog)
used in emergency service/public safety activities. Users of the E Series should assess the unit’s performance in their typical environment of use
for the possibility of radio frequency interference from high-power sources. Radio Frequency Interference (RFI) may be observed as shifts in
monitor baseline, trace compression, or transient spikes on the display.
Additional Reference Material

In addition to this guide, there are several other components to the ZOLL E Series documentation. They include:
• E Series Operator’s Guide - A comprehensive reference work that describes all the user tasks needed to operate the E Series.
• E Series Configuration Guide - Describes the E Series features and functions whose operation can be customized by authorized users.
• E Series Operator’s Guide Option Insert: 12-Lead ECG Monitoring- Describes using the 12-lead ECG monitoring option with the E Series unit.
• E Series Operator’s Guide Option Insert: End Tidal Carbon Dioxide (EtCO2)- Describes using the EtCO2 option with the E Series unit.
• E Series Operator’s Guide Option Insert: Non-Invasive Blood Pressure (NIBP)- Describes using the NIBP option with the E Series unit.
• E Series Operator’s Guide Option Insert: Pulse Oximetry (SpO2)- Describes using the SpO2 option with the E Series unit.
• E Series Operator’s Guide Option Insert: Non-Interpretive 12-Lead ECG Monitoring- Describes using the non-interpretive 12-lead ECG monitoring
option with the E Series unit.
• E Series Operator’s Guide Option Insert:12-Lead Reperfusion Therapy Algorithm - Describes the reperfusion therapy algorithm option for the E Series
unit.
5 9650-1450-01 Rev. D
Conventions
WARNING! Warning statements describe conditions or actions that can result in personal injury or death.
Caution Caution statements describe conditions or actions that can result in damage to the unit.
Note: Notes contain additional information on using the defibrillator.
Service Policy Warranty

In North America: Consult your purchasing agreement for terms and conditions associated with your warranty. Outside of North America, consult ZOLL
authorized representative.
In order to maintain this warranty, the instructions and procedures contained in this manual must be strictly followed. For additional information, please
call the ZOLL Technical Service Department 1-800-348-9011 in North America.
Technical Service
If the ZOLL E Series unit requires service, contact the ZOLL Technical Service Department:
Telephone: 1-978-421-9655; 1-800-348-9011 (US only)
Fax 1-978-421-0010
Have the following information available for the Technical Service representative:
• Unit serial number.
• Description of the problem.
• Department where equipment is used.
• Sample chart recorder strips documenting the problem, if applicable.
• Purchase Order to allow tracking of loan equipment.
• Purchase Order for a unit with an expired warranty.
If the unit needs to be sent to ZOLL Medical Corporation, obtain a Service Request number from the Technical Service representative. Return the unit in
its original container to:
9650-1450-01 Rev. D 6
ZOLL Medical Corporation

269 Mill Road
Chelmsford, Massachusetts 01824-4105
Attn: Technical Service Department, SR #
Technical Service for International Customers

International customers should return the unit in its original container to the nearest authorized ZOLL Medical Corporation Service Center. To locate an
authorized service center, contact the International Sales Department at ZOLL Medical. See back cover of this manual.
7 9650-1450-01 Rev. D
Chapter 1
Maintenance Tests
Overview
The E Series has two checkout procedures: the operator’s shift checklist and the extensive six-month maintenance tests checkout procedures.
Because the E Series units must be maintained ready for immediate use, it is important for users to conduct the Operator’s Shift Checklist procedure at the
beginning of every shift. This procedure can be completed in a few minutes and requires no additional test equipment. (See the ZOLL E Series Operator’s
Guide for the Operator’s Shift Checklist.)
A qualified biomedical technician must perform a more thorough maintenance test checkout every six months to ensure that the functions of the E Series
unit work properly. This chapter describes the step by step procedures for performing the six month maintenance test checkout. Use the checklist at the
back of this document (ZOLL E Series Maintenance Tests Checklist) to record your results of the maintenance tests.
This chapter describes the following E Series maintenance tests:
1. Physical Inspection of the Unit
2. Front Panel Button
3. 3, 5, and 12 Leads
4. Power Supply
5. Leakage Current
6. Paddles
7. Heart Rate Display
8. Calibrating Pulses on Strip Chart
9. Notch Filter
10. Heart Rate Alarm
11. Defibrillator Self Test
12. Synchronized Cardioversion
13. Shock
9650-1450-01 Rev. D 1-1

14. Summary Report

15. Advisory Message
16. Pacer
17. SpO2 Monitor
18. EtCO2 Monitor
19. Barometric Pressure Calibration Check
20. NIBP Volume Leak Test with Fluke Biomedical NIBP Analyzer
21. NIBP Transducer Calibration Test
22. NIBP Monitor Test
23. Bluetooth Test
Before You Begin the Maintenance Tests

• Assemble the tools or specialized testing equipment listed in the “Equipment You Need to Perform the Maintenance Tests” section shown below.
• Keep an extra fully charged ZOLL E Series compatible battery available.
• Schedule an hour to conduct the entire maintenance test.
• Photocopy the checklist at the back of this document and use the copy to record your results. As you conduct each step of a procedure, mark the 
Pass/Fail/NA check boxes on your checklist and then save it for your maintenance file.
• Perform the tests in the order presented.
• Perform all the steps of each test procedure.
• Complete all the steps of the procedure before evaluating the test results.
1-2 9650-1450-01 Rev. D

Equipment that You Need to Perform the E Series Maintenance Tests

This section lists equipment that we use to perform the maintenance tests that we describe in this chapter. You can substitute an equivalent device for a
listed device; however, not all simulators and analyzers will produce the same results. Be sure to follow the manufacturer’s recommendations for
conducting the maintenance tests.
We recommend the use of the following equipment when performing E Series Maintenance Tests:
• ZOLL Medical Electrode Adapter from Fluke Biomedical (ZOLL Part Number 3010-0378).
• QED 6 Defibrillator Analyzer or equivalent.
• Fluke Biomedical 601 Pro Series International Safety Analyzer.
• ECG Simulator; 12 Lead Simulator for 12 Lead test (e.g., Symbio CS1201).
• Stop watch.
• Standard series II PC flash memory cards.
• 1 red miniature alligator to miniature alligator test lead.
• 1 black miniature alligator to miniature alligator test lead.
• DC power supply (15 amp minimum).
• 0.1 ohm 1% resistor (1/4 watt or greater).
• 1000 ohm 1% resistor (1/4 watt or greater).
• Fluke 75 Multimeter or equivalent.
Equipment You Need for the E Series Options Maintenance Tests

• Fluke Biomedical Index 2PFE SpO2 Simulator or equivalent. (For SpO2 units only.)
• SpO2 cable and sensor (if option is installed).
• EtCO2 cable, and CAPNOSTAT 5 Mainstream cable with airway adapter, or CAPNOSTAT 5 Sidestream cable with cannula (if option is installed).
• Paddles (if used).
• Printer Paper.
• Battery.
• AC line cord.
• 3 lead, 5 lead and 12 lead ECG cables. (12 lead cable needed if 12 lead option is installed.)
• Fluke Biomedical BP Pump NIBP Monitor Analyzer (For NIBP units only) with NIBP cable and cuff (if NIBP option is installed), or
9650-1450-01 Rev. D 1-3

• Fluke Biomedical Cufflink Analyzer (if NIBP option is installed)
Note: The Fluke Biomedical BP Pump NIBP Monitor Analyzer and the Fluke Biomedical BP Pump NIBP Analyzer use different technologies for
testing NIBP monitors and therefore, the manual provides two different procedures for performing the NIBP Volume Leak test with each of these
types of test equipment.
1-4 9650-1450-01 Rev. D

1.0 Physical Inspection of the Unit

Tools Needed: Battery.
Test Setup: None.
Observe this... Pass/Fail/NA
1.1 Housing o o
Is the unit clean and undamaged?
1.2 Does the unit show signs of excessive wear? o o

1.3 Does the handle work properly? o o
1.4 Does the recorder door open and close properly? o o
1.5 Are input connectors clean and undamaged? o o
1.6 Are there any cracks in the housing? o o
1.7 Do the front panel or selector switches have any damage or cracks? o o
1.8 Are there any loose housing parts? o o
1.9 Cables o o
Are all cables free of cracks, cuts, exposed or broken wires?
1.10 Are all cable bend/strain reliefs undamaged and free of excessive cable wear. o o
1.11 Paddles o o o
Do the adult and pedi plates have major scratches or show signs of damage?
1.12 Do the adult shoes slide on and off easily to expose the covered pedi plates? o o o
1.13 Are the paddles clean (e.g., free of gel) and undamaged? (if applicable) o o o
1.14 Battery o o
Place battery in battery well.
9650-1450-01 Rev. D 1-5

Observe this... Pass/Fail/NA
1.15 Is the battery seated in the battery well correctly? o o

Record your results on the Maintenance Test Checklist.
1-6 9650-1450-01 Rev. D

2.0 Front Panel Button Test

Tools Needed: QED 6 Defibrillator Analyzer
Test Setup:
24. Install strip chart paper into the recorder tray.
25. Install the battery in the unit or connect the A/C power cord to the unit and then plug the cord into an electrical outlet.
26. Connect the universal cable and ECG cable (3 lead, 5 lead, or 12 lead) to the ZOLL simulator, or Fluke Biomedical Impulse 4000 Analyzer (or
equivalent).
Do this... Verify that... Pass/Fail/NA
2.1 Turn the selector switch to MONITOR. The unit sounds 4 beep tones. PADS and MONITOR (non-AED units) display o o
(For AED units, turn the selector switch to ON on the monitor.
and select Manual mode.) Note: PADS is a factory default setting.
2.2 Set the QED 6 analyzer to NSR of 120 BPM. To As you press the SIZE button five times (0.5, 1.0, 1.5, 2.0, 3.0), the size of the o o o
check the size of the ECG waveform, press the ECG waveform appropriately changes on the display.
SIZE button.
2.3 Press the ALARM SUSPEND button. Alarm symbol changes from disabled to enabled. If the alarm sounds, press o o o
the ALARM SUSPEND button to turn it off. The alarm will only be suspended
for 90 seconds at this point. Press and hold the ALARM SUSPEND button for
3 seconds to disable alarms.
2.4 Press the RECORDER button. The strip chart paper moves out of the unit from the paper tray. Check that the o o o
correct time, date, ECG lead annotation and waveform are recorded on the
paper. (Set Time and Date, if necessary.)
2.5 Open the paper compartment door, then press The CHECK RECORDER message appears on the monitor. o o o
the RECORDER button.
2.6 Close the paper compartment door, then press The strip chart paper flows out of paper tray and the monitor no longer displays o o o
the RECORDER button. the CHECK RECORDER message.
2.7 Press the RECORDER button. The strip chart paper stops flowing out of the paper tray. o o o
2.8 Press the VOLUME softkey, then press Prompt The volume bar graph displays. o o
Volume. Note: The QRS tone is on or off. There is no gradual change in volume. If
equipped, voice prompts are gradual. Note: The voice volume has 5
settings. Setting 3 is in the mid-range.
9650-1450-01 Rev. D 1-7

2.9 Press the INC softkey. The bar graph appears on the display, indicating an increase in volume. o o
Note: This action does not increase the volume of the unit’s audio prompts.
2.10 Press the DEC softkey. The bar graph appears on the display, indicating a decrease in volume. o o
Verify that pressing the DEC softkey until only the last bar appears silences the
unit’s audio prompts, otherwise the volume of the audio prompts does not
decrease.
2.11 Press the CONTRAST button. The monitor screen displays the Contrast Menu. o o
2.12 Press the INC softkey. The screen contrast and bar graph increases on the display. o o o
2.13 Press the DEC softkey. The screen contrast and bar graph decreases on the display. o o
2.14 Press the SUMMARY button. The monitor screen displays the Summary menu, showing the summary report o o o
options.
2.15 Press the CODEMARKER button. The monitor screen displays the Code marker menu. o o o
2.16 Connect to AC or DC current and install the The CHARGER ON indicator lights (either the Green or Amber indicator lights). o o o
battery. Turn the unit off.
2.17 Remove the battery. The charger light alternately flashes green and amber. o o
2.18 Replace the battery and the turn unit on. The amber charger light illuminates. o o
2.19 Press the ANALYZE button. The SELECT DEFIB MODE message appears on the monitor (for manual o o o
devices).
2.20 Move the selector switch to DEFIB. Select 2J. The display shows that the unit is charging. The SHOCK button lights when the o o o
Press the CHARGE button. unit is charged, and the Ready tone for DEFIB sounds.
2.21 Press and hold the ENERGY SELECT down The unit discharges internally and selected energy decrements to 1J. o o o
arrow.
2.22 Press and release the ENERGY SELECT up The following selections appear: 1-10, 15, 20, 30, 50, 70, 85, 100, 120, 150, o o o
arrow 19 times. 200J.
2.23 Press the CHARGE button. The display shows the unit charged up to 200J and the SHOCK button lights. o o o
1-8 9650-1450-01 Rev. D

2.24 Press the SHOCK button. The unit discharges and the SHOCK button is no longer illuminated.  o o o
A 15 second strip chart automatically prints, displaying the number of joules
delivered (if equipped with recorder and configured to print event).
9650-1450-01 Rev. D 1-9

3.0 3, 5, and 12 Leads Test

Tools Needed: 3 lead, 5 lead, and 12 lead cables. Test each cable separately. QED 6 Defibrillator Analyzer.
Test Setup:
1. The E Series unit must be configured to display ECG LEAD OFF message.
2. Connect the lead wires appropriate to each test to the QED 6 Defibrillator Analyzer.
Do this... Observe this... Pass/Fail/NA
3.1 Turn the selector switch to MONITOR. Select The monitor displays the NO ECG LEADS OFF message. o o o
leads.
3.2 Disconnect one lead from the simulator. The monitor displays the ECG LEAD OFF message within 3 seconds (if o o o
configured).
3.3 Reconnect the lead. Repeat step 3.2 with the The ECG LEAD OFF message appears when the lead is disconnected and o o o
remaining leads. clears the lead is reconnected.
3.4 Repeat 3.2 and 3.3 for 5 lead and 12 lead Note: If heart rate alarm sounds, press and hold the ALARM SUSPEND o o o
cables. button for 4 seconds to disable the alarms.
Note: When testing the 12 lead cable, the ECG LEAD OFF message displays
when you pull off a limb lead. When you pull off a V lead, the ECG VX
LEAD OFF message displays, where “X” is the number between 1 and
6.
Record your results on the Maintenance Tests Checklist.
1-10 9650-1450-01 Rev. D

4.0 Power Supply Test (Optional)

Tools Needed:
• 1 red miniature alligator to miniature alligator test lead.
• 1 black miniature alligator to miniature alligator test lead.
• DC power supply (15 Amp minimum).
• 0.1 ohmresistor (¼W or greater).
• 1000 ohm 1% resistor (¼W or greater).
• Fluke 75 multimeter or equivalent.
Test Setup:
1. Make sure the unit and power supply are turned off.
2. Connect one end of the black lead to the “-” terminal in the battery well.
3. Connect the other end of the black lead to the “-” terminal of the power supply.
4. Connect the red lead to “+” terminal socket of the battery well. Use the middle pin with the plastic guard around it. Connect the other end of the red lead
to the “+” terminal of the power supply.
5. Set the power supply voltage to 7V.
Caution Be sure to connect the power supply properly to the E Series battery well terminals or damage to the unit may result. Do NOT raise the
power supply voltage above 12V.
9650-1450-01 Rev. D 1-11

Red

15 Amp
Battery Well Supply
?
?
Black
Do this... Verify that... Pass/Fail
4.1 Turn the selector switch to MONITOR. The unit does not turn on. o o
(For AED units, turn the selector switch to ON
and select Manual mode.)
4.2 Turn the selector switch to the OFF position.
4.3 Adjust the power supply voltage to 10.3V and The unit turns on. o o
turn the selector switch to MONITOR (for AED
units, turn the selector switch to the ON
position).
4.4 Low Battery Test The unit does not display the LOW BATTERY message. o o
Set voltage to 9.9V.
4.5 Set voltage to 9.4V. The unit displays the LOW BATTERY message within 30 seconds. o o
4.6 Shut Down Voltage Test The unit shuts off within 30 seconds. o o
Set voltage to 8.5V.
1-12 9650-1450-01 Rev. D

5.0 Leakage Current Test

Tools Needed: See the manufacturer’s instructions or supplied specifications for the leakage tester you use.
Test Setup: See the manufacturer’s instructions or supplied specifications for the leakage tester you use. Repeat leakage test with accessories: MFC,
external paddles, and anterior/posterior paddles.
Maximum Leakage Acceptance Limits
Normal Condition Single Fault Condition*
ECG 10 50
MFC 100 100
Earth 500 1000
*Single fault considered AC mains on applied part.
9650-1450-01 Rev. D 1-13

6.0 Paddles Test (If applicable)

Tools Needed: QED 6 Defibrillator Analyzer.
Test Setup: If applicable, connect the universal cable to the paddles and place the paddles in paddle wells.
6.1 Turn the selector switch to DEFIB. Press and The energy selection decreases to 1J. o o
hold the ENERGY DOWN button on the
sternum paddle.
6.2 Press and release the ENERGY UP button on The joules selection increases as follows: 1-10, 15, 20, 30, 50, 70, 85, 100, o o
the sternum paddle for each setting. 120, 150, 200J.
6.3 Press and release the RECORDER button on The recorder starts printing. o o o
the sternum paddle.
6.4 Press and release the RECORDER button The recorder stops printing. o o
again.
6.5 Select 30J using the paddle ENERGY button. The unit charges to 30J, then the red LED charge indicator illuminates and the o o
Press the CHARGE button on the Apex paddle. charge tone sounds.
Note: The front panel shock button does not illuminate.
6.6 Press and release the APEX SHOCK button. The unit does not discharge. o o
6.7 Press and release the STERNUM SHOCK The unit does not discharge. o o
button.
6.8 Press and hold both paddles SHOCK buttons. The unit discharges. The TEST OK message displays and the red LED turns o o
off. If configured, the recorder prints a strip chart.
1-14 9650-1450-01 Rev. D

7.0 Heart Rate Display Test

Tools Needed:
• ECG Cable (3 or 5 leads).
• QED 6 Defibrillator Analyzer.
Test Setup:
1. Turn the selector switch to MONITOR. Press LEAD button until “I” displays.
2. Connect the ECG leads to the QED 6 Defibrillator Analyzer.
3. Connect the ECG cable to the unit.
7.1 Set the QED 6 Defibrillator Analyzer to The Heart Rate displays as 120 +/- 2 bpm o o o
120BPM.
9650-1450-01 Rev. D 1-15

8.0 Calibrating Pulses on Strip Chart Test

Tools Needed: None
Test Setup: None.
8.1 Press the RECORDER button.
8.2 Press and hold SIZE button to activate the The strip chart displays a signal of 300 ppm with an amplitude of  o o o
calibration signal. 10 mm +/- 1 mm. The signal also appears on the video display.
1-16 9650-1450-01 Rev. D

9.0 Notch Filter Test

Test Setup:
1. Connect the ECG cable to the QED 6 Defibrillator Analyzer.
2. Connect the ECG cable to the unit.
9.1 Turn the selector switch to MONITOR mode.

9.2 Select lead I, size 3x.

Select 60Hz (or 50 Hz for a 50Hz unit) on 
the QED 6 Defibrillator Analyzer.
9.3 Press RECORDER button. Verify that the waveform amplitude on the strip chart is less than 1.5 mm. o o o
9650-1450-01 Rev. D 1-17

10.0 Heart Rate Alarm Test

Tools Needed: QED 6 Defibrillator Analyzer
Do this... Verify that... Pass Fail/NA
10.1 Turn the selector switch to MONITOR mode. The monitor screen displays the Lead II message and the waveform for o o o
(For AED units, turn the selector switch to ON NSR ECG at 120 BPM +/- 2.
Connect the ECG leads to the QED 6
Defibrillator Analyzer. Set the QED 6 Analyzer
to 120 BPM and the defibrillator to lead II.
10.2 Press ALARMS buttons. The monitor displays the alarm menu. o o o
10.3 Press SELECT PARAM softkey until ECG HR The cursor scrolls through parameters. o o o
displays.
10.4 Press INC> for state. The cursor scrolls through ENABLE, AUTO and DISABLE. o o o
10.5 Press DEC>for state. The cursor scrolls through ENABLE, DISABLE, AND AUTO. o o o
10.6 Press INC> until ENABLE displays. ENABLE appears. o o o
10.7 Then press the NEXT FIELD softkey to select The cursor scrolls to Low field. o o o
the heart rate limit.
10.8 Press Return, then press the ALARM No alarm sounds. o o o
SUSPEND button.
10.9 Remove a lead wire from the QED 6 analyzer. The alarm symbol flashes and the heart symbol stops flashing. The ECG LEAD o o o
OFF alarm tone sounds. Recorder prints a stripchart showing a low heart rate,
if enabled.
10.10 Re-attach ECG Lead wire to the QED 6 The unit displays the alarm symbol with an “X” through it. o o o
Analyzer and hold the ALARM SUSPEND The heart symbol flashes with each QRS wave.
button on unit for 4 seconds.
10.11 Press the ALARM SUSPEND button to enable The alarm symbol does not have an “X” through it. o o o
the alarms.
10.12 Set QED 6 Analyzer to 160 BPM or higher. The Heart Rate Value is highlighted, the alarm tone sounds, and the alarm and o o o
the heart symbol both flash.
10.13 Press the ALARM SUSPEND button on the E The alarm is suspended for 90 seconds. The unit displays the alarm symbol o o o
Series unit. with an “X” through it, and the heart symbol flashes with each QRS wave.
1-18 9650-1450-01 Rev. D

Do this... Verify that... Pass Fail/NA
10.14 Press and hold ALARM SUSPEND for 4 o o o

seconds to disable alarms.
9650-1450-01 Rev. D 1-19

11.0 Defibrillator Self Test
WARNING!
SHOCK HAZARD!
TAKE THE NECESSARY PRECAUTIONS TO GUARD AGAINST SHOCK OR INJURY BEFORE YOU START
CONDUCTING THE DEFIBRILLATOR TESTS.
Keep hands and all other objects clear of the multi-function cable connections and defibrillator analyzer when discharging
the defibrillator.
Before you discharge the defibrillator, warn everyone near the equipment to STAND CLEAR.
Caution Do NOT internally discharge the unit more than 3 times in 1 minute. Note that the rapid repetition of internal discharges at more than 30
Joules may damage the unit.
Tools Needed:
• MFC Test Port Connector 1004-0149 with universal cable.
• MFC Test Adaptor Connector (Fluke Biomedical Part Number 3010-0378 or equivalent).
• QED 6 Defibrillator Analyzer.
• ECG Cable.
• Stop watch.
Test Setup:
1. Ensure the unit is turned off
2. Ensure the ECG cable is connected to the unit and analyzer.
1-20 9650-1450-01 Rev. D

Note: The universal cable should not be connected to any equipment at the beginning of this test.
11.1 Turn the selector switch to DEFIB mode. The unit displays the CHECK PADS/POOR PAD CONTACT message. o o
Set leads to PADS.
11.2 Connect the universal cable to the MFC test DEFIB PAD SHORT message displays. o o
port.
11.3 Select energy level of 100J and press the The charge time is greater than 2 seconds and less than 10 seconds and the o o
CHARGE button. unit displays the message, SELECT 30J FOR TEST.
11.4 Press the SHOCK button. The unit does not discharge. The unit displays the message, DEFIB PAD o o
SHORT.
11.5 Set energy level to 30J. The unit discharges internally. o o

11.6 Press the CHARGE button. The unit charges to 30J and displays message, DEFIB 30J READY. The o o
charge ready tone sounds.
11.7 Press and hold SHOCK button. The unit discharges and displays the number of joules delivered and the o o
TEST OK message. For example, the message at the top of the printed strip
chart would read as follows:
30 JOULES TEST OK. TEST_CUR=10-14A DEFIB_IMPED=0.
The impedance value may range from 0 to 5 ohms.
9650-1450-01 Rev. D 1-21

12.0 Synchronized Cardioversion Test

Test Setup:
1. Connect the universal cable via the adapter (D.N.I #3010-0378) to the defibrillator analyzer.
2. Set ECG on analyzer to 60 -120 BPM.
12.1 Press LEAD button to select PADS and Size

x1.
12.2 Press the SYNC softkey on the defibrillator. Sync markers appear on display. o o
Enter synchronized cardioversion timing test Note: Sync markers display on the monitor. The sync marker appears as a
mode on the defibrillator analyzer. down arrow over the ECG R-wave peaks on strip chart and display.
12.3 Select 200J, and then press the CHARGE On the analyzer display, the R-wave to shock delay is less than  o o
button. When the SHOCK button lights, press 60 milliseconds.
and hold the SHOCK button.
1-22 9650-1450-01 Rev. D

13.0 Shock Test

Tools Needed: QED 6 Defibrillator Analyzer, Stop Watch.
Test Setup:
1. Connect the universal cable via the adapter (D.N.I #3010-0378) to the defibrillator analyzer.
2. Ensure that a fully charged battery is installed in the unit.
Note: If your E Series AED does not have manual override capability, do not perform this test.
13.1 Turn the selector switch to DEFIB mode.

13.2 Press the ENERGY SELECT down arrow until The unit displays DEFIB 5J SEL. o o o
5J displays.
13.3 Press the CHARGE button. Wait for the The unit displays DEFIB 5J RDY. o o o
SHOCK button to illuminate.
13.4 Press the SHOCK button. The unit discharges 3J-5J into the simulator. o o o
Note: The displayed rhythm may change shape for 30 seconds before it
returns to an original rhythm. This is caused by the operation of the
adaptive bandwidth defibrillator recovery circuit.)\
13.5 Press the ENERGY SELECT up arrow until 50J Energy delivered is within + /- 15% or 2J of setting which ever is greater. o o o
displays.
13.6 Press the ENERGY SELECT up arrow until the The unit displays the message, DEFIB 50J SEL. o o o
unit displays 50J.
13.7 Press the CHARGE button. Wait for the The unit displays the message, DEFIB 50J RDY. o o o
13.9 Press the ENERGY SELECT up arrow until the The unit displays the message, DEFIB 100J SEL o o o
unit displays 100J.
9650-1450-01 Rev. D 1-23

13.12 Press the ENERGY SELECT up arrow until the The unit displays the message, DEFIB 200J SEL o o o
unit displays 200J.
13.15 Press the CHARGE button and start timing with The charge time is between 3-6 seconds. o o o
a stopwatch. Stop timing when the SHOCK
button lights.
13.16 Press the SHOCK button. On the strip chart, the Patient Current is between 20-24 Amps, and the Defib o o o
Impedance is between 46-54 Ohms.
13.17 Turn unit to Defib (for AED units, turn to on and o o o

select Manual Mode.
13.18 Set energy level to 200 Joules. Press The unit does not display any fault messages, and the QED 6 Defibrillator o o o
CHARGE. When the SHOCK button lights, Analyzer shows that no discharges have been delivered.
press the Energy SELECT DOWN ARROW.
13.19 Set energy level to 200 Joules. Have the stop The unit holds the energy for 60 seconds (15 seconds for AED units), then the o o o
watch ready. Press CHARGE. When the unit discharges internally. The unit does not display fault messages.
SHOCK button lights, start the stop watch.
13.20 (AED units only.) Disconnect the cable from the The unit issues the CHECK PADS audio prompt. o o o
analyzer.
1-24 9650-1450-01 Rev. D

14.0 Summary Report Test

Test Setup:
1. Connect the universal cable to the QED 6 analyzer.
2. If you are using paddles, place the paddles on the analyzer’s discharge plates.
14.1 Press and hold the SUMMARY softkey for 4 to The unit displays the message, ERASING REPORT. o o
8 seconds to display erase options. Press the
ERASE SUMMARY softkey to erase any
previously stored data erase any previously
stored data.
14.2 Set selector switch to DEFIB. Select 200J using The unit successfully discharges and prints a strip chart. o o
the ENERGY SELECT button, and press the
CHARGE button. When charged, press the
SHOCK button to discharge into the defibrillator
analyzer.
14.3 Wait 18 seconds, then press the Code Marker The Code Markers appear. o o
softkey. Press the CPR softkey.
14.4 Turn the unit off. Wait 10 seconds and then turn The summary report prints. The report displays the correct date, time, the o o
the unit on. Press the SUMMARY softkey, then shock delivered and Code Marker event.
press the PRINT CHART softkey.
9650-1450-01 Rev. D 1-25

15.0 Advisory Message Test

Test Setup:
1. Connect the universal cable via the adapter (D.N.I #3010-0378).
2. Attach the E Series to the QED 6 Defibrillator Analyzer.
15.1 Turn the selector switch to DEFIB mode.

(For AED units, turn the selector switch to ON.)
15.2 Select VF (ventricular fibrillation) on the The unit displays the following messages: o o
simulator, then press the ANALYZE button. ANALYZING ECG.
STAND CLEAR.*
SHOCK ADVISED.*
PRESS SHOCK.*+
*AED’s audio prompts are standard. Advisory audio prompts are user
configurable.
+If configured for auto charge.
15.3 Press the SHOCK button. The unit discharges. o o

15.4 Select the NSR (normal sinus rhythm) on the The unit displays the following messages: o o
simulator, then press the ANALYZE button. ANALYZING ECG.
STAND CLEAR.*
NO SHOCK ADVISED.*
*AED’s audio prompts are standard.
1-26 9650-1450-01 Rev. D

16.0 Pacer Test

Note: The following tests are to be performed only on E Series units equipped with the optional pacing function.
The pacer output can be measured using an oscilloscope set to DC coupling connected across a load resistor. (See diagram in column for universal cable
connector polarity.) The load resistor is a 100 ohm, 5 watt or greater. The pacer output is a positive going pulse, 40 +/- 2 ms duration with an amplitude of
0.1 volt per milliamp of selected output (e.g., 40 milliamps of selected output has an amplitude of 4 +/- 0.5 volts the specified tolerance displayed on the
oscilloscope).
If an external non-invasive pacer analyzer is being used, then follow the manufacturer’s guidelines for measuring the frequency (ppm), output (mA) and
the pulse width measured in milliseconds. Note that the analyzer pace load resistor must be less than 250 ohms.
Test Setup:
Connect the universal cable from the E Series to the QED 6 Defibrillator Analyzer.
16.1 Turn the Main Selector knob of the unit to Pacer The unit displays the CHECK PADS and POOR PAD CONTACT messages o o
Mode.Set the PACER OUTPUT to 14 mA and displays, and the pace alarm is active.
disconnect MFC connector from the QED 6
analyzer.
16.2 Reconnect the universal cable to the QED 6 CHECK PADS and POOR PAD CONTACT message disappears. The pace o o
analyzer. Press Clear Pace Alarm softkey. alarm is cleared.
16.3 Set rate to 180 ppm; output to 0mA. No output appears on the QED 6 analyzer. o o
16.4 Increase the output to 120mA. Output on the QED 6 analyzer is 120mA +/- 6mA. o o
16.5 Increase the output to 140mA. Output on the QED 6 analyzer is 140mA +/- 7 mA. o o
9650-1450-01 Rev. D 1-27

16.6 Decrease the output to 40mA. Output on the QED 6 analyzer is 40mA or +/- 5mA. Pulse width is  o o
40mS +/-2mS.
16.7 Increase the output to 60mA. Pacer rate on QED 6 analyzer is 29-31 ppm o o
Decrease the rate to 30 ppm.
16.8 Increase the rate to 180ppm. Pacer rate on QED 6 analyzer is 177-183 ppm o o
16.9 Connect the ECG cable to the E Series and The unit displays ECG at 60 BPM with no stimulus markers. o o
QED 6 analyzer. Select the ECG at 60 BPM on
the QED 6 analyzer. Decrease the pacer rate
on the unit to 58ppm.
16.10 Press the Async Pace softkey. The unit displays ECG at 60 BPM with stimulus markers, and displays the o o
Async pace message.
16.11 Turn off the QED 6 analyzer. Set Pacer Rate to The unit displays pace stimulus markers every 15mm +/-1mm. o o
100ppm. Press the RECORDER ON button.
16.12 Press and hold 4:1 button. The unit displays pace stimulus markers every 60 mm+/- 1.5 mm. o o
1-28 9650-1450-01 Rev. D

17.0 SpO 2 Monitor Test for SpO 2 Option

Tools Needed:
• MasimoReusable Sensor.
• Masimo Patient Cable
• Fluke Index Series 2 SpO2 Simulator.
Test Setup:
1. Connect the universal cable to the MFC test plug.
2. DO NOT connect the ECG cable to the simulator.
3. Connect the Masimo Patient Cable and attach the Masimo sensor to the patient cable.
4. Connect the Masimo sensor to the finger simulation post.
5. Place a fully charged battery into the battery well or connect to ac power (dc power, if equipped).
6. Ensure that the SpO2 Simulator is off.
17.1 Turn the selector switch to MONITOR. The SpO2 saturation percentage appears as a dashed line on the monitor. o o
17.2 Wait ten seconds. The unit displays the SpO2 PULSE SEARCH message. o o
Turn on the SpO2 simulator. Press the SIM
softkey on the Index SpO2 Simulator, then press
the MAN softkey.
17.3 Press the 02+ or 02- softkey of the simulator The SpO2 reading of 98 +/- 1% appears on the E Series monitor. o o
until the SpO2 output is at 98%. Note: You may need to wait up to 2 minutes for the information to appear on
the ZOLL display.
17.4 Using the Index SpO2 Simulator, press the The SpO2 simulator screen displays an SpO2 rate of 230 BPM. o o
BPM+ or BPM- softkey until the heart rate is
Note that you may need to wait up to 2 minutes for the information to appear on
230 BPM.
the ZOLL display.
The E Series monitor displays an SpO2 saturation of 96-100%.
The E Series monitor displays a heart rate of 226-234 BPM.
9650-1450-01 Rev. D 1-29

17.5 Using the Index SpO2 Simulator, press the The SpO2 simulator screen displays an SpO2 saturation of 96-100%. o o
BPM- softkey until the heart rate is 50 BPM The E Series monitor displays a heart rate of 46-54 BPM. o o
17.6 Using the Index SpO2 Simulator, press the 02+ The SpO2 simulator screen displays an SpO2 saturation of 70-74%. o o
softkey until the SpO2 output is at 72%. The E Series monitor displays a heart rate of 46-54 BPM. o o
17.7 Press Wave 2 softkey. Plethysmographic waveform appears on the ZOLL display. o o
Select the SpO2 waveform.
17.8 Press RECORDER. The plethysmographic waveform prints on the strip chart paper. o o
17.9 Using the Index SpO2 Simulator, press the The SpO2 simulator screen displays an SpO2 saturation rate of 70-74%. o o
BPM- softkey until the heart rate is at 230 BPM. The E Series monitor displays a heart rate in the heart position of 
226-234 BPM.
17.10 Remove the Masimo patient cable.
1-30 9650-1450-01 Rev. D

18.0 EtCO 2 Monitor Test (for EtCO 2 Option)

Tools Needed: CAPNOSTAT 5 Mainstream cable with airway adapter, or CAPNOSTAT 5 Sidestream cable with cannula.
Test Setup:
1. Install the battery.
18.1 Connect the CAPNOSTAT 5 CO2 Mainstream The airway adapter (for Mainstream) or the cannula (for Sidestream) is
cable with airway adapter attached, or the installed in the CO2 cable.
CAPNOSTAT 5 Sidestream cable with the
cannula attached, to the yellow connector at the
back of the E Series.
18.2 Set the front panel switch to MONITOR or ON. The E Series monitor displays the WARM UP message. o o
For AED units, enter Manual Mode. Note: Warm up may take about 1 minute.
18.3 When the WARM UP message disappears, The E Series monitor displays the ZERO DONE message. o o
press the Param softkey, then select EtCO2
and press Enter.
Press the ZERO softkey, then wait for the
ZERO DONE message to appear.
18.4 Press the Return softkey, then press the  A flat baseline CO2 waveform appears. o o
Wave 2 softkey until the CO2 waveform
appears.
18.5 Breath normally into the airway adapter. A capnogram waveform appears. o o
9650-1450-01 Rev. D 1-31

19.0 Barometric Pressure Calibration Check

Tools Needed: None.
Test Setup: None
19.1 Obtain the local barometric pressure in mmHg.*
19.2 Turn the E Series unit off, and then wait  The unit displays the EtCO2 Calibration screen. o o o
10 seconds. While pressing and holding the
second softkey from the left, turn the selector
switch to Monitor (ON for AED units).
19.3 Wait for the sensor to warm up. The unit displays the message WARM UP for approximately one minute. o o o
19.4 Press the Restore Defaults softkey. The difference between the current barometric pressure reading (obtained in o o o
Step 19.1) and the barometric pressure reading that the E Series unit displays
is <30.
19.5 Use the Inc> and Dec< softkeys to enter the o o o

current barometric pressure on the unit. When,
finished, press the RETURN key.
*The barometric pressure can be obtained from a calibrated barometer, or from the National Weather Service at www.nws.noaa.gov (enter your local zip code to
get the local barometric pressure). Note that the barometric pressure is in inches of mercury, multiply it by 25.4 to convert to mmHg.
1-32 9650-1450-01 Rev. D

20.0 CO 2 Accuracy Check (Optional test to check EtCO 2 sensor)

Tools Needed: CAPNOSTAT 5 Mainstream cable with airway adapter (or CAPNOSTAT 5 Sidestream cable with cannula), Gas regulator, 5% calibration
gas, Thermometer.
Test Setup: None
20.1 Connect the CAPNOSTAT 5 CO2 Mainstream

cable with airway adapter attached, or the
CAPNOSTAT 5 Sidestream cable with the
cannula attached, to the yellow connector at the
back of the E Series.
20.2 While pressing and holding the second softkey The unit displays EtCO2 Calibration screen.
from the left, turn the selector switch to Monitor
(ON for AED units).
20.3 Wait for the sensor to warm up. The message WARM UP is displayed for approximately one minute.
20.4 Obtain current room temperature in 

Centigrade (Cº).
20.5 Press the Select Gas Temp softkey to enter the

CO2 Accuracy screen
20.6 Use the Prev, Next, Inc and Dec softkeys to set
each digit of the gas temperature parameter in
the CAPNOSTAT 5 CO2 Sensor until Gas
Degrees C is equal to the room temperature.
20.7 Press the Return softkey to store the o o o

temperature and return to the main EtCO2
Calibration screen.
20.8 If using a mainstream CAPNOSTAT 5 CO2 o o o

Sensor/Airway Adapter, press the Zero softkey
to zero the sensor.
Note: Sidestream sensors do not require
zeroing, they auto-zero.
9650-1450-01 Rev. D 1-33

20.9 Attach a regulated flowing gas mixture of 5% The gas flow rate should already be preset to 2 to 5 liters per minute.
CO2/balance Nitrogen (N2) to the airway
adapter.
20.10 Set the Gas Balance settings of the

CAPNOSTAT 5 CO2 Sensor to that of the
calibration gas mixture (N2, N2O, or He).
The default gas balance is N2.
20.11 Allow a few seconds for the gas mixture to The expected value is 4.8 to 5.2. o o o
stabilize and observe the CO2 Percent value.
20.12 Press the Return softkey to return to the main

EtCO2 Calibration screen.
20.13 Turn the device off when calibration is

complete.
1-34 9650-1450-01 Rev. D

21.0 NIBP Volume Leak Test with Fluke Biomedical NIBP Analyzer
The volume leak test verifies the integrity of the pneumatic system on the NIBP module. This test is optional at 6 months, but should be performed
annually or every 10,000 readings, whichever comes first.
Tools Needed: Fluke NIBP simulator (the values and procedure that we provide are specific to the BP Pump 2).
Test Setup:
1. Connect the Analyzer’s simulator hose to the NIBP connector on the E Series unit.
2. Configure the NIBP Analyzer for the volume leak test. For example, on the Fluke Biomedical BP Pump:
• Press the Cuff softkey for volume cuff test.
• Verify the cuff is set to External

3. Make sure the ECG cable is not connected to the E Series unit.
4. If the SpO2 option is installed, make sure that the Masimo cable is NOT connected to the E Series unit.
NIBP Volume Leak Test with Fluke Biomedical Cufflink NIBP Analyzer
21.1 Turn the Selector Switch to OFF. The E Series unit powers on in the NIBP Service Mode. o o
After 10 seconds, press and hold the fourth
softkey from the left and turn the Selector
Switch to MONITOR (For AED units, turn the
selector switch to ON).
21.2 Press the Leak Test softkey. The E Series unit displays the NIBP Leak Test Screen. o o
21.3 On the NIBP simulator, set the pressure The NIBP simulator displays a pressure reading of 200 mmHg. o o
parameter to 200 mmHg.
21.4 On the E Series unit, press the Close Valves The Valves status changes from OPEN to CLOSED. o o
softkey.
9650-1450-01 Rev. D 1-35

21.5 Press the START TEST softkey within 30 After approximately 1 minute, a number appears in the upper middle area of o o
seconds after closing the valve. the NIBP simulator display.
Note: This test takes approximately 3 minutes. If the simulator:
• Displays a Volume Leak reading <5,5 then the E Series unit has passed the
test.
• Displays a Volume Leak reading >5,6 then the E Series unit has failed the
test.
• Displays no Volume Leak reading, but maintains a stable pressure reading
at or above 200 mmHg, then the E Series unit has passed the test; there is
no volume leak.
In addition, the E Series unit displays the simulator’s pressure reading in the
“Cuff Pressure” field.
After approximately 3 minutes, the valves open on the E Series unit.
21.6 On the NIBP Analyzer, press the STOP TEST The NIBP simulator terminates the Volume Leak Test. o o
softkey.
21.7 On the E Series unit, press the EXIT softkey The E Series unit returns to the main NIBP Service Mode screen, then to o o
twice. normal Monitor mode operation.
5
If you are using the Fluke® BiomedicalCuftlink Simulator,the volume leak reading should be <10.
6
If you are using the Fluke® BiomedicalCuftlink Simulator,the volume leak reading for a failure should be >10.
1-36 9650-1450-01 Rev. D

22.0 NIBP Transducer Calibration Test

The NIBP module’s pressure transducers are factory-calibrated prior to shipment. However, you can perform a two-point calibration procedure
periodically to ensure accurate pressure measurements.
This procedure is optional at 6 months, but should be performed annually or every 10,000 readings, whichever comes first.
Test Setup:
2. Configure the NIBP Analyzer to simulate cuff pressure. For example, on the Fluke Biomedical BP Pump 2:
• Press the Home button, then the Pressure Tests button, and then the Static Pressure button.
Note: These instructions apply to the Fluke Biomedical BP Pump; for equivalent devices, follow the manufacturer’s instructions.
22.1 Turn the Selector Switch to OFF. The E Series unit powers on in the NIBP Service Mode.
After 10 seconds, press and hold the fourth
softkey from the left and turn the Selector
Switch to MONITOR (for AED units, turn the
Selector switch to ON).
.
22.2 Press the NIBP Calib softkey. The E Series unit displays the NIBP Transducer Calibration Screen.
22.3 On the NIBP simulator set the pressure The NIBP Simulator displays a pressure reading of 0 mmHg.
parameter to 0 mmHg.
22.4 On the E Series unit, press the Set Low softkey The NIBP pressure transducer registers its voltage output at a known pressure o o
to calibrate the transducer to a 0 mmHg of 0 mmHg. The field adjacent to the 0 mmHg value changes to PASS.
pressure reading. Note: If the E Series unit displays a FAIL reading, verify the NIBP simulator’s
pressure setting and connection to the E Series and repeat the step.
22.5 On the NIBP Simulator, set the pressure The NIBP Simulator displays a pressure reading of 250 mmHg.
parameter to 250 mmHg, and then press Start
on the NIBP simulator.
9650-1450-01 Rev. D 1-37

22.6 On the E Series unit, press the Set High The NIBP pressure transducer registers its voltage output at a known pressure o o
softkey to calibrate the transducer to a of 250 mmHg. The field adjacent to the 250 mmHg value changes to PASS.
250 mmHg pressure reading. Note: If the E Series unit displays a FAIL reading, verify the NIBP Analyzer’s
pressure setting and connection to the E Series and repeat the step.
22.7 On the NIBP simulator, set the pressure The NIBP simulator displays the specified pressure reading.
parameter to stimulate a different cuff pressure
(for example, 205 mmHg).
22.8 On the E Series unit, press the Read Cuff The value that the E Series unit displays is accurate within +/- 3mmHg of the o o
softkey when the simulator’s Measured screen pressure parameter value set on the NIBP simulator.
reaches 205.
22.9 On the E Series unit, press the EXIT softkey The E Series returns to the main NIBP Service Mode screen, then to normal o o
twice. Monitor mode operation.
Warning! NIBP transducer calibration can affect clinical readings of the NIBP parameter. Ensure that the NIBP Transducer Calibration
procedure is performed correctly, followed by an NIBP Monitor Test for verify proper operation.
1-38 9650-1450-01 Rev. D

23.0 NIBP Monitor Test

The NIBP monitor test verifies the repeatability of the systolic, diastolic, and mean blood pressure measurements, as well as the patient pulse rate
calculation.
Note: The primary propose of an NIBP simulator is to reproduce a pressure profile similar to a live patient to be used for testing t h e repeatability
and functionality of the system. There are many different NIBP simulators on the market, each manufacturer uses a different method to
develop their algorithm. Consequently, readings from different simulators may vary. To test for repeatability, you should first establish the
offset1 of your simulator. The offset value should then be used to determine the expected values. NIBP simulators cannot be used as a source
for testing the accuracy of the non-invasive blood pressure measurements of devices such as the ZOLL E Series monitor/defibrillator.
Test Setup:
2. Set the following parameters on the NIBP Analyzer:2
Parameter Value
Systolic pressure 120 mmHg
Diastolic pressure 80 mmHg
Mean pressure 93 mmHg3
Heart pressure 80 bpm
1
NIBP Simulators may produce a reading on the NIBP monitor that is shifted from the simulator's setting. The offset value must be established based on a statis-
tical sample of monitors and readings. Please contact ZOLL Technical Support if you require assistance establishing the offset of the simulator and test set-up
that you are utilizing.
2
If you are using the Fluke® BiomedicalCuftlink, you must change the shift value of the Blood Pressure Envelope to +3 on the Pressure Curve Adjust Menu.
3
Not all simulators have a setting of 93mmHg. Check the simulators user's manual for recommendations.
9650-1450-01 Rev. D 1-39

23.1 Turn the selector switch to MONITOR mode.

23.2 Ensure that the LEADS parameter is set to The E Series unit displays PADS in the Lead selection field on the monitor. o o
PADS (default).
If necessary, press the LEADS button to cycle
through the values to select PADS.
23.3 Press the NIBP button on the E Series front The E Series displays the following measurements: o o
panel. • Systolic pressure (115 - 125 mmHg)
• Diastolic pressure (75 - 85 mmHg)
• Mean pressure (88 - 98 mmHg)
23.4 Press the PARAM softkey, then press the The E Series unit displays a summary of the NIBP measurements, including o o
TREND softkey, followed by the NIBP Trend the pulse rate reading (in the range of 77 - 83 bpm).
softkey.
4
These values only apply for test set-ups utilizing the BP Pump 2 Simulator. Variations of the test set-up or different simulators may produce readings outside
the provided values and will require end-user facility to establish the appropriate offset and tolerances. Please contact ZOLL Technical Support i f you require
assistance establishing the offset o f y o u r simulator and test set-up.
1-40 9650-1450-01 Rev. D

24.0 Bluetooth Test

Tools Needed: USB Bluetooth dongle with driver CD. Bluetooth application software BlueSoleil.
Test Setup:
Verify that the E Series unit is configured as follows: Bluetooth -- INSTALLED; Bluetooth Baud Rate -- 115200.
24.1 Power up the E Series unit while pressing in The E Series unit displays the System Utilities Menu. o o
and holding the left-most soft key.
24.2 Insert a PCMCIA card containing data into the

card reader
24.3 Press the UPLOAD CARD softkey, then press Verify that the Bluetooth LED is on and green. o o
the softkey UPLOAD CARD.
Press the softkey SEND, then press the softkey
Bluetooth.
24.4 Double click on the HyperTerminal shortcut

(BT115200) from the desktop.
Note: Note: If setting up Hyperterminal for the

first time set COM PORT programmed
for Bluetooth adapter, 115200bps, 8, N,
1, N
In the IVT Corporation BlueSoleil window under
“View”, select refresh devices and in the IVT
Corporation BlueSoleil – Main Window. Find the
unit under test Serial Number and double click
on it.
24.5 Find the Serial Port Icon and click on it, (it will At the bottom of the window it states Connected, o o
be highlighted The file transfer window pops up and the file upload progress bar goes to
100%.
The unit displays the file upload message, Card Uploaded.
9650-1450-01 Rev. D 1-41

(This page is intentionally left blank)
1-42 9650-1450-01 Rev. D

Chapter 2
Troubleshooting
Overview
This chapter describes the most common technical problems that biomedical technicians experience when checking the E Series during routine
maintenance or when there is a malfunction of the unit. It also contains a list of error messages that users may see if the unit is not operating properly.
This chapter contains the following:
• Troubleshooting tables for ECG Leads Off Messages and Monitor Displays
• ZOLL E Series Error Messages
If the problems you encounter are not listed below, call ZOLL Medical Corporation’s Technical Service Department for further assistance. (See page vii
for contact information.)
9650-1450-01 Rev. D 2-1

Troubleshooting
The following tables show the most common troubleshooting issues and their solutions.
First, attempt to solve the problem with “Recommended User Action.” If these steps do not solve the problem, follow the steps listed in the
“Recommended Technical Action” column.
Reported Problem Recommended User Action Recommended Technical Action
ECG LEAD OFF message • Check preparation of ECG electrode site by cleaning the site, lightly • Try to reproduce the problem using a simulator.
displays. abrading the patient’s skin and/or clipping the patient’s hair at the • Inspect the ECG cables looking for corrosion or
(3, 5, 12 lead cable) electrode site. broken connector pins.
• If electrode gels are dry, replace electrodes with new ones from a • Check the cable for intermittent connections by
freshly opened package. flexing the cable at the yoke and snap
• Verify that all leads are attached. connectors.
• Set monitor to another lead. • Check the cable connection to the defibrillator.
• Verify that the electrodes have not exceeded their expiration date. • Inspect the ECG input connector and its pins.
Replace it, if necessary.
• Inspect the ECG cable connection to the
system board.
• Inspect the system board ECG shielding.
• Remove and replace the system board.
V LEADS OFF message • If the user is not using V leads, attach V lead connector terminator
displays. plug to the cable’s V lead connector.
• If a V1 lead wire metal snap comes in contact with the patient’s skin,
then the system will show all V leads as OFF.
• Remove V1 leads and others away from the patient. Turn off the unit
and wait ten seconds before turning it back on.
2-2 9650-1450-01 Rev. D

CHECK PADS/POOR PAD • Remove and reinsert PADS connector into the universal cable. • Connect universal cable to the shorting plug.
CONTACT message The DEFIB PAD SHORT message should
• Check for damaged defibrillator pads, wires and or connector.
displays. display, when you SELECT PADS. If the
• Check for dried out or expired defibrillator pads.
message does not display, then:
• Clip (not shave) the patient’s hair and wipe pad contact area dry.
• Try another universal cable.
• Connect the cable to the test plug. The DEFIB PAD SHORT
message displays to indicate that the cable is functioning properly. • Check the cable from the universal cable
connector to the High Voltage Module.
• If the DEFIB PAD SHORT message displays, then check the
connections of the pads to the patient and to the defibrillator cable. • Check the cable from the High Voltage Module
to the system board.
• If the DEFIB PAD SHORT message does not display, remove the
defibrillator from service. • Remove and replace the High Voltage Module.
• Remove and replace the system board.
• Call ZOLL Technical Support for assistance.
Flash or arcing under • Avoiding using alcohol and betadine in and around the treatment • Ensure that wet gel pads are stored flat.
defibrillator pad. area because these skin preparations may lead to increased
conductivity and/or bonding between the electrode’s adhesive and
skin.
• Check for gel droop. If the gel has leaked out of the gel treatment
area, replace the electrode.
• Ensure pads are coupling to the patient’s skin and connected to the
universal cable.
• Check for dried out gel on the defibrillator pad.
• Clip patient’s excessive hair. Do not shave hair.
• Check expiration date. Replace pad if date has expired.
• Do not conduct chest compression through the pads because the
pads could be damaged leading to the possibility of arcing and skin
burns.
• Apply the back electrode first. If the front electrode is already in
place when the patient is being maneuvered for placement on the
back, the front may become partially lifted, possibly causing arching
and skin burns.
Displayed HR not accurate. Verify heart rate flashes with each QRS on display.
No artifact present. • Change lead selection.
• Change ECG size.
• Reposition ECG electrodes.
9650-1450-01 Rev. D 2-3

Displayed HR not accurate; • Reduce or eliminate ECG artifact due to electrode or patient cable • Check for contamination on snaps. Ensure
artifact present. movement. Route cables so that they don’t pull on electrodes or springs are intact.
swing excessively. • Check for intermittent ECG patient cable or
• Ensure patient is motionless. connector wiring.
• Check for possible excessive radio frequency interference. • Replace ECG input connector.
• Verify a good connection of electrodes to the patient. • Replace ECG connector to the system board
• Prepare the patient’s skin prior to the electrode attachment. cable.
• Move patient cables away from other electrical equipment, • Replace system board.
especially any RFI source.
• Ensure ECG cable fits snugly in unit.
• Change ECG cable.
• Replace/reposition ECG electrodes.
• Disable “Enable Pacer Detection” to reduce the effect of artifact.
False “Pacer Pulses Seen” The patient does not have an internal pacemaker, but pacer pulses are
displayed.
• Disable “Enable Pacer Detection” to reduce high frequency artifact.
Wandering baseline. See “Displayed HR not accurate.” above. Same as above example.
Electronic interference. Check for possible excessive radio frequency interference. • Turn off sources of excessive RFI.
Move patient cables away from other electrical equipment. • Move E Series unit away from RFI source.
2-4 9650-1450-01 Rev. D

ZOLL E Series Error Messages

The following is a list of ZOLL E Series error messages that may appear on your display. The “User Advisory” column informs you about an action in
progress or provides feedback on a user correctable situation that typically does not require further technical support. The “Technical Action” column
describes what you as a technician can do to correct the situation. Note that these messages will sometimes overlap part of the waveform display.
First, attempt to clear the message by turning the Selector Switch to OFF for ten seconds, then back to the desired operating mode. If the fault persists, call
ZOLL Technical Service.
Error Message Explanation User Technical Action

Advisory
200J MAX BIPHASIC User attempted to set defibrillation energy >200J on 

Biphasic Unit. No higher energy is available.
ANALYSIS HALTED • ECG analysis halted due to user interaction such as: 
• Lead/size change
• Analyze button was pressed again
• Impedance fault
• Charging error detected in auto defib mode
AUDIO FAULT 136 Audio DSP hardware error. Replace audio board.
Replace system board.Turn unit off and back on
again.
AUDIO NOT RECORDING Audio is not recording. Install PCMCIA card. Replace system board.
AUDIO QUEUE FULL Indicates that the audio output queue is full. Additional None.
voice prompts can't be queued at this time.
BATT HIGH CURRENT Battery is charged and battery current is >.1 A or: Unplug from A/C. Remove the battery for 20
Battery is not charged and battery current is > 1.6 A. seconds. Reconnect all above. If the problem
persists, replace battery and or charger.
BATT HIGH VOLTAGE Battery voltage > 15.5 v. Replace battery and or charger
BATT LOW CURRENT Battery is not charged and battery current is <.35 A. Replace battery and or charger.
BATT LOW VOLTAGE Battery voltage < 9.5 v. Replace battery and or charger.
BATT OVERCHARGE Charger on for > 4 hours. Replace battery and or charger.
9650-1450-01 Rev. D 2-5


Advisory
CABLE FAULT (Auto defib mode only.)  Replace paddle set, universal cable and/or
Incorrect A/D reading for paddle ID (similar to PADDLE system board.
FAULT).
CARD FULL Memory Card Full. 

CHECK CO2 SENSOR EtCO2 Sensor is unplugged or defective.  Check that sensor cable is plugged in and seated
properly. Check that sensor is not exposed to
excessive heat. If problem persists, replace the
sensor.
CHECK CO2 ADAPTER Airway adapter is removed, occluded or adapter zeroing  Replace/Clean airway adapter. Zeroing performed
needs to be performed or was performed incorrectly. automatically.
CHECK PADS Message displayed in conjunction with either POOR PAD  Ensure pads are coupled to patient. Check /
CONTACT or DEFIB PAD SHORT. replace pads and universal cable.
Replace system board.
CHECK PATIENT Background ECG analysis detects shockable rhythm. 

CHECK PULSE Alternate message for NO SHOCK ADVISED 
message.Message also shown after delivering third shock
when auto analyze 3 times option is enabled.
CHECK RECORDER Produced when paper tray is empty, paper jams or  Replace paper sensor board, system interconnect
recorder door is opened. board, and/or system board.
CHECK SPO2 SENSOR Reposition SpO2 sensor on patient.
CLOCK FAULT 11 Real time clock oscillator failure. Replace system board.
CLOCK FAULT 12 Real time clock back-up power supply failure. Found Replace system board.
oscillator stopped at power-up, but oscillator now running
when the system is running. (Oscillator only runs when
main power is applied).
CLOCK FAULT 13 One of the set time units (seconds, minutes, year, etc.) is Replace system board.
out of range.
2-6 9650-1450-01 Rev. D


Advisory
CONFIRM MANUAL MODE Displayed when manual mode is entered. Alerts user to 
confirm that manual mode is desired.
DEFIB DISABLED User prompt issued simultaneously with other faults if Possible configuration problem. Replace high
defib is disabled. voltage module. Call ZOLL Technical Support.
DEFIB FAULT 71 More than 50 internal dumps occurred in less than 20 Turn the unit to OFF and back on. If fault persists,
minutes. replace high voltage module.
DEFIB FAULT 72 Charging inhibited, voltage out of range. Turn the unit to OFF and back on. If fault persists,
replace high voltage module.
DEFIB FAULT 76 Capacitor voltage too high for selected energy. Replace high voltage module or capacitor.
DEFIB FAULT 77 Capacitor voltage > than absolute rated max. Replace high voltage module or capacitor.
DEFIB FAULT 78 Unable to charge defib cap. Replace high voltage module or capacitor.
DEFIB FAULT 79 Defibrillator charging too slowly. Replace high voltage module or capacitor.
DEFIB FAULT 80 4 defibrillator faults detected within 20 second period. Replace high voltage module or capacitor.
DEFIB FAULT 81 Discharge switch in undefined state. Replace high voltage module or capacitor.
DEFIB FAULT 84 “Upper” discharge transistor shorted (measured via Replace high voltage module.
applicable A/D channel).
DEFIB FAULT 85 “Lower” discharge transistor shorted (measured via Replace high voltage module.
applicable A/D channel).
DEFIB FAULT 86 One discharge switch closed during power up test. Replace paddles, control board or system board.
DEFIB FAULT 87 Both discharge switches closed during power up test. Replace paddles, control board or system board.
DEFIB FAULT 94 Processor fault causing safety monitor port to be non- Replace system board, high voltage module or
functional. capacitor.
DEFIB FAULT 95 Safe or shutdown line is not functional. Replace high voltage module.
DEFIB FAULT 108 VMON voltage is less than the target energy during Replace high voltage module or capacitor.
charging.
9650-1450-01 Rev. D 2-7


Advisory
DEFIB FAULT 109 Defib capacitor voltage is greater than selected energy Replace high voltage module or capacitor.
when defibrillator is charging or ready.
DEFIB FAULT 111 Defib capacitor voltage has exceeded the absolute Replace high voltage module, capacitor, and or
maximum acceptable voltage. system board.
DEFIB FAULT 195 Current higher than expected was detected during the Ensure pads/paddles are used properly.
Biphasic bridge test or immediately following a discharge.
Attempt to clear the message by turning the
Selector switch to off then back to the desired
operating modes.
Replace bridge or high voltage module.
DEFIB FAULT 196 Biphasic module not operating properly while charging. Charge again.
Attempt to clear the message by turning the

Selector switch to OFF, then back to the desired
operating mode.
Replace bridge or high voltage module.
DEFIB NOT CHARGED Discharge button is pressed but the unit is not charged. 
DEFIB PAD SHORT Measured impedance between high voltage leads of MFC.  Ensure pads are coupled to patient. Check /
replace pads or universal cable.
DISABLE SYNC Sync mode active when analyze pressed in defib. 

DISCHARGE FAULT Defib capacitor voltage is not decreasing. Replace high voltage module, capacitor, and/or
system board.
ECG FAULT 4 Communication fault between ECG processor and main Turn off unit and then turn on to reset. If fault
processor. persists, replace system board.
ECG FAULT 5 ECU RAM test failure, or ROM checksum test failure. Turn off unit and then turn on to reset. If fault
persists, replace system board.
2-8 9650-1450-01 Rev. D


Advisory
ECG LEAD OFF One or more ECG leads are not properly connected when  Check cable and patient connection. Change
leads are selected as input. electrodes. Prepare patient’s skin.
ECG TOO LARGE ECG signal too large for accurate shockable rhythm  Reduce ECG size.
analysis.
ECG V LEAD OFF V LEAD cable is not properly attached.  Attach V LEAD cable.
ECG V1 LEAD OFF Chest lead V1 is not properly attached to patient.  Reattach V lead. Check cable.
ECG V2 LEAD OFF Chest lead V2 is not properly attached to patient.  Reattach V lead.
Check cable.
Check cable.
Check cable.
Check cable.
ECG V6 LEAD OFF Chest lead V6 is not properly attached to patient.  Reattach V lead. Check cable.
ENTER ACCESS CODE Manual mode access code needed.  Enter access code to enter manual mode with
AED.
ERASING REPORT Summary report being erased. 

FAX BUSY FAX line at receiving FAX is busy. 
FAX DIALING Preparation for sending fax. 
FAX DONE Transmission complete. 
FAX PREPARING Preparing fax for transmission. 
FAX SENDING Transmitting fax. 
9650-1450-01 Rev. D 2-9


Advisory
INSERT CARD No card installed in unit during manual or semi-automated 

Check memory card modes.
LOW BATTERY Low battery.  Replace battery or plug into AC power. Replace
charger.
NO QRS DETECT Unit is in sync mode and heart rate is < 20 BPM or QRS  Increase ECG size and/or change lead.
amplitude is too low for proper synchronization.
NO SHOCK ADV No shock advised. Advisory message when analysis finds 

non-shockable rhythm.
NOISY ECG Number of noisy analysis intervals exceeds threshold.  Stop all patient movement. Check connections.
Press Analyze button again.
OPEN AIR DISCHARGE Cap voltage too high after discharge attempt, e.g., full Replace paddles, and, or high voltage module and
energy discharge did not occur. system board.
PACER DISABLED User prompt issued simultaneously with other pace faults Replace high voltage module or system board.
if pacing is disabled.
PACER FAULT 115 Flyback pulse width control circuit is not under proper Replace high voltage module, capacitor, or
control of the processor and gate array. system board.
PACER FAULT 116 Failure to detect XPACE_ON. Replace high voltage module, capacitor, and/or
system board.
PACER FAULT 117 Pace relay is stuck closed. Replace high voltage module, capacitor, and/or
system board.
PACER FAULT 121 During pace, the pace pulse width <30ms or >50ms. Replace high voltage module, or system board.
PACER FAULT 122 Pace current is more than 15mA above and below Replace high voltage module, or system board.
selected value.
PACER FAULT 123 Measured pace rate is too fast compared to selected rate. Replace high voltage module or system board.
PACER FAULT 126 Issued in conjunction with message 122. Pace current is Replace high voltage module.
more than 15mA and below selected value.
2-10 9650-1450-01 Rev. D


Advisory
PADDLE FAULT Cannot detect type of accessory attached to the universal Replace paddles, internal paddles, system board,
cable. high voltage module and/or universal cable.
PERFORM CPR Advisory message in AED auto defib mode. 

POOR LEAD CONTACT One or more ECG leads are poorly connected or not  Check electrode attachment to patient, cable
connected to patient. (User configurable.) connector to electrode, cable to unit connector.
Broken unit.
POOR PAD CONTACT Electrode impedance exceeds threshold.  Ensure pads are coupled to patient. Check /
replace pads or universal cable.
Check impedance circuit calibration.
PRESS ANALYZE Alternate message for check patient prompt. 

PRESS CHARGE Advisory message in conjunction with shock advised. 
PRESS SHOCK Prompt issued in AED auto defib mode when defib is 
charged (ready).
RECORDER FAULT 142 Strip chart system error. Check paper tray and paper path. Replace the
print head, system interconnect board and or the
system board.
RECORDER FAULT 143 Strip chart failed power-up echo test. Communications Check paper tray and paper path. Replace the
error. system interconnect board and/or the system
board. Turn unit off and back on again.
RECORDER FAULT 147 Strip chart print head over temperature. Check paper tray and paper path. Replace the
print head, system interconnect board and/or the
system board.
RELEASE BUTTONS Simultaneous external paddle button presses detected  Release buttons.
before unit reached full defib charge (ready state).
RELEASE SHOCK Discharge switch(es) closed when pressing charge button.  Release shock button.
Discharge button pressed before defib reached ready Check paddles.
state.
Replace controls board.
9650-1450-01 Rev. D 2-11


Advisory
REPLACE BATTERY Battery voltage is less than absolute minimum. Shutdown  Replace with charged battery.
imminent.
REPLACE CARD Write errors during manual or semi-automated modes.  May have configuration card installed or write
protection on.
REPORT FULL Summary report memory full.  Erase summary report.
REPORT HALTED Summary report stops printing unexpectedly. Turn unit off and then back on again. Print
Summary again. If fault persists, replace system
board.
SELECT 30J FOR TEST Attempt to run a self test at an energy other than 30J. 
SELECT DEFIB MODE Analyze button pressed in pace or monitor mode. 
SELECT LEADS 12 Lead monitor determined the user selected MFE.
SELECT LIMB LEADS Paddles or augmented ECG leads selected when  Select limb leads I, II, III or MFE
continuous analysis active or started.
SELECT PADS Lead I, II, or III selected when analyze pressed. 

SET CLOCK Real time clock failure: invalid date or time. Set date and time and/or replace system board.
SET PACE mA Multiple copy errors are the product of intended software  Set pace current. If broken, replace system board.
or memory errors. If error reoccurs other than on entering
pace the first time or after more than 10 minutes in other
mode, the unit could be broken.
SET PACE RATE Multiple copy errors are the product of intended software  Set pace rate. If broken, replace system board.
or memory errors. Multiple copies of pace rate don't
match. If error persists, unit could be broken
SHOCK ADVISED Advisory message when analysis finds a shockable 

rhythm.
SpO2 AMBIENT LIGHT Ambient light is too bright. Shield sensor from ambient light. Replace Sp02
sensor. Replace Sp02 module
2-12 9650-1450-01 Rev. D


Advisory
SpO2 COMM ERR No transmissions from SpO2unit received. Communication Replace Sp02 module and/or system board.
error or no communication from Sp02 module.
SpO2 PULSE SEARCH Pulse search in progress. 

STAND CLEAR (Auto defib mode only.) Single analysis mode just turned 
on and defib idle. Patient rhythm is being analyzed.
SYSTEM FAULT 1 No Watchdog. Turn off unit and then turn on to reset. If fault
SYSTEM FAULT 6 No communications received from ECU for 4 seconds. Turn off unit and then turn on to reset. If fault
SYSTEM FAULT 7 The A/D converter is not performing conversions in a Replace system board.
timely manner.
SYSTEM FAULT 36 PS_MON is out of range. Pace/defib is disabled as long as Replace system board.
condition exits.
SYSTEM FAULT 37 Disable pace/defib and MFE monitoring. Replace system board.
SYSTEM FAULT 38 Failure to shutdown after “shutdown order” is written to the Replace system board.
RTC.
TEST FAILED MCU performed ipeak test (defib peak current) and unit  Replace universal cable, paddles or high voltage
failed during 30J self test. module, capacitor, or system board.
TEST OK MCU performed ipeak test (defib peak current) and unit 
passed 30J self test.
USE PADDLE DISCHG Front Panel discharge button is pressed when either 
external paddles or internal spoons with discharge buttons
are connected.
USE PADS (AUTO DEFIB MODE ONLY.) 

Attempt to defib with paddles in auto defib (AED) mode.
Defib only allowed using PADS in AED modes.
USE PADS TO PACE External paddles detected in pace mode. 
9650-1450-01 Rev. D 2-13


Advisory
USER SETUP REQ Both copies of stored cal/config data are bad or have  Perform configuration setup.
never been programmed.
VF ALARMS OFF VF alarms disabled in pace mode or when paddles are 

selected as leads.
VX LEADS OFF V lead not properly attached to patient. “X” denotes lead  Reattach V lead.
number.
ZERO CO2 ADAPTER New EtCO2 airway adapter needs to be zero calibrated.  Zero EtCO2 adapter.
2-14 9650-1450-01 Rev. D

Chapter 3
Replacement Parts
This section contains a listing of the replacement parts available for the ZOLL E Series devices.
Replacement parts may be ordered through an authorized ZOLL distributor or directly from ZOLL Medical Corporation. The prices for parts are available
from ZOLL Medical Corporation’s Technical Service Department.
When ordering parts, please provide the following information:
• ZOLL E Series device model and serial number
• Replaceable unit part number
• Description of the replacement part
• Description of problem
To order by mail from ZOLL Medical Corporation, address your request to:
269 Mill Road
Chelmsford, MA. 01824-4105
Attention: Technical Service Department
1-978-421-9655; 1-800-348-9011; Fax: 1-978-421-0010
Note: ZOLL reserves the right to substitute different parts to reflect modifications and improvements in ZOLL E Series circuitry and design.
9650-1450-01 Rev. D 3-1

Replacement Parts
Item numbers correspond to the parts diagrams beginning on page 3-7.
Description Part Number Item #
UPPER HOUSING, E SERIES 1005‐0026 1
SUBASSY, PRINTER, E SERIES 1005‐0001 2
SCR,#6‐32,MCH,1‐7/8",PNH,PHL,SST, RoHS 0163‐0454 3
SCR,#4‐40,MCH,1/4",PNH,PHL,STL,ZNC,EXT, RoHS 0163‐0900 4
LABEL SET, SERIAL NUMBER, W/BAR CODE 9305‐0513 5
WASHER, EXT, #6, SS, RoHS 0163‐0027 6
CABLE, SYSTEM INTERCONNECT TO PRINTER 9500‐0725 7
INTERCONNECT, E SERIES
MAG.TOROID.FERRITE.HT3.81MM OD8.51MM ID3.45MM 0140‐0106 8
CABLE, BATTERY INTERCONNECT TO SYSTEM 9500‐0721 9
INTERCONNECT,SM BUS,E SERIES
CABLE, BATTERY INTERCONNECT TO HVM, PACE, E SERIES 9500‐0719 10
ASSY, PCB, BATTERY INTERCONNECT, ESERIES 9301‐1389‐01 11
STDF.M/F.0.250"HEX.0.250".4‐40.BRS.. 0160‐0075 12
NUT, KEPS, 4‐40, SS, RoHS 0163‐0285 13
SCR.PPH.4 X.0.250"ZI.HI/LO 0163‐1215 14
CABLE, BATTERY INTERCONNECT TO AC CHARGER, E SERIES 9500‐0717 15
SCR,#2‐56,MCH,1/4",PNH,PHL,STL, RoHS 0163‐2502 16
SPACER (FORMED), CAPACITOR TOP, E SERIES 9310‐0912 17
3-2 9650-1450-01 Rev. D

ASSY, PCB, COMMUNICATION CARRIER, W/BLUETOOTH, 9301‐0390‐02 18
E SERIES
SCR.PPH.#4 X.0.375"ZI.HI/LO 0163‐1217 19
CABLE, SYSTEM INTERCONNECT TO COMMUNICATIONS 9500‐0724 20
CARRIER, E SERIES
SUBASSY, AC CHARGER, E SERIES 1005‐0003 21
ASSY, E SERIES, HV MODULE 1001‐0278‐02 22
HVM BASE, ESERIES 9310‐0904 23
CABLE, BATTERY INTERCONNECT TO HVM, DEFIB , E SERIES 9500‐0720 24
CABLE, BATTERY INTERCONNECT TO HVM, E SERIES 9500‐0718 25
TAPE KAPTON, 1 ¼" WIDE, 0.0025" THICK 36 YDS LONG 0550‐0003 26
ASSY, CONNECTOR PANEL, AC, E SERIES 1005‐0021‐03 27
SCR.PPH.#6.x 3/4".STL.ZN.HI/LO 0163‐0409 28
CLAMP, HOUSING, CO, E SERIES 9310‐0981 29
ASSY, CAPACITOR, AC CHARGER, SEQ E020, SUB ASSY 1, 1005‐0024 30
E SERIES
TY‐RAP CABLE TIE STD 18 LB .093W X 3.62 L 0501‐0001 31
CABLE, MFC SIGNAL, TO HV MODULE, E SERIES 9500‐0734 32
SUBASSY, FRONT END, NO AUDIO, E SERIES 1015‐0005‐01 33
ASSEMBLY, FOAM TO BATTERY PWBA CONNECTOR 1005‐0023 34
INTERLOCK, E SERIES
9650-1450-01 Rev. D 3-3

ASSY, MID FRAME, GENERIC, E SERIES 1005‐0005‐01 36
SCR,#4‐40,MCH,1/2",PNH,PHL,SST,EXT, RoHS 0163‐0410 37
TYWRAP CABLE .070"Wx.030"x2.8"LG NYLON 0501‐0023 38
MX‐1 BOARD 3005‐0005 39
SCR.PPH.4 X.0.250"..ZI.HI/LO 0163‐1215 40
ASSY, PCB, ESERIES, ISOLATED POWER SUPPLY 9301‐1383‐01 41
CABLE, FLEX, SYSTEM TO ISOLATED POWER SUPPLY, E SERIES 9500‐0779 42
CABLE, FLEX, MX‐1 TO ISO POWER SUPPLY, E SERIES 9500‐0786 43
STOP, CONNECTOR HEADER, E SERIES 9330‐0484 44
TAPE KAPTON, 1 ¼" WIDE, 0.0025" THICK 36 YDS LONG 0550‐0003 45
NIBP ADV2 MODULE W/PUMP, E SERIES 1005‐0018 46
ASSY, LOWER HOUSING, E SERIES 1005‐0014 47
CABLE, AC RECEPTACLE TO CHARGER 9500‐0739 48
SCR,#4‐40,MCH,7/16",FLT,PHL,SST, RoHS 0163‐0779 49
SCR.PPH.6X.0.625"..ZI.HI/LO 0163‐1232 50
ASSY, INTERLOCK CONNECTOR, E SERIES 1005‐000035‐01 51
RETAINER, MFC, E SERIES 9310‐000705 52
ASSY, FRONT PANEL, SUBASSY, NO VOICE, E SERIES 1005‐0029‐02 53
ASSY, DISPLAY PANEL, E SERIES 1005‐0009 54
ASSY, PCB, ESERIES, CONTROL BOARD PACE 9301‐0384‐01 55
ASSY, CABLE, CONNECTOR, INVERTER, COLOR LCD 9500‐0312 56
3-4 9650-1450-01 Rev. D

CABLE, CONTROL TO DISPLAY, POWER 9500‐0712 57
CABLE, DF9, CONTROLS TO SYSTEM PWBA, E SERIES 9500‐0776 58
ASSY, DISPLAY BACKER, PLATE, E SERIES 1005‐0010 59
GASKET, BEEPER, M‐SERIES 9161‐0010 60
WASHER, ANTI‐ROTATION 9160‐0012 61
CUP, PACER 9310‐0519 62
WASHER, ANTI‐ROTATION 9160‐0011 63
DIFFUSER, REVIVER 9310‐0590 64
PANEL, FRONT, PUSHBUTTON, REVIVER 9310‐0549 65
ISOPROPANOL.REAGENT GRADE.99.8% PURITY 0550‐0186 66
SUPPORT, CONTROL BOARD, E SERIES 9310‐0932 67
SNAP RIVET BLACK NYLON 0163‐1709 68
LABEL, SUB‐ASSY, BAR CODE ID 0305‐0020 69
BEZEL, TOP, E SERIES 9310‐1913 70
SCR,#6‐32,MCH,1/4",PNH,PHL,STL,ZNC,INT, RoHS 0163‐0278 71
COVER, PCMCIA, E SERIES 9310‐0914 72
CONNECTOR INTERLOCK (DISPLAY TO SYSTEM), E SERIES 9330‐0923 74
ASSY, CO CONNECTOR HOUSING, E SERIES 1005‐0025 75
SCR,#4‐40,MCH,5/8",PNH,PHL,SST,EXT, LE, RoHS 0163‐2513 76
SCR.PPH.6‐32X.0.500".SS..SELF SEAL 0163‐2000 77
9650-1450-01 Rev. D 3-5

ASSY, CABLE, MULTI FUNCTION AND TEST PORT 1001‐0194‐01 78
GREASE CHEMICAL RESISTANT 0550‐0500 79
ASSY, HANDLE, E SERIES 1005‐0028 80
WASHER 0.010 IN SHIM.FOR SHDR SCR.0.251 IN ID X.0.375 0163‐0452 81
IN OD.18‐8 SST.
SCR.SKT HD/HEX.10‐32.0.250".303 SS.0.1880" SHLD LEN 0163‐0406 82
W/PATCH
KNOB, PACER 9310‐0520 83
SEAL, KNOB, INJECTION MOLDED, M‐SERIES 9310‐0698 84
KNOB, MAIN W/SPRING, M/E SERIES 9310‐0704‐01 85
FILLER, LI‐ION BATTERY, ESERIES 9310‐0903 86
LABEL, PANEL CONNECTOR, NIBP/ETCO2, AC, LEFT, E SERIES 9305‐0931‐01 88
LABEL, PANEL CONNECTOR, SPO2, E SERIES 9305‐0938‐01 89
LABEL, PANEL CONNECTOR, MFC/ECG, RIGHT, E SERIES 9305‐0937‐01 90
No Options Label 91
BRACKET, PCMCIA MODEM LOCK 9320‐0528 93
3-6 9650-1450-01 Rev. D

Parts Diagrams
9650-1450-01 Rev. D 3-7

3-8 9650-1450-01 Rev. D

9650-1450-01 Rev. D 3-9

3-10 9650-1450-01 Rev. D

9650-1450-01 Rev. D 3-11

3-12 9650-1450-01 Rev. D

9650-1450-01 Rev. D 3-13

3-14 9650-1450-01 Rev. D

9650-1450-01 Rev. D 3-15

3-16 9650-1450-01 Rev. D

9650-1450-01 Rev. D 3-17

3-18 9650-1450-01 Rev. D

9650-1450-01 Rev. D 3-19

3-20 9650-1450-01 Rev. D

9650-1450-01 Rev. D 3-21

3-22 9650-1450-01 Rev. D

9650-1450-01 Rev. D 3-23

3-24 9650-1450-01 Rev. D

9650-1450-01 Rev. D 3-25

3-26 9650-1450-01 Rev. D

9650-1450-01 Rev. D 3-27

3-28 9650-1450-01 Rev. D

9650-1450-01 Rev. D 3-29

3-30 9650-1450-01 Rev. D

Chapter 4
Functional Description
This chapter provides functional descriptions of the components contained in the ZOLL E Series and the E Series options. Refer to the interconnect
diagram that delineates the different components of the defibrillator.
This chapter includes:
• Main System Board
• Main System Board Functions
• Power Supply
• User Interface
• Audio I/O Module
• ECG Front End
• Multifunction (MFE) Paddles
• Main CPU and EPU

• High Voltage Modules
• Defibrillator Charging and Discharging
• High Voltage Capacitor Module
• Pacer and Defibrillator Control Signals
• Internal Discharge Resistor Module

• AC/DC Charger
• AC/DC Charger Module
• System Interconnect Board
• Stripchart Recorder
9650-1450-01 Rev. D 4-1

• PCMCIA Slots
• Front Panel and Display

• E Series Options
• 12 Lead Monitoring
• Pulse Oximetry (SpO2)
• End Tidal Carbon Dioxide (EtCO2)
• Noninvasive Blood Pressure
Main System Board

The E Series electrical circuitry consists of several functional modules. Each module is physically located on one or more of the printed wiring board
assemblies (PWBA). In some cases, a functional module is distributed across several assemblies within the unit. The main components of the E Series
include:
• Display
• Main System Board
• High Voltage Module
• AC/DC Charger
• Battery Interconnect Module
• System Interconnect Module
• High Voltage Capacitor
Some units are equipped with E Series options. These options include:
• 12 Lead ECG
• Pulse Oximetry (SpO2)
• End Tidal Carbon Dioxide (EtCO2)
• Noninvasive Blood Pressure
4-2 9650-1450-01 Rev. D

Refer to the E Series Interconnect diagram to identify unit components described in this manual.
Module Location
Main Central Processing Unit (CPU) and ECU Main System PWBA
Pacer/Defib Charging and High Voltage Control (Defib/Pace) High Voltage Module
Biphasic Bridge Module
Internal Discharge Resistor HV Module
AC or DC Power Supply/Battery Charger AC Charger PWBA

DC Charger PWBA
Main System PWBA
ECG Front End Signal Acquisition Main System PWBA
Battery Pack or Smart Battery Battery Interconnect PWBA
User Interface and Controls Controls PWBA
PCMCIA Interface System Interconnect, Main System
Stripchart Recorder System Interconnect, Main System
Audio I/O (optional) Main System PWBA

Audio Display PWBA
Controls PWBA
SpO2 (optional) Pulse Oximetry PWBA

Isolated Power Supply PWBA
EtCO2 (optional) Isolated Power Supply PWBA
12 Lead (optional) Main System PWBA
NIBP (optional) NIBP PWBA
9650-1450-01 Rev. D 4-3

Main System Board Functions

The Main System Board contains the major computing and control elements for the E Series unit. The printed wiring board assembly (PWBA) receives
signals from the front panel control switches, ECG input connectors and functional modules, such as the AC/DC charger, pacer/defibrillator modules,
stripchart recorder and PCMCIA card interfaces, and if applicable, the SpO2, EtCO2 and NIBP modules. The Main System Board monitors and processes
these input signals to produce other signals that: 1) control the operation of other modules within the system; 2) drive the unit’s front panel display and
audio outputs and; 3) store data for retrieval via Summary Reports, PCMCIA cards and/ or a modem.
The electronic circuitry and software contained on the main system board performs the following major E Series functions:
1. Main CPU and memory.
2. ECG signal acquisition and processing for ECG leads including,
• A/D conversion.
• ECG signal filtering.
• QRS detection.
• Implanted pacemaker detection.
• Heart Rate counting.
• Shockable ECG rhythm analysis.

3. Data communications with and control over the SpO2, EtCO2 and NIBP modules.
4. Control over and safety monitoring of pacer and defibrillator functions performed by the High Voltage module and Biphasic Bridge module.
5. Physiological alarm processing.
6. Control switch monitoring for the front panel, accessory connection monitoring and control over the system response to switch activation or accessory
connection to the E Series.
7. Format and updating of the front panel display.
8. Primary power supplies for the unit.
9. Audio output generation and control (e.g., alarms, voice prompts, warning tones).
10. Audio signal processing, data compression and storage of voice recording data.
11. Real time clock and other time keeping functions.
12. Summary Report, 12 Lead ECG Reports data storage.
13. Monitoring of battery status and control over Battery Charging functions performed by the AC or DC Charger PWBA.
14. Data transmission to and control over the System Interconnect PCB functions, including the stripchart recorder and the PCMCIA slot functions.
4-4 9650-1450-01 Rev. D

Power Supply
The power supply converts DC power from a removable battery or the AC/DC Battery Charger module to voltages required by the E Series hardware.
The power supply circuit converts the raw battery or the Charger PWBA output voltages of +8.5 VDC to +16 VDC into the voltages shown in the table
below, including load and line regulation.
VOLTAGE DESCRIPTION VOLTAGE VDC COMMENTS

(Nominal)
FUSE_PWR Fused Input Power from Battery/Charger 12
SW_PWR Switched Input Power after Power Switch 12
3VDD + 3.3 VDC Power for Digital circuits 3.3 Switching @ 300 kHz
5VDD + 5.0 VDC Power for Digital circuits 5.0 Switching @ 300 kHz
-5VSS - 5.0 VDC Power for Analog circuits -5.0 Linear
12VEE + 12.0 VDC Power for Analog circuits 12.0 Linear
15VDD + 15.0 VDC Power for VPP and 12VEE 15.0 Switching @ 300 kHz
LCD_BS LCD BIAS Power for LCD display - 18 Switching @ 100 kHz
3_3REF + 3.3 VDC Reference 3.3 Linear
9650-1450-01 Rev. D 4-5

ECG Front End

The ECG front end provides an electrically isolated serial interface between the main system board functions and patient interface ECG connectors. It
performs the following:
• Analog ECG amplification and signal conditioning.
• Pacemaker pulse detection.
• ECG signals acquisition and analog to digital conversion.
• ECG 3/5/12-lead detection.
• ECG leads off detection.
• Front-end defibrillator protection.
• Isolated power conditioning.
• Patient impedance measurement via MFE or paddles.
Multifunction Electrode (MFE)/PADS (System Board and High Voltage Module)

Selected for optimal performance for the application, a dedicated ECG amplifier with a limited bandwidth processes the signal. It is then chopper
modulated and coupled to the system side via an isolation transformer. On the system side, the signal is synchronously demodulated, converted by a 10 bit
A/D at 250 samples per second and digitally processed by the main control unit of the system board.
To measure thoracic impedance, a high frequency (HF) measuring current passes through the patient’s chest and measures the resulting voltage across the
electrodes. After amplification, the impedance signal is synchronously demodulated. It is then converted to a stream of pulses with frequency proportional
to the measured impedance.
CPU and EPU

The Main System Board contains two microprocessors. A Motorola HC-11 single chip microprocessor is used to acquire, convert and process ECG
signals, (ECU). A Hitachi SH-3 RISC microprocessor acts as the system’s main CPU. The SH-3 CPU has an integrated on-chip multiplier, a cache
memory, a memory management unit as well as data protection and virtual memory functions. It also has a timer, a real time clock, an interrupt controller,
a serial communication interface (SCI), and other peripheral functions necessary for the system operation. The memory circuitry includes Flash ROM,
internal flash non-volatile memory and DRAM.
The EPU acquires ECG data and runs the A/D convertor that sends data in the form of a serial stream to the CPU.
4-6 9650-1450-01 Rev. D

High Voltage Module

The High Voltage (HV) module includes the high voltage circuitry required for pacing and defibrillation, including the defib charge circuitry, patient relay,
safety relay, defib capacitor, defib choke and front end protection circuitry for the MFC ECG.
The following table describes the high voltage board components:
Component Function
Solid State Patient Relay Controls the delivery of therapeutic energy to patient.
Safety Relay Discharges Defib capacitor into the internal discharge

resistor when defibrillator is not in use.
Defibrillator Capacitor Stores energy for therapy.
Defibrillator Choke Conditions waveform delivered to the patient.(DSW)
Front End Protection Circuitry for Protects ECG front end against defibrillator pulses.
the MFC ECG
Defibrillator Charging and Discharging

The defibrillator charges and discharges high voltage capacitor energy. A user can initiate a charge in three ways by 1) pressing the charge button on the
front panel; or (2) pressing the charge button on the paddles; or (3) configuring unit to charge automatically when it detects a shockable rhythm following
an ECG analysis. To initiate a discharge, a user depresses both shock buttons on the paddles or depresses a single shock button on the front panel.
The defibrillator circuit charges the high voltage capacitor to the energy level the user specifies.This circuit also provides feedback to the main system
board on the high voltage capacitor's voltage level and discharges the high voltage capacitor energy through paddles or the universal cable. The
defibrillator portion of the high voltage circuitry is active only when the front panel selector switch is set to DEFIB (or set to ON for AED units).
Charging
The charging process starts when the Main System Board detects a charge request. The defibrillator circuits begin charging the high voltage capacitor to
the target voltage or energy that the user selects on the front panel display. The Main System Board continuously monitors the capacitor voltage signal to
ensure that the high voltage capacitor charges at the proper rate. When the target voltage is reached, the Main System Board initiates a continuous beeper
tone to indicate that defibrillator is ready to discharge. The target energy level displays on the display screen.
The defibrillator holds the energy for 60 seconds for manual units and 15 seconds for AED units, refreshing the energy level as necessary. An intermittent
beep tone sounds during the last ten seconds (five seconds for AED unit) of the hold period. After the 60 second period, if the defibrillator has not been
9650-1450-01 Rev. D 4-7

discharged, the energy is dissipated into the internal discharge resistor by closing the safety relay (XSAFREL). The unit discharges internally and displays
a warning message if it is not functioning properly.
Unlike previous ZOLL designs that isolated the patient from defib circuitry via an electromechanical patient relay, the E Series utilizes a bank of silicon-
controlled rectifiers (SCRs). As the defibrillator capacitor is charged, the voltage is monitored via R1 - R4, which drive differential amplifiers referred to
the system ground. These resistor dividers split the capacitor voltage more or less equally above and below ground in order that the positive capacitor
terminal is approximately 1100 volts above ground, and the negative capacitor terminal is approximately 1100 volts below ground (at 200J setting). The
voltage at the patient electrodes is set by the divider RN1 and RN2. These networks are each 5X 25 M (125 M total) whose total resistance is specified to
be 125 M +\- 1%. As a result, the patient is nominally at ground and the hot switch bank is split into a ‘positive’ side and a ‘negative’ side.
Discharging
Initiating a discharge provides voltage to the patient relay and notification to the Main System Board through the PADMON signal. The Main System
Board then controls activation of the patient relay. Energy delivered to the patient goes through the biphasic bridge/DAC assembly to create a defibrillation
waveform. When the patient discharge SCRs are deactivated, the safety relay closes to internally dissipate any remaining energy.
If the E Series is in the self test mode, the energy is delivered internally. The microprocessor calculates the actual delivered energy from the current
waveform and displays a TEST OK message on the display, if the self test meets the appropriate criteria. If the criteria are not met, a TEST FAILED
message displays.
High Voltage Capacitor Monitor

Before charging the defibrillator, the High Voltage Capacitor monitor runs a self test to check the pace relay. The pace relay controls the high voltage
circuitry configuration either for generating pace pulses or for charging the high voltage defibrillation capacitor.
The defibrillator capacitor is shunted for safety reasons with a resistor and relay to internally dissipate any energy remaining. When the Main System
Board initiates a charge, this relay opens by providing a low level on signal XSAFREL. The safety relay is a biased reed switch. The relay is driven by
Q318.
The pace relay driver is a grounded source switch Q308 that is biased on by R593. It is held off by Q330 when XPACEREL is '1' false. When XPACEREL
comes true, Q330 is turned off, and Q308 is no longer clamped off.
The high voltage capacitor is charged by converting the system battery voltage to a pulsed high voltage by way of transformer T1. The basic operating
frequency signal that is used to switch transistor Q1 providing current in the primary windings of the transformer T1 originates in the system board’s gate
array.
When the high voltage capacitor is charging, the Main System Board independently monitors the capacitor voltage through signal VMON. If the Main
System Board detects an improper level, it halts operation by setting SAFE high. This disables the SCR discharge circuitry and flyback transformer drive.
4-8 9650-1450-01 Rev. D

The patient relay discharges via the signal PATREL_DRV generated by XPATREL and Q304, Q323, and Q322. PATREL_DRV is disabled when
XPACE_SEL is at a logic low.
When the patient relay activation completes, the Main System Board releases the XPATREL signal. Several hundred milliseconds later, the safety relay
closes to ensure the high voltage capacitor energy is completely dissipated.
The Pacer circuit produces and delivers user-controllable pace pulses to the pacing electrodes. To initiate pacing, the front panel switch is turned to
PACER and the OUTPUT and RATE controls are set. Pacing current amplitude is constant during the pulse and is determined by the position of the front
panel PACER OUTPUT dial. Pacing pulse rate is determined by the position of the front panel PACER RATE dial. The pacing pulse duration is fixed at 40
milliseconds.
Pacer/Defibrillator Control Signals

The Pacer/Defibrillator Control charges the high voltage capacitor to a voltage requested by the main system board in response to user energy selections.
It delivers defibrillator energy to the patient through the patient connector to the paddles and pacer electrodes or multi-function electrodes (PADS). This
control also generates pacing pulses at rates and amplitudes requested by the main system board in response to user selections, controls biphasic waveform
defibrillation, and measures pace current and high voltage capacitor voltage by two independent channels.
The following signals control the operation of the Pacer/Defibrillator subsystem:
Analog Voltage Operation Comment

VCAP Analog voltage spanning 0 - 2.5 V for 0 - 5000V capacitor voltage. Used by the defib charging controller.
VMON Analog voltage spanning 0 - 2.5 V for 0 - 5000V capacitor voltage. Used by the defib monitor.
VSNS Pace duty cycle voltage, scaled as 0 - 2.5 V for 0 - 100% duty cycle. When multiplied by the pulse width (as read from PW_READ)
battery voltage is proportional to the actual pace current.
VCTL Analog control voltage scaled 0 - 2.5 V for pace current of 0 - 140 ma. Only active in pace mode.
FET_MON Analog voltage monitors the condition of the discharge transistors. Provides a signature voltage in case of a fault.
PAT_CUR Bound on the range of 0 - 2.5 V and accommodates defib currents of - Analog signal representing the patient current during a defib
50 to +100 A discharge.
9650-1450-01 Rev. D 4-9

Logic Control Signal Operation
XPWR_ENABLE This logic signal from the gate array enables the charging circuit when true, and inhibits the charging circuit when false.
SAFE This logic control signal is generated by the Main System Board to halt the pace/defib function in the event of a detected fault.
SHUTDOWN This logic signal is true during reset and fault conditions. (VCC error, watchdog error, etc.) and halts operation of the PD
generator.
XPACE_ON This logic signal is generated by an optocoupler, and indicates that the pace output circuit is active. It is '0' true when pace
current is flowing.
XSAFREL Logic signal from the GA that operates the safety relay when '0' true.
XPACEREL Logic signal from the GA that operates the pace relay when '0' true. XPATREL: Logic signal from the GA that operates the solid
state patient relay when '0' true.
XPAT_ENABLE Logic signal from the processor controlled by the monitor that grants operation of the solid state patient relay. It is false during
pacing.
XPACE_SEL Hardware only signal from the front panel switch that is at '0' during pace. Used as an additional safety interlock on the solid
state patient relay so that operation of the relay during pacing is additionally disabled.
Internal Discharge Resistor Module

The Internal Discharge Resistor Module contains the internal discharge resistor, and a means for dissipating the heat generated by the internal discharge.
AC/DC Charger Module

The AC/DC Power/Battery Charger provides a universal (IEC 320) connection to the AC mains or to a DC source, input line filtering and double-pole
fusing (for a mains input), AC-DC and DC-DC conversion and isolation barrier between the E Series and power sources. This module also provides the
power necessary to run the E Series in any mode of operation, as well as providing additional charging current to the battery. When the E Series is turned
off but connected to an external AC or DC source, the charger module controls battery charging currents and voltages needed to charge the E Series
battery. These voltages and currents are controlled in response to the main CPU signals that manage the battery charging process.
4-10 9650-1450-01 Rev. D

System Interconnect Module

The system interconnect PWBA receives signals from the Main System Board and in turn controls operation of the stripchart recorder and PCMCIA
functions.
Stripchart Recorder
The Stripchart Recorder module includes a microprocessor, serial interface to the main system board and circuitry which drive the stripchart recorder’s
motor and printhead in response to the main CPU signals. Based upon signals sent by the main CPU, the recorder’s main processor drives the recorder
stripchart motor, formats data for printing on the chart and drives the printhead. It also detects when the sensor drawer is not properly fitted into the unit,
when the paper supply is out and needs to be refilled and the print head temperature.
PCMCIA Slots
The PCMCIA interface module supports two PCMCIA slots which accept Type I and/or Type II PCMCIA cards. These cards may be read or written to.
Data sent by the main CPU is passed to the installed PCMCIA card via the system interconnect PWBA.
Front Panel and Controls PWBA

The User Interface Module provides several functions that enable the user to operate the unit. The user interface has a display monitor and three rotary
selector switches. One selector switch is for three modes: pacer, monitor and defibrillation. The two other knobs are for pacer output and pacer rate. The
unit interface also has specific buttons for defibrillation, including the ENERGY SELECT button, the CHARGE button, the ANALYZE button and the
SHOCK button. The five softkeys underneath the display provide specific operations depending on the unit’s configuration. The other push buttons (from
left to right) are used for volume control, monitor illumination, summary report, and code markers. The CHARGER ON indicator displays the status of the
unit’s power supply.
This input module on the front panel and the Main System Board provides a beeper for the AC/DC Power/Battery Charger.
The Controls PWBA is physically located in the front panel assembly. Units that are equipped for voice recording include a microphone and audio signal
conditioning circuitry on the Controls PWBA.
Isolated Power Supply Module

The Isolated Power Supply Module provides electrically isolated power to the EtCO2 and SpO2 modules. It also provides the electrically isolated serial
communications and isolated control signals between the EtCO2 and SpO2 modules and the main system PWBA.
9650-1450-01 Rev. D 4-11

E Series Options
The following sections describe the E Series options.
12 Lead Option
The ZOLL E Series 12 lead option is used to acquire ECG data needed to assist in the diagnosis of myocardial infarction (“heart attack”), often caused by
a coronary artery occlusion. The 12 lead ECG can be viewed on the display one lead at a time in monitoring and diagnostic bandwidths and printed in the
standard 4x3 format with 12 simultaneously acquired leads.
The 12 lead option provides for the recording, printing and automated analysis of 12 lead ECG using GE Marquette 12SL Analysis and supports the
transmission of these reports by fax to a remote location, such as a hospital. In the pre-hospital environment, the 12 lead reports can be faxed to a physician
as the patient is en route to the Emergency Department. As a result, the physician can initiate hospital accommodations immediately, such as activating the
staff of the cardiac catheterization lab, prior to the patient’s arrival and subsequent treatment. Or the patient may be treated in the pre-hospital environment
with thrombolytic agents.
The 12 lead cable is required to produce 12 lead reports. E Series unit must have the 12 lead option installed. All limb leads and V-leads must be connected
to initiate a 12 lead acquisition. Printed 12 Lead bandwidth is user configurable to be either 0.05-150 Hz (per AAMI EC11) or 0.05-40 Hz. The 0.05-40 Hz
bandwidth selection is used to reduce noise artifact in the high end of the diagnostic frequency range. Reports can be printed in a standard 4x3 or Cabrera
format. Faxed reports can be configured in a 2x6 format in addition to 4x3 and Cabrera formats.
The GE Marquette 12SL Analysis algorithm provides measurements of the 12 lead waveforms along with interpretive statements. The algorithm is
interpretive, not “diagnostic.” (A physician should always confirm interpretive statements. A diagnosis requires a complete clinical assessment including
other modalities, such as a physical examination.) 12SL produces global waveform measurements as well as a measurement matrix containing
measurements on each lead. Both the interpretive statements and measurement matrix are configurable to be printed or not printed.
The acquired 12 lead with 12SL may be faxed to a remote location using landline or cellular phone technology. Specific PCMCIA fax modems are
supported and the modem determines the specific phone compatibility. The E Series supports Group 3 facsimile, Class 1, Class 2 and Class 2.0. 12 lead
reports may be re-printed or re-transmitted using the Patient Records capability. Individual patient records may be selected based on patient ID, date, and
time.
Pulse Oximetry (SPO2)

The ZOLL E Series pulse oximetry option enables the user to continuously, noninvasively, and painlessly monitor the percentage of oxygen saturation of
arterial hemoglobin at a peripheral measurement site (i.e.foot, toe or finger.)
The oximetry sensor contains two light emitting diodes, or LEDs, that transmit red and infrared light through the body’s extremities. A photodetector
receives the transmitted light. Oxygen saturated blood absorbs light differently than unsaturated blood. Thus the amount of red and infrared light absorbed
4-12 9650-1450-01 Rev. D

by the blood flowing through a suitable peripheral area of the body, such as the finger in adults and the foot in neonates, can be used to calculate the ratio
of oxygenated hemoglobin to total hemoglobin in the arterial blood. The monitor displays this ratio as percent SpO2. Normal values typically range from
95% to 100% at sea level.
The E Series uses a Masimo Pulse Oximetry Circuit Board which features a fundamentally distinct method of acquiring, processing and reporting arterial
oxygen saturation and pulse rate. The E Series’ SpO2 module (Masimo Circuit Board) connects to the Masimo sensors and reports monitoring results
(oxygen saturation, pulse rate, pulse waveform, etc.) via a serial digital interface to the E Series system board. The E Series system provides isolated DC
power and serial communication to the SpO2 Board via the Isolated Power Supply board.
End Tidal Carbon Dioxide (EtCO2)

The ZOLL E Series EtCO2 option continually and noninvasively monitors the patient’s carbon dioxide in respiratory gases and from these measurements
computes End Tidal CO2 and respiration rate. The unit can display and print a recording of EtCO2 readings, respiration rates, and capnograph waveforms.
In addition, the unit can configure an alarm to sound when the unit detects EtCO2 values and respiration rates that are above or below acceptable ranges as
set by the user. This option is intended for use in all critical monitoring environments including ventilator support, patient transport, and anesthesia and is
intended for monitoring all patient types, including adult, pediatric, and neonatal.
E Series units equipped with software revision 2.00.000 or higher support two End Tidal Carbon Dioxide (EtCO2) monitoring options for the continuous
measurement of respiratory carbon dioxide (CO2) and respiration rate. These options use the same connector on the E Series unit and may be used
interchangeably.
The first option uses a unique, mainstream, solid-state, infrared sensor called the CAPNOSTAT® 5 Mainstream CO2 Sensor. The CAPNOSTAT 5 CO2
sensor is attached to an airway adapter that connects to an endotracheal (ET) tube or other airway and measures gases flowing through these breathing
circuit components. A disposable mouthpiece may be connected to the adapter for monitoring non-intubated patients. A CAPNO2mask™ is also available
for use with non-intubated patients. This option provides for O2 delivery while monitoring expired CO2.
The second option is a sidestream sampling system called the LoFlo™ CO2 Module. The LoFlo module contains a gas sampling pump, which draws small
samples of gas from the patient’s airway via a nasal/oral cannula or airway adapter, and passes these gases through a solid state infrared sensor (located
away from the patient’s airway) that measures CO2. While the sidestream system is typically used on non-intubated patients, it can also be used for EtCO2
measurement on intubated infant, pediatric and adult patients. The sidestream system should not be used, however, on patients who cannot tolerate the
50ml/min removal of the sample gases from their breathing circuit. The sidestream module uses specially designed cannulas and airway adapters for
sampling airway gases and passing them through an integrated sample cell, which connects to the LoFlo module’s CO2 sensor. These cannulas incorporate
a filter and sample cell, providing maximum filtration of fluids and contaminants, and protecting the system from aspiration of these fluids.
In both systems, the CO2 sensor generates infrared light and beams it through the airway adapter or sample cell to a detector on the opposite side. CO2 from
the patient, flowing through the mainstream airway adapter or sample cell, absorbs some of this infrared energy. The E Series unit determines CO2
concentration in the breathing gases by measuring the amount of light absorbed by gases flowing through the airway or sample cell.
9650-1450-01 Rev. D 4-13

The E Series unit displays EtCO2 (the concentration of carbon dioxide detected at the end of each exhalation) as a numerical value in millimeters of
mercury (mmHg), percent (%), or kilopascals (kPa). In addition, the unit can display a capnogram. This capnogram is a valuable clinical tool that can be
used to assess patient airway integrity and proper endotracheal (ET) tube placement. The unit calculates respiration rate by measuring the time interval
between detected peaks of the CO2 waveform. The technology differentiates between waveforms caused by breathing and those caused by cardiogenic
oscillations and artifact.
Noninvasive Blood Pressure

The Non-Invasive Blood Pressure (NIBP) option on the E Series unit allows you to take a single blood pressure measurement, STAT measurements
(automatically repeated measurements over a 5 minute period), or automatic measurements at repeating pre-selected intervals.
The ZOLL E Series NIBP option is indicated for the non-invasive measurement of arterial blood pressure for resting patients in critical care and transport.
The NIBP option is designed to measure blood pressure for adult and pediatric patients.
The patient blood pressure cuff and hose connect to the E Series unit through the NIBP connector on the rear panel of the unit. The NIBP button on the
front panel of the E Series allows you to initiate and terminate blood pressure measurements. You can also initiate and terminate measurements using the
softkeys on the NIBP menu.
The NIBP module measures the oscillometric pulses transmitted through the blood pressure cuff and hose, and calculates the blood pressure measurements
accordingly. The blood pressure information (including the patient’s systolic, diastolic and mean blood pressure values) is shown on the E Series monitor.
4-14 9650-1450-01 Rev. D

Chapter 5
Disassembly Procedures
This chapter provides instructions on how to disassemble and reassemble the E Series unit, and includes the following sections:
“Front Panel Removal” on page 3
“Front Panel Disassembly” on page 5
“Bottom Panel Removal” on page 10
“NIBP Pump Removal” on page 11
“System Board Removal” on page 13
“System Interconnect Board Removal” on page 16
“SPO2 Board Removal (MS-11)” on page 17
“SPO2 Board Removal (MX-1)” on page 17
“Isolated Power Supply Removal” on page 18
“Bridge Board Removal” on page 20
“High Voltage Assembly Removal” on page 23
“Battery Interconnect Board Removal” on page 24
“A/C Charger Assembly Removal” on page 26
“Access Detect Cable Removal” on page 27
“Capacitor Removal” on page 28
“Connector Panel Removal” on page 29
“Communication Board & PCMCIA Module Removal” on page 31
“Recorder Removal” on page 32
9650-1450-01 Rev. D 5-1

Required Equipment
• #1 Philips head screwdriver
• #2 Philips head screwdriver
• #24 Hex head screwdriver
• Wooden stick
• Needlenose pliers
• Wire Cutters
• Exactor Knife
• 1/2” Nut Driver
Safety Precautions
Warning! SHOCK HAZARD!
Caution TAKE THE NECESSARY PRECAUTIONS TO GUARD AGAINST SHOCK OR INJURY BEFORE YOU CONDUCT
DEFIBRILLATOR TESTS OR REPAIRS.
• Only properly trained technicians should service the unit.

• The unit can contain deadly voltages even if the unit is turned off.
• Make sure to discharge the unit before working with it.
• Make sure you take the necessary precautions when working with static sensitive units. For example, you must wear a conductive wrist strap (which
touches your skin) connected to a grounding mat and to the earth ground. You must remove the wrist strap when you discharge high voltage or when
you are working on energized equipment.
• Wear gloves to prevent skin oils from affecting the equipment.
5-2 9650-1450-01 Rev. D

Front Panel Removal

1. Remove handle by removing the screw and washer on each 2. Remove the 3 screws on the top of the panel.
side.
3. Front panel assembly slides down. Use caution when removing 4. Gently remove black stranded cable by pulling the
the front panel, cables run from the front panel to the System connector straight out of board.
Board. Do NOT pull the front panel far from the main chassis.
9650-1450-01 Rev. D 5-3

5. Remove the clear plastic spacer from between the cable 6. Disconnect the cable from the system board by pulling
connector and upper housing by grasping the center with straight away from the board.
needlenose pliers, and pushing straight up.
Note: Place front panel on top of unit to get better access to the spacer and
cable.
5-4 9650-1450-01 Rev. D

Front Panel Disassembly

Note: There are 3 styles of front panel assemblies. (Original style has 1 cutout in back plate, the 2nd release had 2 cutouts, and the latest release
has 2 cutouts along with a slot for the display invertor.)
Original Style 2nd Style Latest Style
Slot
1. Remove 8 screws from backing plate (Both Styles). 2. Lift backing plate out of the frame by prying from the top
(Both styles).
9650-1450-01 Rev. D 5-5

3. 2 Cutout Style: Remove black rivet by pulling it straight up. 3A. Original Style: Remove 2 screws, and lift out shield.
Then remove plastic isolator.
4. Remove 3 cables from the control board. 5. Remove display by lifting from the bottom.
Note: During reassembly, sit display in the bottom first and then push
down on top.
5-6 9650-1450-01 Rev. D

6. Flip front panel over. Remove main selector knob by gently 7. Remove 1/2” nut from the main selector knob, then remove
lifting. (Note: Older version may be glued and need to be pried the anti-rotation washers.
with cutter.)
8. (Unit with pace option) Remove the pacer controls knobs, and 9. Flip front panel over. Disconnect front membrane cable and
then remove 1/2” nut and washer. data entry switch from control board.
9650-1450-01 Rev. D 5-7

10. Cut video cable tie wrap. 11. Push on board retaining clip to release the control board
from front panel frame, but do not remove board until next
step.
Note: When reinstalling see Table 5.1 at end of section for setting
control board dip switches.
12. As you lift the control board, beeper gasket may need to be cut
from the front panel membrane. Use an exacto blade.
Note: If unit has audio option, remove microphone from panel and Note: Below is a picture of the opposite side of control board
disconnect from board showing the beeper gasket.
Beeper Gasket
5-8 9650-1450-01 Rev. D

13. Using an exacto knife pry corner of front panel membrane up, 14. Using an exacto knife pry corner of data entry switch up,
and remove by gently pulling off the membrane. and remove by gently pulling off the membrane.
Table 5-1: Control Board Dip Switches Settings
SW1 SW2 SW3 SW4
Manual Advisory 0 0 0 1
AED 0 0 1 1
9650-1450-01 Rev. D 5-9

Bottom Panel Removal

1. Remove the 9 screws securing the base. 2. Remove bottom panel by lifting panel straight up.
5-10 9650-1450-01 Rev. D

NIBP Pump Removal

1. Cut tie wrap, and disconnect hose from the NIBP fitting. 2. Remove the screw that is holding the NIBP Pump.
Note: When reinstalling, do not over tighten tie wrap.

3. Disconnect ECG flex cable from system board, by releasing 4. Unplug cable from system interconnect.
jams on each end of the connector, then gently pull straight out.
9650-1450-01 Rev. D 5-11

5. Carefully lift and remove pump assembly.
Note: When reinstalling, lift flex cable so power connector on NIBP board
is under the cable.
5-12 9650-1450-01 Rev. D

System Board Removal

1. Remove plastic spacer by gently lifting. 2. Remove PCMCIA short connecting ribbon cable from both
sides.
Note: During reassembly verify the spacer ridge sits on board.

3. Remove flat UBP cable from both ends by releasing jams on 4. Gently remove the 2 flat cables by releasing jams on each
each end of the connector, then pull straight out. end of the connector, then gently pull straight out.
9650-1450-01 Rev. D 5-13

5. Remove gray printer ribbon cable straight out of the board. 6. Remove colored stranded cable by pulling cable downward
Gently lift system board straight up half way from the casing. from the connector.
Remove the black stranded cable.
7. Remove screw holding system board to the frame. 8. Lift system board further out of frame. Remove colored
stranded cable and the black & white stranded cable.
5-14 9650-1450-01 Rev. D

9. From the opposite corner, remove colored stranded cable. 10. Gently separate the system board from its cradle.
Note: Board has tabs holding it into slots in the metal frame
at the bottom.
11. Remove the 3 flat cables by pulling connector straight out, and
remove system board.
9650-1450-01 Rev. D 5-15

System Interconnect Board Removal

1. Remove the 2 screws holding the interconnect board to the 2. Remove board, carefully twist flat cable and feed through
frame. plastic support to remove frame.
Note: Fold cable over in 45 degree angle as shown below.
5-16 9650-1450-01 Rev. D

SPO2 Board Removal (MS-11)

1. Remove the 2 flat cables from the SPO2 board by pulling 2. Remove the 4 screws from each corner of the SPO2 board.
straight away from board. Remove the SPO2 board from the device.
SPO2 Board Removal (MX-1)

1. Remove the 2 flat cables from the SPO2 board by pulling 2. Remove the 4 screws from each corner of the SPO2 board.
straight away from board. Remove the SPO2 board from the device.
9650-1450-01 Rev. D 5-17

Isolated Power Supply Removal

1. Disconnect the molex connector. 2. Disconnect the 2 spade connectors.
3. Remove the 4 screws securing the board. 4a (Old Style MS-11) Carefully lift the isolated power supply
and remove long grey stranded cable (EtCO2), and the 2
flat cables, then remove board.
Note: During reassembly route grey cable as shown in picture.
5-18 9650-1450-01 Rev. D

4b (New Style MX-1) Carefully lift the isolated power supply and
remove short grey stranded cable (EtCO2), and the 2 flat
cables, then remove board.
9650-1450-01 Rev. D 5-19

Bridge Board Removal

1. Remove high voltage isolator (clear) by removing tape and then 2. Remove MFC retainer (if present).
rotating around MFC signal cable.
3. Remove MFC socket from the chassis and wire loom. Cut tie 4. Cut the 2 cable ties, and disconnect spade connector.
wrap from bridge board frame.
5-20 9650-1450-01 Rev. D

5. Loosen the 3 screws holding plastic frame in place. Lift the 6. Remove bridge board isolator (clear).
entire frame out of the chassis.
7. Disconnect flex cable from bridge board by lifting the tabs and 8. Remove 3 screws.
pulling straight up.
9650-1450-01 Rev. D 5-21

9. Remove bridge board from the mid-frame by carefully guiding

cable through the slot.
5-22 9650-1450-01 Rev. D

High Voltage Assembly Removal

1. Disconnect small flat cable by lifting up jams on each side and 2. Disconnect J104 cable by lifting up jams on each side and
pull straight out, then disconnect larger cable by pulling straight pull straight out.
out.
3. Disconnect colored cable (MFC signal cable). Pull high voltage 4. Disconnect black cable. Remove screw holding plastic
module straight out. cover in place. Slide plastic cover out.
9650-1450-01 Rev. D 5-23

Battery Interconnect Board Removal

1. Remove the 3 machine screws from the battery pins (J100, 2. Remove the 2 screws securing the board.
J101, J102).
3. Gently remove board by lifting from this end. 4. Disconnect flat cable by pulling gently.
Note: Slightly lifting up on the charger assembly will allow for easier
removal.
5-24 9650-1450-01 Rev. D

5. Remove 3 ferrite rings from the battery pins, and pull pins
straight out.
9650-1450-01 Rev. D 5-25

A/C Charger Assembly Removal

1. Remove cables from cable harnesses, and disconnect tie wrap 2. Remove screw from A/C ground cable.
on the MFC signal cable.
3. Disconnect A/C connector cable by pulling down on latch and

pull towards you. Remove cable from wire loom. Lift A/C charger
assembly out of the case.
5-26 9650-1450-01 Rev. D

Access Detect Cable Removal

1. Push the 4 pin connector through the connector panel 2. Disconnect ferrite from looms, and remove cable from
squeezing the tabs. Remove nut holding ECG Out/RS232 device.
connector, and push connector through panel.
9650-1450-01 Rev. D 5-27

Capacitor Removal
WARNING! This unit may contain lethal voltages. You MUST completely discharge the high voltage capacitor before removing from unit. DO NOT SHORT
THE TERMINAL ENDS OF THE CAPACITOR.
1. Lift capacitor out. 2. Bleed the excess voltage using a resistor with values of
approximately 5 kohms, 25 watts for 10-20 seconds.
Measure the voltage on the capacitor terminals.
5-28 9650-1450-01 Rev. D

Connector Panel Removal

Note: There are 2 styles of SPO2 connector (MS-11 & MX-1) used on the E Series, use the appropriate instructions for disassembly.
1. (MS-11 Style) Remove the 2 screws securing the panel to the 2. Lift assembly out, gently sliding rubber ground sleeve off
housing. mounting post.
3. Remove rubber gasket (black foam) from connector panel. ECG

and SPO2 connectors can now be removed.
Note: During reassembly ensure conductive sleeve is in place next to SPO2

connector.
9650-1450-01 Rev. D 5-29

1. (MX-1 Style) Peel back SPO2 label using an exacto knife. 2. Remove 2 screws and gently lift up on connector panel.
3. Remove the 2 screws securing the panel to the housing. 4. Remove rubber gasket (black foam) from connector panel.
ECG and SPO2 connectors can now be removed.
Note: During reassembly ensure conductive sleeve is in place next to

SPO2 connector.
5-30 9650-1450-01 Rev. D

Communication Board & PCMCIA Module Removal

1. Remove the 4 screws securing the communication board to the 2. Remove the screw that is securing the PCMCIA board to
housing. the housing. Lift PCMCIA assembly straight out.
Note: To remove the board tilt the side toward the PCMCIA assembly up,
and then lift out.
Note: During reassembly, ensure that the isolator is installed on top of
communication board.
9650-1450-01 Rev. D 5-31

Recorder Removal
1. Lift up on the PCMCIA cover, and remove large screw securing 2. Open printer door, then lift bezel straight out.
bezel to housing.
3. The recorder assembly can be removed by loosening 4 screws 4. Squeeze in the paper lift to release the bosses from
(they do not need to be removed completely from printer frame). grooves in the roller housing.
5-32 9650-1450-01 Rev. D

5. Pivot the roller housing back and it will come off. 6. Remove the two washers securing the printer interconnect
board by gently prying up on them. Remove the board.
7. Slide pivot pin out of printer frame. 8. Disconnect printer cable from print head.
9650-1450-01 Rev. D 5-33

9. The print head can removed by lifting out of the frame.
5-34 9650-1450-01 Rev. D

Appendix A
Overview
This appendix includes:
• Interconnect Diagram for the E Series Unit
• ZOLL E Series Maintenance Tests Checklist
Photocopy the checklists and use the copies to record the results of the maintenance tests performed on the E Series equipment; keep them for your
records.
9650-1450-01 Rev. D A-1

*
AC *
Receptacle 9500-0716
* 9301-0388-01
AC Charger Speaker Display
9500-0712
1005-0002
Earth ground
9500 -0718 9301-0389-01
post
9500-0719 Battery Interconnect 9500-0312
9500-0713-50
9500-0720 9301-0384-01
1001-0278-02 1001-03 45 Microphone
* 9500-0313 Controls
HV Module 9500-0734
* 9500-0716-50
Capacitor 100 1-XXXX 9 500-0519
MFE Connector/Patient * Membrane Keypad
9301-0370-02 9301-0380-01
ETCO2 9500-0733-50
Biphasic Bridge/DAC System 9 500-0727 -50 ECG Input Connector
Connector
9500-0731
9500-
9301-0383-01
MS-11 0730 Isolated Power Supply 9500-0728-50 9500-0726 Access Detect ECG
Assembly Out/RS232 Connector
9500-0715-50
9500-0722
1005-0160 9500-0721 9500-0715-50
SPO2
Connector PCMCIA Cage
9500-0710 9301-0381-01
System Interconnect *
9500-0725 9301-0387-01
9500-
Printer Interconnect Printer
9301-0390-01 0724 Motor
Communications 9500-0723-50
9500-0736 9500-0729
**
NIBP Assembly Print Head 9301-0385-01
* - integrated assembly
** - assembly in tegration planned Paper/Recorder Sensors
Hose
Rev 0.01
Figure 1: Interconnect Diagram for E Series Unit
A-2 9650-1450-01 Rev. D

ZOLL E Series  Serial No. Location
Tester Signature Date
Maintenance Test Checklist
1.0 Physical Inspection 2.0 Front Panel Button 3.0 Leads Test 7.0 Heart Rate Display 11.0 Defibrillator
Result of Check: Pass Fail N/A Test Pass Fail N/A Test Self Test
1.1 Pass Fail N/A 3.1 Pass Fail N/A Pass Fail N/A
o No action required
o o o o o o
2.1 o o o 7.1 o o o 11.1 o o o
1.2 o o o 3.2 o o o
o Minor problems corrected
2.2 o o o 11.2 o o o
o Disposable supplies 1.3 o o o 3.3 o o o 8.0 Pulse Calibration
replaced 2.3 o o o Test 11.3 o o o
1.4 o o o 3.4 o o o
o Major problems identified  2.4 o o o Pass Fail N/A 11.4 o o o
1.5 o o o
(unit out of service) 4.0 Power Supply Test 8.2 o o o
2.5 o o o 11.5 o o o
1.6 o o o Pass Fail N/A
2.6 o o o 9.0 Notch Filter Test 11.6 o o o
Additional Remarks 1.7 o o o 4.1 o o o
2.7 o o o Pass Fail N/A 11.7 o o o
1.8 o o o 4.3 o o o 9.3 o o o
2.8 o o o
1.9 o o o 4.4 o o o 12.0 Synchronized
2.9 o o o 10.0 Heart Rate Alarm Cardioversion Test
1.10 o o o 4.5 o o o
2.10 Test Pass Fail N/A
1.11 o o o o o o 4.6 o o o Pass Fail N/A 12.2 o o o
2.11 o o o
1.12 o o o 10.1 o o o
5.0 Leakage Current 12.3 o o o
2.12 o o o
1.13 o o o Test 10.2 o o o
2.13 o o o
2.14 o o o 5.1 o o o
1.15 o o o 10.4 o o o
2.15 o o o
6.0 Paddles Test 10.5 o o o
2.17 o o o 6.1 o o o 10.7 o o o
2.18 o o o 6.2 o o o 10.8 o o o
2.19 o o o 6.3 o o o 10.9 o o o
2.20 o o o 6.4 o o o 10.10 o o o
2.21 o o o 6.5 o o o 10.11 o o o
2.22 o o o 6.6 o o o 10.12 o o o
2.23 o o o 6.7 o o o 10.13 o o o
2.24 o o o 6.8 o o o 10.14 o o o
9650-1450-01 Rev. D A-3

ZOLL E Series  Serial No. Location
Tester Signature Date
Maintenance Test Checklist
13.0 Shock Test 15.0 Advisory Message 17.0 SpO2 Monitor Test 20.0 CO2 Accuracy 24.0 Bluetooth Test
Pass Fail N/A Test Pass Fail N/A Check (Optional) Pass Fail N/A
13.2 Pass Fail N/A Pass Fail N/A 24.1
o o o 17.1 o o o o o o
15.2 o o o 20.7
13.3 o o o 17.2 o o o o o o 24.3 o o o
15.3 o o o 20.8
13.4 o o o 17.3 o o o o o o 24.5 o o o
15.4 o o o 20.11
13.5 o o o 17.4 o o o o o o
13.6 o o o 17.5a
16.0 Pacer Test o o o 21.0 NIBP Volume Leak
13.7 o o o Pass Fail N/A 17.5b Test with Bio-Tek
o o o NIBP Analyzer
16.1 o o o
13.8 o o o 17.6a o o o Pass Fail N/A
16.2 o o o
13.9 o o o 17.6b 21.1
o o o o o o
16.3 o o o
13.10 o o o 17.7 21.2
o o o o o o
16.4 o o o
13.11 o o o 17.8 21.3
o o o o o o
16.5 o o o
13.12 o o o 17.9 21.4
o o o o o o
16.6 o o o
13.13 o o o 21.5
18.0 EtCO2 Monitor Test
o o o
16.7 o o o
13.14 o o o 21.6
Pass Fail N/A o o o
16.8 o o o
13.15 o o o 21.7
18.2 o o o o o o
16.9 o o o
13.16 o o o 183
16.10
o o o 22.0 NIBP Transducer
13.17 o o o o o o 18.4 o o o Calibration
16.11 o o o
13.18 o o o 18.5 Pass Fail N/A
16.12
o o o
13.19 o o o o o o 22.4 o o o
13.20
19.0 Barometric 22.6 o o o
o o o Pressure
22.8 o o o
Calibration
14.0 Summary Report 22.9
Test
Pass Fail N/A o o o
19.2 o o o
Pass Fail N/A
19.3 23.0 NIBP Monitor Test
14.1 o o o o o o
Pass Fail N/A
14.2 19.4 o o o
o o o 23.2 o o o
14.3 19.5 o o o
o o o 23.3 o o o
14.4 o o o 23.4 o o o
9650-1450-01 Rev. D A-4

E Series ® Operator’s Guide
9650-1210-01 Rev. R
The issue date for the E Series Operator's Guide (REF 9650-1210-01 Rev. R) is March, 2013.
If more than 3 years have elapsed since this date, contact ZOLL Medical Corporation to determine if additional
product information updates are available.
Copyright © 2013 by ZOLL Medical Corporation. All rights reserved. AutoPulse, Base Power Charger,
CPR Dashboard, CPR Index, CPR-D-padz, E Series, pedi-padz, Protocol Assist Code Markers, Real CPR Help,
Rectilinear Biphasic, RescueNet, See-Thru CPR, SmartAlarms, stat-padz, SurePower and ZOLL are trademarks or
registered trademarks of ZOLL Medical Corporation in the United States and/or other countries.
All other trademarks are the property of their respective owners.

269 Mill Road
Chelmsford, MA USA
01824-4105
ZOLL International Holding B.V.

Newtonweg 18
6662 PV ELST
The Netherlands
0123
TABLE OF CONTENTS
SECTION 1 GENERAL INFORMATION.................................................................. 1-1
Product Description.............................................................................................. 1-1
How to Use This Manual....................................................................................... 1-2
Manual Updates..................................................................................................... 1-2
Unpacking.............................................................................................................. 1-2
Accessories ........................................................................................................... 1-2
Symbols Used on the Equipment ........................................................................ 1-4
Defibrillator Function............................................................................................ 1-7
Intended Use — Manual Operation..................................................................... 1-7
Intended Use — Semiautomatic Operation (AED).............................................. 1-7
Contraindications for Semiautomatic Operation.................................................. 1-7
Defibrillator Complications .................................................................................. 1-7
Defibrillator Output Energy.................................................................................. 1-7
External Pacemaker Function (Pacer version only) .......................................... 1-8
Intended Use — Pacemaker ............................................................................... 1-8
Pacemaker Complications .................................................................................. 1-8
Pediatric Pacing .................................................................................................. 1-9
Paddle and Electrode Options ............................................................................. 1-9
MFE Pad Application/Connection........................................................................ 1-9
Monitor ................................................................................................................. 1-10
Recorder Function .............................................................................................. 1-10
Batteries............................................................................................................... 1-10
Internal Battery Charging ................................................................................... 1-10
External Battery Charger.................................................................................... 1-10
Diagnostics.......................................................................................................... 1-10
Safety Considerations .........................................................................................1-11
WARNINGS - General ...................................................................................... 1-11
Operator Safety................................................................................................. 1-12
Patient Safety.................................................................................................... 1-12
CAUTIONS ........................................................................................................... 1-13
FCC Statement Regarding Bluetooth Operation............................................... 1-13
Restarting the Device ......................................................................................... 1-14
FDA Regulations ................................................................................................. 1-15
Tracking Requirements ..................................................................................... 1-15
Notification of Adverse Events .......................................................................... 1-15
Software License................................................................................................. 1-15
Service ................................................................................................................. 1-15
Returning a unit for service ............................................................................... 1-15
The ZOLL Serial Number .................................................................................... 1-16
9650-1210-01 Rev. R E Series Operator’s Guide iii

E Series Operator’s Guide
SECTION 2 OPERATING CONTROLS AND INDICATORS ................................... 2-1

Code Markers .........................................................................................................2-4
Summary Report Function....................................................................................2-4
Summary Report Formats....................................................................................2-4
Defibrillation Format.............................................................................................2-5
Pacer Format (Pacer version only) ......................................................................2-6
Heart Rate Alarm Activated Format .....................................................................2-7
VF Alarm Activated Format (Refer to Section 6)..................................................2-7
Recorder On Format ............................................................................................2-7
Analyze Format....................................................................................................2-8
Manual Mode Activated .......................................................................................2-9
Printing a Report....................................................................................................2-9
Printing a Call Report ............................................................................................2-9
Printing a Partial Summary Report ......................................................................2-9
Printing an Incident Log........................................................................................2-9
Adding a Patient Name and ID Number to a Report .........................................2-10
Modifying a Patient Name and ID Number......................................................... 2-11
Erasing Summary Report Memory ..................................................................... 2-11
SECTION 3 MANUAL DEFIBRILLATION ............................................................... 3-1

Emergency Defibrillation Procedure with Paddles or MFE Pads ......................3-1
Troubleshooting.....................................................................................................3-4
SECTION 4 ADVISORY DEFIBRILLATION............................................................ 4-1

Advisory Defibrillation...........................................................................................4-1
Advisory Function Messages ...............................................................................4-4
Warning Messages ................................................................................................4-4
SECTION 5 AUTOMATED EXTERNAL DEFIBRILLATOR (AED) OPERATION ... 5-1

AED Semiautomatic Operation.............................................................................5-2
Operating Messages..............................................................................................5-3
AED Manual Mode Operation................................................................................5-5
SECTION 6 SYNCHRONIZED CARDIOVERSION ................................................. 6-1

Synchronized Cardioversion ................................................................................6-1
SECTION 7 REAL CPR HELP................................................................................. 7-1

Prepare the Patient and Attach the CPRD-to-MFC Connector...........................7-1
Real CPR Help Field...............................................................................................7-1
CPR Compressions Indicator...............................................................................7-2
CPR Idle Time Display.........................................................................................7-2
iv www.zoll.com 9650-1210-01 Rev. R

Table of Contents
FULLY RELEASE Prompt....................................................................................7-2

CPR Voice Prompts .............................................................................................7-2
Compressions Bar Graph ....................................................................................7-2
Displaying the CPR Compressions Bar Graph ....................................................7-3
CPR Dashboard .....................................................................................................7-3
CPR Feedback Indicators and CPR Index...........................................................7-3
CPR Rate and Depth Display ..............................................................................7-3
CPR Idle Time Display.........................................................................................7-3
SECTION 8 SEE-THRU CPR................................................................................... 8-1

Using See-Thru CPR..............................................................................................8-1
Examples .............................................................................................................8-1
SECTION 9 NONINVASIVE TEMPORARY PACING (PACER VERSION ONLY).. 9-1

Noninvasive Temporary Pacing ...........................................................................9-1
Special Pacing Applications .................................................................................9-3
Standby Pacing....................................................................................................9-3
Asynchronous Pacing ..........................................................................................9-4
Pediatric Pacing ...................................................................................................9-4
SECTION 10 ECG MONITORING ........................................................................... 10-1

Introduction..........................................................................................................10-1
Preparations .........................................................................................................10-1
Electrode Placement ...........................................................................................10-1
Monitoring Electrodes Attachment .....................................................................10-2
Control Setting.....................................................................................................10-2
Spikes from Implanted Pacemakers ..................................................................10-2
Alarms...................................................................................................................10-3
Setting Alarm Limits ...........................................................................................10-3
Vital Sign Alarms................................................................................................10-3
Heart Rate Alarm Limits.....................................................................................10-3
Suspending and Silencing Alarms .....................................................................10-4
Deactivating and Activating Alarms ...................................................................10-4
Smart Alarms .....................................................................................................10-4
Recorder Operation .............................................................................................10-4
Diagnostic Bandwidth ........................................................................................10-4
5-Lead Monitoring................................................................................................10-5
Changing from 3-Lead Monitoring .....................................................................10-5
Changing from 5-Lead ECG Monitoring.............................................................10-5
Simultaneous 3-Lead Printing ............................................................................10-5
Vital Signs Trending ............................................................................................10-5
Viewing Vital Signs Trending Data on the Display.............................................10-5
Printing a Vital Signs Trend Report....................................................................10-6
9650-1210-01 Rev. R E Series Operator’s Guide v

NIBP Trend Operation .......................................................................................10-6

Clearing Vital Signs Trend Records...................................................................10-7
SECTION 11 GENERAL MAINTENANCE .............................................................. 11-1

Inspection ............................................................................................................. 11-1
Cleaning................................................................................................................ 11-1
Cleaning the Recorder Printhead.......................................................................11-1
Testing the E Series Unit..................................................................................... 11-1
Testing the Stripchart Recorder .........................................................................11-1
Testing the Defibrillator (Semiautomatic Mode) .................................................11-2
Testing the Defibrillator (Manual Mode) .............................................................11-2
Testing the Pacer (Pacer Version Only) ............................................................11-3
Changing Recorder Paper................................................................................... 11-4
Setting Time and Date ......................................................................................... 11-5
Manual Method ..................................................................................................11-5
Automated Dial-up Method ................................................................................11-5
GPS Synchronization.........................................................................................11-6
Operator’s Shift Checklist for E Series Products (Manual).............................. 11-7
Operator’s Shift Checklist for E Series Products (Semiautomatic) ................ 11-8
SECTION 12 BATTERY MANAGEMENT ............................................................... 12-1

Battery Care..........................................................................................................12-1
Battery Life Expectancy .....................................................................................12-1
LOW BATTERY Message..................................................................................12-1
Changing the Battery Pack ................................................................................12-1
Charging and Testing Battery Packs .................................................................12-2
Top Panel Battery LEDs ....................................................................................12-2
Troubleshooting .................................................................................................12-2
Achieving Optimal Battery Pack Performance..................................................12-3
SECTION 13 TROUBLESHOOTING GUIDELINES ................................................ 13-1

Monitor..................................................................................................................13-1
Recorder ...............................................................................................................13-3
Pacer (Pacer version only)..................................................................................13-4
Defibrillator...........................................................................................................13-5
AC Charger ...........................................................................................................13-7
APPENDIX A SPECIFICATIONS ................................................................................A-1

General................................................................................................................... A-1
Pacemaker (Pacer version) .................................................................................. A-2
ECG Monitoring..................................................................................................... A-3
CPR Monitoring..................................................................................................... A-4
Display ................................................................................................................... A-5
Recorder ................................................................................................................ A-5
vi www.zoll.com 9650-1210-01 Rev. R

Table of Contents
PCMCIA Card ........................................................................................................ A-5

Battery Packs ........................................................................................................ A-5
Guidance and Manufacturer’s Declaration — Electromagnetic Emissions .... A-7
Electromagnetic Immunity Declaration (EID) ..................................................... A-8
EID for Life-Support Functions ........................................................................... A-9
Recommended Separation Distances from RF Equipment for E Series
Life-Support Functions ...................................................................................... A-10
EID for Non-Life-Support Functions ................................................................. A-11
Non-Life-Support Functions .............................................................................. A-12
Rectilinear Biphasic Waveform Characteristics .............................................. A-13
Clinical Trial Results for the Biphasic Waveform ............................................ A-21
Randomized Multi-Center Clinical Trial for Defibrillation of
Ventricular Fibrillation (VF) and Ventricular Tachycardia (VT) ................... A-21
Randomized Multi-Center Clinical Trial for Cardioversion of Atrial Fibrillation
(AF) ............................................................................................................ A-22
Synchronized Cardioversion of Atrial Fibrillation .............................................. A-23
Shock Conversion Estimator............................................................................. A-24
ECG Analysis Algorithm Accuracy ................................................................... A-27
Clinical Performance Results............................................................................ A-27
APPENDIX B MEDICAL REPORT CAPABILITY .......................................................B-1

PCMCIA Data Card................................................................................................ B-1
Installing the PCMCIA Data Card......................................................................... B-1
Erasing a Memory Card........................................................................................ B-1
Transferring Data to a PC with a PCMCIA Data Card Reader ........................... B-2
Uploading Memory Card Data or Trend History to a PC or Handheld ............. B-2
RS-232 Serial Port .............................................................................................. B-2
Bluetooth Transceiver (Optional) ........................................................................ B-2
Communication Settings ..................................................................................... B-3
Transferring Data ................................................................................................ B-3
Activating Automatic Data Transmission ........................................................... B-4
Transmitting 12-Lead Patient Records ............................................................... B-5
Troubleshooting.................................................................................................... B-5
9650-1210-01 Rev. R E Series Operator’s Guide vii

(This page intentionally left blank.)
SECTION 1
GENERAL INFORMATION
NOTE: Your E Series® may or may not contain all the features listed in this manual, depending on your particular
configuration.
Product Description
The ZOLL® E Series products combine defibrillation, ECG display, advanced monitoring capabilities, and Noninvasive
Transcutaneous Pacing (NTP) with communication, data printing and recording capabilities in a single lightweight
portable instrument. The unit has been designed for all resuscitation situations; its small, compact, lightweight design
makes it ideal for accompanying patients during transport. The product is powered by alternating current (AC) or direct
current (DC) mains and an easily replaced battery pack that is quickly recharged in the device when it is connected to
AC or DC mains. In addition, the unit’s batteries may be recharged and tested using ZOLL Base Power Charger™ 4X4
or ZOLL SurePower™ Charger systems designed for standard interchangeable ZOLL battery packs.
The product is designed for use in both the hospital and the rugged EMS environment. All of its features add to its
durability in hospital applications. The device is a versatile automated external defibrillator with manual capabilities and
may be configured to operate in Manual, Advisory or Semiautomatic modes. Semiautomatic versions of the device
have a distinctive front panel with a single ON position. Conventional devices, which can be configured for Manual,
Advisory or Semiautomatic operation, have a standardized ZOLL operator interface. When operating in manual
configuration, the device operates as a conventional defibrillator where the device’s charging and discharging is fully
controlled by the operator. In Advisory and Semiautomatic modes, some features of the device are automated and a
sophisticated detection algorithm is used to identify ventricular fibrillation and determine the appropriateness of
defibrillator shock delivery. Units may be configured to automatically charge, analyze, recharge, and prompt the
operator to “PRESS SHOCK”, depending on local protocols. The unit is switched from Semiautomatic mode to Manual
mode for ACLS use by pressing the appropriate soft key on the front panel.
The E Series assists caregivers during cardiopulmonary resuscitation (CPR) by evaluating the rate and depth of chest
compressions and providing feedback to the rescuer. Real CPR Help® requires the use of CPR-D-padz® and the
CPRD-to-MFC connector. Real CPR Help is available in E Series units with software version 3.00.000 or higher.
Information regarding the unit’s operation, patient ECG, and other physiological waveforms is displayed on a large 5.63
inch diagonal display, which provides high contrast and visibility under virtually all lighting conditions. Operating and
warning messages are displayed on the monitor and the unit can also be configured with voice prompts to alert the
user to unit status. Self-diagnostic tests are performed when the instrument is turned on as well as periodically during
operation.
A sophisticated data collection system, an internal summary report feature with printer, and PCMCIA cards are
available for this unit. A PCMCIA card can be installed in the unit to record ECG and virtually all device data when the
device is turned on. The data stored on the PCMCIA card can be reviewed and archived on a properly equipped
personal computer using RescueNet® Code Review for Windows software.
An annotating strip chart recorder is included to provide immediate documentation and summary report functions about
patient care and treatment during use.
Some E Series products are intended for use in the Semiautomatic mode by first responders and emergency medical
technicians certified by an appropriate federal, state or local government authority. Some E Series products are
intended for use in Manual mode by personnel certified by appropriate federal, state or local authority to provide
advanced life support care.
Some E Series products are intended for use in the pre-hospital emergency medical care setting, indoors and
outdoors, including first response vehicles, fire vehicles, basic and advanced level ambulances as well as by both
Basic Life Support (BLS) and Advanced Cardiac Life Support (ACLS) staff in hospitals under protocol control.
9650-1210-01 Rev. R 1-1

How to Use This Manual

The E Series Operator's Guide provides information operators need to know for the safe and effective use and care of
the E Series products. Before operating this device, be sure to read and understand all the information contained
within.
This manual is organized for Manual mode operators, Advisory mode operators and Semiautomatic mode operators. If
you will only use the device in Manual mode or Advisory mode you do not need to read Section 5. If you will only use
the device in Semiautomatic mode you do not need to read Sections 3, 4, or 6.
Please read “Safety Considerations” on page 1-11 thoroughly.
Procedures for daily checkout and unit care are described in “General Maintenance” on page 11-1.
This manual is supplemented by inserts for options available on the E Series. These inserts contain additional
warnings, precautions, and safety-related information.
Manual Updates
An issue or revision date for this manual is shown on the front cover.
If more than three years have elapsed since this date, contact ZOLL Medical Corporation to determine if additional
product information updates are available.
All users should carefully review each manual update to understand its significance and then file it in its appropriate
section within this manual for subsequent reference.
Product documentation is available through the ZOLL website at www.zoll.com. From the Products menu, choose
Product Documentation.
Unpacking
Before unpacking the E Series unit, carefully inspect each container for damage. If the shipping container or cushion
material is damaged, it should be kept until the contents have been checked for completeness and the instrument has
been checked for mechanical and electrical integrity.
If the contents are incomplete, if there is mechanical damage, or if the instrument does not pass its electrical self-test,
North American customers should call ZOLL Medical Corporation (1-800-348-9011). International customers should
contact the nearest ZOLL authorized representative. If the shipping container is damaged, also notify the carrier.
Accessories
The following table describes accessories available for use with the E Series.
Electrodes/Pads, Paddles, and Connectors REF

Adult, Multi-Function Pacing/Defibrillation stat-padz® 8900-4003
(12 pair/box)
Pediatric, Multi-Function Pacing/Defibrillation 8900-2065
pedi-padz® (6 pair/box)
External Paddle Assembly Apex/Sternum with built in 8000-1010-01
pediatric electrodes
CPR-D-padz 8900-0800-01
CPRD-to-MFC Connector 8000-0370
Cables REF
Multi-Function Cable Assembly for use with external 8000-0308-01 (standard 8’)
paddles or multi-function electrode pads 8000-0308-02 (extended 12’)
AAMI 3-Lead ECG Patient Cable 8000-0025-02 (6’)
8000-0025 (12’)
IEC 3-Lead ECG Patient Cable 8000-0026
1-2 9650-1210-01 Rev. R

General Information
AAMI 5-Lead Wire ECG Patient Cable 8000-1005-01

IEC 5-Lead Wire ECG Patient Cable 8000-0091
Power Cord Extension Cable (12”) 8000-0730
Batteries and Chargers REF

ZOLL Base PowerCharger 4x4 Battery Charger 8050-0012-01
Smart Battery Pack 8004-0103-01
SmartReady Battery Pack 8004-0104-01
ZOLL SurePower Charger 8050-0030-01
SurePower defibrillator battery 8019-0535-01
Miscellaneous REF
Storage Bag Set 8000-0916
Recorder Paper, 80mm Fan Fold 8000-0301 (20 packages)
8000-0302 (10 packages)
Defibrillator Gel 8000-0053
PCMCIA Data Cards (2 per package) 8000-0551 (8Mb)
8000-0552 (16Mb)
8000-0553 (32Mb)
RS232 Data Transfer Cable 8000-0605-01
ECG Simulator 8012-0206
* The terms “ZOLL Multi-Function Electrode (MFE) Pads” and “MFE Pads” are used interchangeably throughout this
manual.
9650-1210-01 Rev. R 1-3

Symbols Used on the Equipment

Any or all of the following symbols may be used in this manual or on this equipment:
Type B equipment.
Type BF equipment.
Type CF equipment.
Defibrillator-proof type BF equipment.
Defibrillator-proof type CF equipment.
Attention, consult accompanying documents.
Fragile, handle with care.
Keep dry.
This end up.
Temperature limitation.
Fusible Link.
Equipotentiality.
Protective (earth) ground terminal.
DANGER High Voltage present.
Alternating current.
Direct current.
1-4 9650-1210-01 Rev. R

General Information
Conformité Européenne Complies with the medical device directive 93/42/EEC.
2%
$
45
,%!
2.
2%#9#,%
0B Contains lead. Recycle or dispose of properly.
Keep away from open flame and high heat.
Do not open, disassemble, or intentionally damage.
Do not crush.
Nonrechargeable battery
Do not discard in trash. Recycle or dispose of properly.
Date of manufacture.
Use by.
Latex-free.
Do not reuse.
Do not fold.
Not sterile.
Nonionizing electromagnetic radiation.
Return to a collection site intended for waste electrical and electronic equipment
(WEEE). Do not dispose of in unsorted trash.
9650-1210-01 Rev. R 1-5

Manufacturer.
Authorized representative in the European Community.
Serial Number.
Catalogue number.
Consult instructions for use.
Protected against ingress of solid foreign objects > 2.5 mm in diameter.

IP34 Protected against splashing water.
1-6 9650-1210-01 Rev. R

General Information
Defibrillator Function Intended Use — CPR Monitoring

The E Series products contain a DC defibrillator capable The CPR monitoring function provides visual and audio
of delivering up to 200 joules of energy. It may be used in feedback designed to encourage rescuers to perform
synchronized mode to perform synchronized chest compressions at the AHA/ERC recommended rate
cardioversion by using the R-wave of the patient’s ECG of 100 compressions per minute. Voice and visual
as a timing reference. The unit uses paddles or prompts encourage a minimum compression depth of at
disposable, pre-gelled, MFE Pads for defibrillation. least 1.5 (3.8 cm) or 2.0 inches (5.0 cm), depending on
the configuration, for adult patients.
The E Series products must be prescribed for use by a
physician or medical advisor of an emergency response The CPR monitoring function is not intended for use on
team. patients under 8 years of age.
Intended Use — Manual Operation Contraindications for Semiautomatic Operation

Use of the E Series products in the Manual mode for Do not use the unit’s AED function on patients under 8
defibrillation is indicated on victims of cardiac arrest years of age.
where there is apparent lack of circulation as indicated The rhythm analysis function may not reliably identify
by these three conditions: ventricular fibrillation in the presence of an implanted
• Unconsciousness pacemaker. Inspection of the electrocardiogram and
• Absence of breathing, and clinical evidence of cardiopulmonary arrest should be the
basis for any treatment of patients with implanted
• Absence of pulse.
pacemakers.
This product should be used only by qualified medical
Do not use the rhythm analysis function during patient
personnel for converting ventricular fibrillation and rapid
movement on a stretcher or in an ambulance or other
ventricular tachycardia to sinus rhythm or other cardiac
conveyance. A patient must be motionless during ECG
rhythms capable of producing hemodynamically
analysis. Do not touch the patient during analysis. Cease
significant heart beats.
all movement of the stretcher or vehicle prior to
In Manual mode, the E Series unit may also be used for analyzing the ECG. If you are using the device in an
synchronized cardioversion to terminate atrial fibrillation emergency vehicle, bring the vehicle to a halt before
(AF) or ventricular tachycardias (VT) by using the R- activating the analysis function.
wave of the patient’s ECG as a timing reference. A
qualified physician must decide when synchronized Defibrillator Complications
cardioversion is appropriate. Inappropriate defibrillation or cardioversion of a patient
The Advisory function should be used to confirm (e.g., with no malignant arrhythmia) may precipitate
ventricular fibrillation and wide complex ventricular ventricular fibrillation, asystole, or other dangerous
tachycardia (greater than 150 beats per minute) in arrhythmias.
patients meeting the three conditions indicating lack of Defibrillation without proper application of electrode pads
circulation (previously listed). or paddle electrolyte gel may be ineffective and cause
burns, particularly when repeated shocks are necessary.
Intended Use — Semiautomatic Operation
Erythema or hyperemia of the skin under the paddles or
(AED)
MFE Pads often occurs; this effect is usually enhanced
The E Series AED unit is designed for use by emergency along the perimeter of the paddle or electrode. This
care personnel who have completed training and reddening should diminish substantially within 72 hours.
certification requirements applicable to the use of a
defibrillator where the device operator controls delivery Defibrillator Output Energy
of shocks to the patient. The E Series products may deliver up to 200 joules into a
They are specifically designed for use in early 50 ohm impedance. The energy delivered through the
defibrillation programs where the delivery of a chest wall, however, is determined by the patients
defibrillator shock during resuscitation involving CPR, transthoracic impedance. An adequate amount of
transportation, and definitive care are incorporated into a electrolyte gel must be applied to the paddles and a force
medically-approved patient care protocol. of 10-12 kilograms (22-26.4 lbs) must be applied to each
paddle in order to minimize this impedance. If MFE pads
Use of the device in the Semiautomatic mode for are used, make sure that they are properly applied.
defibrillation is indicated on victims of cardiac arrest (Instructions for proper application are located in “MFE
where there is apparent lack of circulation. Pad Application/Connection” on page 1-9).
Specifications for the ECG rhythm analysis function are
provided at the end of this section.
9650-1210-01 Rev. R 1-7

External Pacemaker Function (Pacer • As a standby when standstill or bradycardia

might be expected
version only)
Noninvasive pacing may be useful as a standby
Some E Series products may include an optional when cardiac arrest or symptomatic bradycardia
transcutaneous demand pacemaker consisting of a might be expected due to acute myocardial infarction,
pulse generator and ECG sensing circuitry. Non-invasive drug toxicity, anesthesia or surgery. It is also useful
Transcutaneous Pacing (NTP) is an established and as a temporary treatment in patients awaiting
proven technique. This therapy is easily and rapidly pacemaker implants or the introduction of
applied in both emergency and non-emergency transvenous therapy. In standby pacing applications,
situations when temporary cardiac stimulation is noninvasive pacing may provide an alternative to
indicated. transvenous therapy that avoids the risks of
Proper operation of the device, together with correct displacement, infection, hemorrhage, embolization,
electrode placement, is critical to obtaining optimal perforation, phlebitis and mechanical or electrical
results. Every operator must be thoroughly familiar with stimulation of ventricular tachycardia or fibrillation
these operating instructions. associated with endocardial pacing.
The output current of the pacemaker is continuously • Suppression of tachycardia

variable from 0 to 140 mA. The rate is continuously
Increased heart rates in response to external pacing
variable from 30 to 180 pulses per minute (ppm).
often suppress ventricular ectopic activity and may
The pacing output pulse is delivered to the heart by prevent tachycardia.
specially designed ZOLL MFE Pads placed on the back
and the precordium. Pacemaker Complications
The characteristics of the output pulse, together with the Ventricular fibrillation does not respond to pacing and
design and placement of the electrodes, minimize requires immediate defibrillation. Therefore, the patient’s
cutaneous nerve stimulation, cardiac stimulation dysrhythmia must be determined immediately, so that
threshold currents, and reduce discomfort due to skeletal you can employ appropriate therapy. If the patient is in
muscle contraction. ventricular fibrillation and defibrillation is successful but
cardiac standstill (asystole) ensues, you should use the
The unique design of the E Series products allow clear pacemaker.
viewing and interpretation of the electrocardiogram
(ECG) on the display without offset or distortion during Ventricular or supraventricular tachycardias may be
external pacing. interrupted with pacing but in an emergency or during
circulatory collapse, synchronized cardioversion is faster
Intended Use — Pacemaker and more certain. (See “Synchronized Cardioversion” on
page 6-1).
This product may be used for temporary external cardiac
pacing in conscious or unconscious patients as an Electromechanical dissociation may occur following
alternative to endocardial stimulation. prolonged cardiac arrest or in other disease states with
myocardial depression. Pacing may then produce ECG
Note: This device must not be connected to internal
responses without effective mechanical contractions,
pacemaker electrodes.
and other treatment is required.
The purposes of pacing include:
Pacing may evoke undesirable repetitive responses,
tachycardia, or fibrillation in the presence of generalized
• Resuscitation from standstill or bradycardia of
hypoxia, myocardial ischemia, cardiac drug toxicity,
any etiology
electrolyte imbalance, or other cardiac diseases.
Noninvasive pacing has been used for resuscitation
from cardiac standstill, reflex vagal standstill, drug Pacing by any method tends to inhibit intrinsic
induced standstill (due to procainamide, quinidine, rhythmicity. Abrupt cessation of pacing, particularly at
digitalis, b-blockers, verapamil, etc.) and unexpected rapid rates, can cause ventricular standstill and should
circulatory arrest (due to anesthesia, surgery, be avoided.
angiography, and other therapeutic or diagnostic Noninvasive Temporary Pacing may cause discomfort of
procedures). It has also been used for temporary varying intensity, which occasionally can be severe and
acceleration of bradycardia in Stokes-Adams disease preclude its continued use in conscious patients.
and sick-sinus syndrome. It is safer, more reliable,
and more rapidly applied in an emergency than Similarly, unavoidable skeletal muscle contraction may
endocardial or other temporary electrodes. be troublesome in very sick patients and may limit
continuous use to a few hours. Erythema or hyperemia
of the skin under the MFE Pads often occurs; this effect
is usually enhanced along the perimeter of the electrode.
1-8 9650-1210-01 Rev. R

General Information
This reddening should substantially lessen within 72

hours.
CAUTION
There have been reports of burns under the anterior Only use pads that are well within the expiration date
electrode when pacing adult patients with severely indicated on the package. Failure to do so could result
restricted blood flow to the skin. Prolonged pacing should in false patient impedance readings and may affect
be avoided in these cases and periodic inspection of the delivered energy.
underlying skin is advised.
There are reports of transient inhibition of spontaneous
2. Connect MFE Pads to the multi-function cable (if not
respiration in unconscious patients with previously
already connected), as shown below.
available units when the anterior electrode was placed
too low on the abdomen.
WARNING!: This device must not be connected to
internal pacemaker electrodes.
Pediatric Pacing
Pacing can be performed on pediatric patients weighing
33lbs / 15kg or less using special ZOLL pediatric MFE
Pads. Prolonged pacing (in excess of 30 minutes),
particularly in neonates, could cause burns. Periodic
inspection of the underlying skin is recommended.
Paddle and Electrode Options

The E Series products will defibrillate, cardiovert and WARNING
monitor ECG using either defibrillation paddles or ZOLL
Poor adherence and/or air under the MFE Pads can
Multi-Function Electrode (MFE) Pads.
lead to the possibility of arcing and skin burns.
The pacer version of the E Series paces using ZOLL
MFE Pads. 3. Open the pad packaging and apply one edge of the
ENERGY SELECT, CHARGE, and SHOCK controls are pad securely to the patient.
located on the paddles and front panel. When using MFE 4. Roll the pad smoothly from that edge to the other
Pads, you must use the controls on the front panel of the being careful not to trap any air pockets between the
unit. To switch from paddles to MFE Pads, remove the gel and skin.
Multi-Function cable from the apex paddle and connect
the MFE pads to the Multi-Function cable.
You cannot activate the Advisory function unless MFE
Pads are attached to the Multi-Function Cable and used
as the ECG monitoring lead.
Adult and pediatric MFE Pads, stat-padz, and ECG 1.
electrodes (not the ECG cable) are disposable, single-
use items.
MFE Pad Application/Connection 2.
This section describes how to prepare the patient and

attach and connect MFE pads. Attach the MFE pads
according to the instructions on the electrode packaging.
1. Prepare the patient by: If it is not possible to place the back MFE Pad on the
• Removing all clothing covering the patient's chest. patient's back, place it on the standard apex position
• Drying chest if necessary of the apex-sternum configuration. Effective
defibrillation will result, but pacing with the device is
• Clipping excessive chest hair, if necessary, to
usually less effective.
ensure proper adhesion of electrodes.
Ensure that all MFE Pads are making good contact with
the patient’s skin and are not covering any part of the
ECG electrodes. Note that:
• If the MFE Pads are not making good contact with the
patient, the messages CHECK PADS and POOR
9650-1210-01 Rev. R 1-9

PAD CONTACT are alternately displayed, and • The orange-yellow CHARGER ON indicator
energy will not be delivered illuminates continuously whenever the device is
• If a short circuit exists between MFE Pads, the turned OFF and charging the battery or whenever the
message DEFIB PAD SHORT is displayed. device is turned ON with a battery installed.
• The green CHARGER ON indicator illuminates
Monitor continuously whenever the unit is turned OFF and
the installed battery has been fully charged to present
The patient’s ECG is monitored by connecting the patient
capacity.
to the unit via the 3 lead or 5 lead wire patient cable,
• The green and orange-yellow CHARGER ON
MFE Pads, or through the paddles. Four seconds of
indicators illuminate alternately when no battery is
ECG is presented on the display along with the following
installed in the unit or when a battery charging fault
information:
has been detected.
• averaged heart rate, derived from measuring R to R
When the device is not connected to AC mains, the
intervals
CHARGER ON indicators remain extinguished. If your
• lead selections — I, II, III, aVR, aVL, aVF, V (with
E Series unit does not function as expected, refer to the
ECG cable), PADDLES, or PADS (APLS if connected
“Troubleshooting Guidelines” on page 13-1.
to AutoPulse® Plus)
• ECG size — 0.5, 1, 1.5, 2, 3 cm/mV External Battery Charger
• pacemaker output in milliamps (Pacer version only)
Use the ZOLL Base Power Charger 4x4 or ZOLL
• pacemaker stimulus rate in pulses per minute (Pacer
SurePower Charger for external battery charging and
version only)
capacity evaluation. You can charge up to four battery
• defibrillator output in joules
packs simultaneously; testing is automatic. See the
• other operational prompts, messages, and diagnostic appropriate ZOLL battery charger operator’s guide for
codes more information.
Monitoring or diagnostic ECG bandwidth is selectable.
Diagnostics
Recorder Function A computer contained within the unit performs self-
The strip recorder normally operates in the delay mode diagnostic tests whenever the product is initially turned
(6 seconds) to ensure capture of critical ECG on and periodically during operation. During operation, a
information. You manually activate the recorder by Function* FAULT XX message is displayed if a fault is
pressing the RECORDER button. It is activated detected. If this occurs, turn the unit off and then on and
automatically whenever a defibrillation shock is recheck operation. If the unit is connected to AC power,
delivered, a heart rate alarm occurs, or the rhythm disconnect the power after turning the unit off, then
analysis function is activated. You can deactivate the reconnect and turn the unit on again. Contact authorized
stripchart recorder during these events. service personnel if the message continues to be
displayed.
Batteries * Function: may include Recorder, Pacer, Defib, etc.
The E Series products use easily replaced sealed, lead-
acid or lithium-ion battery packs that, when new and fully
charged, provide at least 2.5 hours of monitoring. Use of
the defibrillator, strip chart recorder, and pacemaker
reduces this time.
When a LOW BATTERY message appears on the
display and the unit emits two beeps in conjunction with
the displayed message, you must replace and recharge
the battery.
Internal Battery Charging

You can charge the battery within the device via AC
(alternating current) mains, or an optional DC (direct
current) input.
When the E Series products are plugged into AC mains
or to a DC power supply, the CHARGER ON indicators
operate in the following manner:
1-10 9650-1210-01 Rev. R

General Information
Safety Considerations
The E Series products are high energy devices capable of delivering up to 200 joules. To completely deactivate the
device, you must turn the selector switch to the OFF position.
• In order to disarm a charged defibrillator, do one of the following: Turn the selector switch to MONITOR, OFF or
PACER (pacer equipped versions only)
• Change the selected defibrillator energy
As a safety feature, the device automatically disarms if left charged for more than 60 seconds (15 seconds for AED
versions).
WARNINGS - General
• Federal (U.S.A.) law restricts this device to use by or on the order of a physician.
• The use of external pacing/defibrillation electrodes or adapter devices from sources other than ZOLL is not
recommended. ZOLL makes no representations or warranties regarding the performance or effectiveness of its
products when used in conjunction with pacing/defibrillation electrodes or adapter devices from other sources.
Device failures attributable to the use of pacing/defibrillation electrodes or adapters not manufactured by ZOLL may
void ZOLL's warranty.
• Proper operation of the unit, together with correct electrode placement, is critical to obtaining optimal results.
Operators must be thoroughly familiar with proper device operation.
• Do not use the unit in Semiautomatic mode during patient movement. A patient must be motionless during ECG
analysis. Do not touch the patient during analysis. Cease all movement via stretcher or vehicle before analyzing the
ECG. If using the device in an emergency vehicle, bring the vehicle to a halt before using in Semiautomatic mode.
• Place the patient on a firm surface before performing CPR.
• The device is protected against interference from radio frequency emissions typical of two-way radios and cellular
phones (digital and analog) used in emergency service/public safety activities. Users should assess the device’s
performance in their typical environment of use for the possibility of radio frequency interference from high-power
sources. Radio Frequency Interference (RFI) may be observed as shifts in monitor baseline, trace compression,
display brightness changes or transient spikes on the display.
• E Series units equipped with the Bluetooth® option include an RF transmitter which transmits with 7dBm/5mW
power in the 2.4 GHz ISM band.
• Do not operate the unit without a battery during patient care. Keep a fully charged spare battery pack with the
device at all times.
• Regular use of partially charged battery packs without fully recharging between uses results in permanently
reduced capacity and early battery pack failure.
• Test batteries regularly. Batteries that do not pass ZOLL’s capacity test could unexpectedly shutdown without
warning.
• Replace the battery with a fully charged battery immediately after the LOW BATTERY or REPLACE BATTERY
message.
• Emergency defibrillation should be attempted only by appropriately trained, skilled personnel who are familiar with
equipment operation. Training appropriateness, such as Advanced Cardiac Life Support (ACLS) or Basic Life
Support (BLS) certification, should be determined by the prescribing physician.
• Synchronized cardioversion should only be attempted by skilled personnel trained in Advanced Cardiac Life
Support (ACLS) and familiar with equipment operation. The precise cardiac arrhythmia must be determined before
attempting defibrillation.
• Prior to attempting synchronized cardioversion, ensure that the ECG signal quality is good and that sync marks are
displayed above each QRS complex.
• Pacing must be turned off before defibrillating with a second defibrillator. Otherwise, the E Series unit may be
damaged.
• Carefully route the patient cables to avoid tripping over them.
• Carefully route the patient cables to avoid inadvertently pulling the unit onto the patient.
• Do not carry the unit while in use.
• These operating instructions describe the functions and proper operation of the E Series products. They are not
intended as a substitute for a formal training course. Operators should obtain formal training from an appropriate
authority prior to using the device for patient care.
• Do not disassemble the unit. A shock hazard exists. Refer all problems to authorized service personnel.
9650-1210-01 Rev. R 1-11

• The potential equalization connector on the rear connector panel of the device has no function during physiological
monitoring or delivery of therapy.
• Follow all recommended maintenance instructions. If a problem occurs, obtain service immediately. Do not use the
device until it has been inspected by the appropriate personnel.
• Do not use the unit’s ECG out signal as a sync pulse for another defibrillator or cardioverter.
• To ensure patient safety, connect the ECG out jack and modem (if available) only to other equipment with
galvanically-isolated circuits.
• The ECG out signal is delayed by up to 25 ms. This delay must be considered when the ECG out signal is used as
an input to other devices requiring R-wave synchronization.
• The E Series device may not perform to specifications when stored at the upper or lower extreme limits of storage
temperature and immediately put into use.
• Avoid using the E Series adjacent to, or stacked on, other equipment. If unavoidable, verify that the E Series
operates normally in this configuration before clinical use.
• The E Series should be installed and put into service according to the Electromagnetic Compatibility (EMC)
information in Appendix A of this manual.
• The use of accessories, transducers, and cables other than those specified in this manual and related E Series
option manual inserts may result in increased emissions or decreased immunity of the E Series.
Operator Safety
• Do not use E Series products in the presence of oxygen-rich atmosphere, flammable anesthetics or other
flammable agents (such as gasoline). Using the instrument near the site of a gasoline spill may cause an explosion.
• Do not use the instrument near or within puddles of water. Electrical safety of the device may be compromised
when wet.
• Do not discharge the unit with paddles or MFE pads shorted together or in open air.
• Warn all persons in attendance of the patient to STAND CLEAR prior to defibrillator discharge.
• Do not touch the bed, patient, or any equipment connected to the patient during defibrillation. A severe shock can
result. Do not allow exposed portions of the patient’s body to come in contact with metal objects, such as a bed
frame, as unwanted pathways for defibrillation current may result.
• Avoid contact with conductive fluids during defibrillation as unwanted current pathways may result.
• For defibrillation using paddles, utilize only high conductivity electrolyte gel specified by the manufacturer for such
use.
• To avoid risk of electrical shock, do not allow electrolyte gel to accumulate on hands or paddle handles.
• To avoid risk of electrical shock, do no touch the gelled area of the MFE Pads while pacing. When defibrillating with
paddles, use your thumbs to operate the SHOCK buttons in order to avoid inadvertent operator shock. No portion
of the hand should be near the paddle plates.
• Disconnect all electro-medical equipment that is not defibrillation-protected from the patient prior to defibrillation.
• Always check that the equipment functions properly and is in proper condition before use.
• Do not discharge the defibrillator except as indicated in the instructions. Do not discharge the defibrillator if the
MFE Pads are not properly attached to the patient.
• Only use thumbs to depress the paddle SHOCK buttons. Failure to do so could result in the inadvertent depression
of the energy select buttons, causing the defibrillator to disarm itself.
• When the unit is connected to an AC power source, turning the selector switch to OFF is not sufficient to disconnect
AC power from the unit. Instead, disconnect the AC power cord to completely remove AC power from the unit.
• The use of accessory equipment not complying with the equivalent safety requirements of this equipment may lead
to a reduced level of safety of the resulting system. Consideration relating to the choice shall include:
• Use of the accessory in the patient vicinity
• Evidence that the safety certification of the accessory has been performed in accordance with the appropriate
IEC (EN) 60601-1-1 harmonized national standards.
Patient Safety
• The use of the E Series Defibrillator is restricted to one patient at a time.
1-12 9650-1210-01 Rev. R

General Information
• The AutoPulse Plus is only intended for use on adults 18 years of age or older. When using the E Series and
AutoPulse Plus as a system, this age restriction applies to the E Series as well.
• Carefully route the patient cables to reduce the possibility of patient entanglement or strangulation.
• Do not use the unit’s AED function on patients under 8 years of age.
• Neonatal and pediatric defibrillation energy levels should be set based on site-specific clinical protocols.
• The device detects ECG electrical signals only. It will not detect a pulse (i.e. effective circulatory perfusion). Always
verify pulse and heart rate by physical assessment of the patient. Never assume that a non-zero heart rate display
means that the patient has a pulse.
• Implanted pacemakers may cause the heart rate meter to count the pacemaker rate during incidents of cardiac
arrest or other arrhythmias. Pacemaker patients should be carefully observed. Check the patient’s pulse; do not rely
solely on heart rate meters. Dedicated pacemaker detection circuitry may not detect all implanted pacemaker
spikes. Patient history and physical exam are important in determining the presence of an implanted pacemaker.
• Use only high quality ECG electrodes. ECG electrodes are for rhythm acquisition only. Do not attempt to defibrillate
or pace through ECG electrodes.
• This equipment is suitable for use in the presence of electrosurgery.
• To avoid electrosurgery burns at monitoring sites, ensure proper connection of the electrosurgery return circuits so
that the return paths cannot be made through monitoring electrodes or probes.
Do not use ECG electrodes or MFE Pads if the gel is dried, separated, torn, or split from the foil; patient burns may
result from using such electrodes. Poor adherence and/or air under the MFE Pads can lead to the possibility of
arcing and skin burns.
• The ECG rhythm analysis function does not warn the operator of patient asystole, as it is not a shockable rhythm.
• Excessive body hair or wet, diaphoretic skin can inhibit good coupling (contact), which can lead to the possibility of
arcing and skin burns. Clip excess hair and dry surrounding moisture from the area where the electrode is to be
attached. MFE Pads should be replaced after 8 hours of continuous pacing (2 hours for Radiolucent stat-padz) to
ensure maximum patient benefit.
• Prolonged pacing (in excess of 30 minutes), particularly in neonates or adults with severely restricted blood flow,
may cause burns. Periodically inspect the underlying skin.
• Check leakage levels prior to use. Leakage current may be excessive if more than one monitor or other piece of
equipment is connected to the patient.
• Do not simultaneously touch the patient and battery pins on the unit.
• Do not simultaneously touch the patient and non-medical electrical equipment connected to the unit.
CAUTIONS
• Do not install the battery into the device when storage may exceed 90 days. Battery damage may occur.
• The LOW BATTERY message display-to-shutdown interval may be less than one minute when older batteries
become depleted.
• Do not sterilize the device.
• Do not sterilize the CPRD-to-MFC connector.
• Do not immerse any part of the device in water.
• Do not use alcohol or ketones (MEK, acetone, etc.) on the device.
• Avoid using abrasives (e.g. paper towels) on the display window.
• Grounding reliability can only be certain when the equipment is connected to an equivalent receptacle marked
HOSPITAL ONLY or HOSPITAL GRADE. If the grounding integrity of the line cord or AC receptacle is in doubt,
operate on battery only.
• Multiple portable socket-outlets or extension cords should not be connected to the unit.
• Do not use accessories not specified for use with the E Series units.
• Use only ECG cables (namely, ones with internal current-limiting resistors) specified or supplied by ZOLL Medical
Corporation to protect the E Series from damage during defibrillation, for accurate ECG information, and for
protection against noise and other interference.
FCC Statement Regarding Bluetooth Operation
This device complies with Part 15 of FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two
conditions: (1) this device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference
received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.
Bluetooth equipped E Series units may contain FCC ID: PVH070101 or FCC ID: PVH090202S.
9650-1210-01 Rev. R 1-13

Restarting the Device

Certain events require the E Series products to be
restarted after they shut off or become inoperative.
One example is when the battery runs down and the unit
shuts off. In this case, perform these steps in this order:
1. Turn the selector switch to the OFF position
2. Remove the battery.
3. Insert a new battery.
4. Turn the selector switch to the desired operating
mode to resume operation.
This sequence is necessary to restart the device, and
can also be used to clear some X FAULT XX messages,
when immediate use of the device is required.
Note that some settings (for example, alarm settings,
lead selection, ECG size) may need to be restored from
their default values when operation is resumed.
1-14 9650-1210-01 Rev. R

General Information
FDA Regulations 1. Grant of License: In consideration of payment of the

software license fee which is part of the price paid for
Tracking Requirements this product, ZOLL Medical Corporation grants the
Purchaser a non-exclusive license, without right to
U.S. Federal Law (21 CFR 821) requires the tracking of
sublicense, to use the system software in object-code
defibrillators. As an owner of this device, you have the
form only.
responsibility under this law to notify ZOLL Medical
Corporation if this product has been: 2. Ownership of Software/Firmware: Title to,
ownership of and all rights and interests in the system
• received software and all copies thereof remain at all times
• lost, stolen or destroyed vested in the manufacturer and Licensors to ZOLL
• donated, resold, or otherwise distributed to a different Medical Corporation and they do not pass to
organization. Purchaser.
If any of the events described above occur, please 3. Assignment: Purchaser agrees not to assign, sub-
contact ZOLL Medical Corporation in writing with the license or otherwise transfer or share its rights under
following information: the license without the express written permission of
ZOLL Medical Corporation.
1. Originator's organization — Company Name, 4. Use Restrictions: As the Purchaser, you may
Address, Contact Name, and Contact Phone Number physically transfer the products from one location to
2. Model Number and Serial Number another provided that the software/firmware is not
3. Disposition of Device (e.g., received, lost, stolen, copied. You may not disclose, publish, translate,
destroyed, distributed to another organization), New release, or distribute copies of the software/firmware
Location and/or Organization (if known and different to others. You may not modify, adapt, translate,
from #1 above) — Company Name, Address, Contact reverse engineer, decompile, crosscompile,
Name, and Contact Phone Number disassemble, or create derivative works based on the
4. Date change took effect software/firmware.
5. Other information or comments
Please address your information to:
Service
ZOLL Medical Corporation The device does not require periodic recalibration or
Attn: Tracking Coordinator adjustment. Appropriately trained and qualified
269 Mill Road personnel should, however, perform periodic tests of the
Chelmsford, MA 01824-4105 device to verify proper operation. (See “General
Maintenance” on page 11-1).
Fax: (978) 421-0010
Tel: (978) 421-9655 Returning a unit for service
Before sending a unit to the ZOLL Technical Service
Notification of Adverse Events
Department for repair, obtain a service request (SR)
Under the Safe Medical Devices Act (SMDA), health number from the service representative.
care providers are responsible for reporting to ZOLL, and
Remove the battery pack from the unit, and pack the unit
possibly to the FDA, the occurrence of certain events.
with its cables in the original containers (if available) or
These events, described in 21 CFR Part 803, include equivalent packaging. Be sure the assigned service
device related death and serious injury or illness. In any request number appears on each package.
event, as part of our Quality Assurance Program, ZOLL
should be notified of any device failures or malfunctions.
This information is required to assure that ZOLL provides
only the highest quality products.
Software License
Note: Read this Operator’s Manual and License
agreement carefully before operating any of the
E Series products.
Software incorporated into the system is protected by
copyright laws and international copyright treaties as well
as other intellectual property laws and treaties. This
software is licensed, not sold. By taking delivery of and
using this system, the Purchaser signifies agreement to
and acceptance of the following terms and conditions:
9650-1210-01 Rev. R 1-15

For Return the unit to

customers
In the ZOLL Medical Corporation
U.S.A. 269 Mill Road
Chelmsford, MA 01824-4105
Attention: Technical Service
Department (SR number)
Telephone: 1-800-348-9011
In Canada ZOLL Medical Canada Inc.
1750 Sismet Road, Unit #1
Mississauga, ON L4W 1R6
Attention: Technical Service
Department (SR number)
Telephone: 1-866-442-1011
In other The nearest authorized ZOLL Medical
locations Corporation representative.
To locate an authorized service center,
contact the International Sales
Department at
269 Mill Road
Chelmsford, MA 01824-4105
Telephone: 1-978-421-9655
The ZOLL Serial Number

Each ZOLL product displays a serial number that
contains information about that product. From left to
right, ZOLL serial numbers are structured as follows:
• A two-character product code
• A three-character date-of-manufacture code
• A product serial number of six or more alphanumeric
characters
The product code for the E Series defibrillator is AB.
The first two characters of the date-of-manufacture code
give the last two digits of the year (for example, “06”
would appears for products manufactured in 2006). The
last character of the date-of-manufacture code gives the
month in which the product was manufactured. The
month appears in the form of a single alphanumeric
character: “A” for January, “B” for February, “C” for
March, and so on through “L” for December.
The product serial number is a unique set of
alphanumeric characters that ZOLL assigns to an
individual unit.
1-16 9650-1210-01 Rev. R

SECTION 2
OPERATING CONTROLS AND INDICATORS
9 6 7 8 10
21
3
!.!,):%
5
#(!2'%
,%!$ 3(/#+
(2
,%!$
3):%
x1. 204 %.%2'9
4
ll 3):% 3%,%#4
ECG
Sp02 %
98 !,!2-
2
3530%.$
RR
$%&)"
-/.)4/2
CO2
2%#/2$%2
1
/&&
ECG
20
0!#%2
0!#%2 2!4%
PPM

0!#%2
Sync /540/24
On/Off M!
04:48 Alarms
Param
#/$% .)"0
35--!29 -!2+%2
.
#(!2'%2/
11 12 13 15 16 22 14 17 18 19 ZM-04-36 Rev. A
1. Selector Switch
Allows selection of OFF, MONITOR, DEFIB, and PACER, (Pacer version only) modes.
2. ENERGY SELECT Buttons
Allows selection of defibrillation energy level. There are two sets of up-down arrow buttons; one set located on the front
panel and the other (not shown) located on the sternum paddle. Press and hold the up or down arrow button until the
desired energy level is indicated on the display.
3. CHARGE Button
Pressing the CHARGE button on the front panel or, if using paddles, on the apex paddle handle (not shown), charges
the defibrillator to the selected energy level.
9650-1210-01 Rev. R 2-1

4. SHOCK Button 10. RECORDER Buttons

The SHOCK button illuminates when the defibrillator is Located on the unit’s front panel and another located on
charged and ready. Press and hold the button to the sternum paddle (not shown), starts and stops the
discharge the defibrillator. stripchart recorder.
The SHOCK button is active only when using MFE Pads. Pressing and holding the RECORDER button switches
The SHOCK button is not functional when external the unit to diagnostic ECG bandwidth (0.05-150 Hz).
paddles are connected to the unit.
Diagnostic bandwidth is maintained as long as the
Each external paddle has a SHOCK button located near RECORDER button is held down. The unit reverts to
the forward end of the handle. Press and hold both standard monitoring bandwidth when the RECORDER
buttons simultaneously to discharge the defibrillator. button is released.
5. ANALYZE Button 11. VOLUME Button (for ECG tone and voice
Initiates ECG analysis to identify shockable rhythms. prompts only)
Allows for manual adjustment of the QRS beeper tone
6. Scroll Keys and Commit Key
from maximum volume to inaudible, and voice prompts
Scroll keys (with arrows) located on top of the unit from maximum volume to minimum volume. (The heart
control cursor movement for data entry in select software rate alarm and charge ready volumes are not
screens. The Commit key (circular) allows you to save adjustable.) Press this button to display a menu for
selected or entered data to a field. adjusting the volume using softkeys.
7. LEAD Button 12. CONTRAST Button
Determines selection of the ECG source. Pressing this Brings up a menu on the display for adjusting the display
button sequentially selects ECG signals derived from brightness (contrast on LCD) using softkeys.
each of the following lead configurations — I, II, III, aVR,
Press and hold this button to disable color settings and
aVF, aVL, PADDLES (defibrillator paddles), or PADS
select between two contrast settings: black on white
(MFE pads) for display. The PADS or PADDLES lead
background or white on black background.
setting is automatically selected when the instrument
powers up in DEFIB or MONITOR mode and MFE Pads 13. CHARGER ON Indicators
or Paddles are connected to the Multi-Function cable.
When the E Series unit is plugged into AC mains, the
Lead II is automatically selected when the E Series unit CHARGER ON indicators operate as described
powers up in PACER mode (Pacer version only). Pads previously in “Internal Battery Charging” on page 1-10.
or Paddles monitoring is not available in PACER mode.
“APLS” will be displayed in the upper right-hand corner CHARGER ON indicators remain extinguished.
of the display if the unit is connected to PADS through an
AutoPulse Plus. 14. Softkeys
8. SIZE Button Five unlabeled buttons located directly beneath the

display control different functions depending on the
Allows you to change the display size of the ECG signal. current operating mode of the unit. Softkey labels appear
Size options are 0.5, 1, 1.5, 2, 3 cm/mV and are at the bottom of the display directly above each softkey
indicated in the upper right of the display. to indicate its function.
9. ALARM SUSPEND Button 15. SUMMARY Button
Turns the audible alarm indicators on and off. An alarm Retrieves stored patient information and prints it on the
symbol ( ) appears in the top-center of the display unit recorder as a summary report. The summary report
when the alarms are enabled. When the alarms are function automatically collects critical patient ECG data,
entirely disabled, or the audible alarm indicators are off, control settings, date, time and therapies administered
during certain events. See “Summary Report Function”
the alarm symbol is crossed out ( ). on page 2-4 for more information.
When alarms are enabled, and an alarm condition
16. CODE MARKER Button
occurs, a tone sounds and the alarm symbol flashes. To
avoid possible confusion with the defibrillator charged Activates a menu and allows the unit to record in its
tone, the heart rate alarm sounds at a different frequency internal memory the delivery of specific drugs or
when the Selector Switch is set to DEFIB. treatments.
See “Code Markers” on page 2-4 for more information.
2-2 9650-1210-01 Rev. R

Operating Controls and Indicators
17. Pacer Output mA (Pacer Version Only) The next three items are located on the top of all units,
as shown in the following figure.
When pacing is selected, this control sets the amount of
current delivered to the MFE Pads. For conscious Data Card Slot
patients, it should be gradually increased until capture is
recognized. The selected current setting is indicated on
the display.
18. 4:1 BUTTON (Pacer Version Only)
Tests for threshold or to determine the patient’s
underlying rhythm. When depressed, this button causes
pacing stimuli to be delivered at ¼ of the frequency of the
current ppm setting. The device resumes normal pacing
operation when the button is released.
19. Pacer Rate ppm (Pacer Version Only) CO2
Sp02 %
98
RR
ECG ll
,%!$ 3):%
x1.
(2
204
,%!$
3):%
#(!2'%
%.%2'9

!.!,):%
3(/#+
!,!2- 3%,%#4
3530%.$
ECG
2%#/2$%2
/.
When pacing is selected, this control sets the rate at

/&&
04:48 0!#%2
Sync 0!#%2 0!#%2
Param On/Off
Alarms /540/24 2!4%
M! PPM
which the pacemaker will operate. It must be set above

#/$%
35--!29 .)"0
#(!2'%2/. -!2+%2
the patient’s intrinsic rate in order for the pacemaker to

provide stimulation. The selected pace rate setting is
indicated on the display.
20. Systole and Alarm Speaker
Emits an audible heart rate tone during ECG monitoring, Stripchart PC Card
and audible alarm indications when an alarm condition Recorder Modem Slot
occurs. Compartment
21. Microphone (Optional) Stripchart Recorder Compartment

Records audio activity in the vicinity of the E Series unit Located on top of the unit, the recorder compartment
for storage on the PCMCIA data card. holds the paper supply for the recorder. Open the cover
to replace the paper.
22. NIBP Button (Optional)
PCMCIA Data Card Slot
Allows you to start single, auto, or STAT noninvasive
blood pressure measurements as described in the option Located on top of the unit, the PCMCIA data card slot
insert Non-Invasive Blood Pressure (part number holds the PCMCIA flash memory card for data storage
9650-1214-01). Your unit has this button only if you and retrieval.
ordered this configuration.
PC Card Modem Slot (12-Lead Option Only)
Located on top of the unit, the PC Card modem slot
holds the modem card for transmitting 12-Lead ECG
information to remote locations via landline or cellular
phone. See the 12-Lead ECG Monitoring insert (part
number 9650-1213-01) for more information.
Charge Indicator Light (Not Shown)
Located on the apex paddle, this light turns on when the
defibrillator is charged and ready.
Defibrillator Test Port (Not Shown)
Located on the Multi-Function Cable, the test connector
is used to test the defibrillator output using the
Multi-Function Cable only.
Pediatric Paddles
Pediatric-size electrodes are built into the paddle
assembly; they lie directly under the adult electrode
surface. Access them by pushing the black PEDI button
at the front of each paddle and sliding the adult surface
forward. When replacing the adult electrodes, it is
9650-1210-01 Rev. R 2-3

important that the electrode is locked correctly in position clinical action without having to scroll through the list. If
on the paddle handle. no code marker has been entered, the cursor highlights
PEDI Button the first item in the list.
Adult
Electrode Note: Selecting code markers out of order disables this
(Shoe) feature.
Separate Code Marker lists are maintained for PACER,
MONITOR, and DEFIB modes thereby enabling the
appropriate Code Markers to be displayed for the
particular protocol.
Pediatric
The Code Markers are removed from the display after 10
Electrode seconds. If no Code Marker softkey has been pressed in
(Plate)
that time, a generic event mark is stored in Summary
Report memory.
Summary Report Function

Volt ECG Out (Not Shown)
The summary report function allows you to store and
A 1 volt/cm of displayed ECG signal output is available later retrieve important ECG and device event
from a subminiature phone jack located on the back of information. The unit’s internal memory automatically
the device. This output may be used for interconnections records defibrillation and cardioversion segments,
to patient monitors and radio-telemetry equipment. The PACER mode (Pacer version only), heart rate alarm and
tip carries the ECG signal and the sleeve is ground. ECG segments upon activation of the strip chart
recorder. Associated event information including device
Code Markers control settings, patient ECG, time and date are recorded
When you press the CODE MARKER button on the front as well.
panel, the unit displays a preconfigured list of clinical Note: Diagnostic bandwidth recordings are not included
actions. See the E Series Configuration Guide (part in the summary report function.
number 9650-1201-01) for information on configuring
code markers. Summary Report records each event in chronological
order and stores up to 250 defibrillation or 210 recorder
activated ECG events. All event data remains in memory
and is accessible until data is manually erased or until
NIBP --- SpO2% ECG x1 70 the pre-configured time interval has elapsed, as
kPa 24
- --- --- PADS specified in the “Set Report Restart Delay” parameter.
See the E Series Configuration Guide (part number
CO2 --- m
m Hg --- RR
9650-1201-01) for more information.
ECG
Summary Report is user configurable for automatic
erasure after power off detection, with selection values of
CPR B-block Digoxin Sedation 5, 15, 30 and 90 minutes, 6, 12, and 18 hours, and 1.5
Intubate Atrovert Vasopr
EPI Mag Sulf DOPA
days. Summary Report can also be erased manually at
LIDO Adenosin Morphine any time. When Summary Report memory becomes full,
Narcan Fentanyl Thrombo
a REPORT FULL message is displayed and no further
Enter records are stored.
Marker Default
You can also select “Erase All” from the Summary Erase
menu. Doing so erases Summary Report, Patient
Use the scroll keys on top of the unit to scroll through the Records and Trend collectively.
list of available clinical actions, then press the
A summary report may be printed by pressing the
Commit ( ) key on top of the unit, or the Enter Marker
SUMMARY button on the front panel.
softkey, to record the action, along with a date and time
stamp, in Summary Report memory. Summary Report Formats
In addition, the Protocol Assist Code Markers™ feature The summary report function prints an overview of all the
facilitates code marker entry by retaining the last code events currently stored in memory including total number
marker selection in memory. When you open the Code of defibrillation shocks delivered, total pacing time
Marker menu, the cursor automatically highlights the (cumulative), time and date the device was turned on (or
next item in the list after the most recently selected item. if you have just manually erased summary reports, then
If the list of code markers has been configured in order of start time and date of the next report), time of last event,
medical protocol, you can quickly enter the highlighted
2-4 9650-1210-01 Rev. R

as well as space for patient name, date and comments. On the last event recorded, “SUMMARY COMPLETE” is
printed at the bottom left of the recorder strip.
Defibrillation Format
The summary report function records 6 seconds of pre-shock and 9 seconds of post-shock patient ECG data. Also
recorded are joules selected, joules delivered, sync if active (includes sync markers), ECG lead, ECG size, patient
impedance, actual event time and date. The date/time printed on the top of the strip corresponds to the ECG data
occurring 6 seconds before the event. AED units additionally include shock count and AED mode annotations.
Actual event date/time
9650-1210-01 Rev. R 2-5

Pacer Format (Pacer version only)

The summary report function records 6 seconds of pre-pacer patient ECG data. Also recorded are the ECG lead, ECG
size, patient's heart rate, actual event time and date. The date/time printed on the top of the strip corresponds to the
ECG data occurring 6 seconds before the event.
Actual
event
date/time
After establishing a paced rhythm, turning the recorder on briefly records the paced rhythm for later reports. If async
pace is active, the annotation “ASYNC PACE” is also recorded and printed.
Actual
event
date/time
2-6 9650-1210-01 Rev. R

Heart Rate Alarm Activated Format

The summary report function records 6 seconds of pre-alarm patient ECG. Also recorded are the ECG lead, ECG size,
patient's heart rate, actual event time, and date. The date/time printed on the top of the strip corresponds to the ECG
data occurring 6 seconds before the event. If the pacer is on during this event, the pacing rate and pacing current are
also recorded.
Actual
event
date/time
VF Alarm Activated Format (Refer to Section 6)

The summary report function records 18 seconds of patient ECG data associated with each VF alarm. Also recorded
are the shock count, ECG lead, ECG size, actual event time, patient’s heart rate, and noise events. The date/time
printed on the top of the strip corresponds to the ECG data occurring 6 seconds before the event.
Actual
event
date/time
Recorder On Format
The summary report function records 6 seconds of patient ECG prior to turning on the recorder. Also recorded are the
ECG lead, ECG size, patient's heart rate, actual event time, and date. The date/time printed on the top of the strip
corresponds to the ECG data occurring 6 seconds before the event. If the pacer is on during this event, the pacing rate
9650-1210-01 Rev. R 2-7

and pacing current are also recorded. If async pace is active, the annotation “ASYNC PACE” is recorded. AED units
additionally include shock count and AED mode annotations.
Actual
event
date/time
Analyze Format
The summary report function records six seconds of pre analysis ECG and 12 seconds of ECG recorded during the
ECG analysis interval with the annotation “SHOCK ADVISED” or “NO SHOCK ADVISED.” AED units additionally
include shock count and AED mode annotations. The date/time printed on the top of the strip corresponds to the ECG
data occurring 6 seconds before the event.
Actual
event
date/time
The following annotations may also appear at the top of the Analyze Format printout:
Annotation Description
POOR PAD CONTACT The MFE Pads are detected as having poor connection.
ANALYSIS HALTED The ECG analysis is halted due to either the ANALYZE button being pushed or a fault
condition.
NOISY ECG Excessive noise is detected.
SHOCK ADVISED Shockable rhythm has been detected at the end of user-initiated ECG analysis.
NO SHOCK ADVISED No shockable rhythm has been detected at the end of user-initiated ECG analysis.
ECG TOO LARGE The amplitude of the ECG signal is too large for proper rhythm analysis.
2-8 9650-1210-01 Rev. R

Manual Mode Activated 3. Use the scroll keys on top of the unit to scroll through
the list of start times associated with different calls.
AED versions of the E Series will record a “MANUAL
MODE STARTED” summary report event when the
device is switched from Semiautomatic mode to Manual
mode. NIBP --- SpO2% ECG PADS x1 70
kPa 24
- --- ---
Printing a Report CO2 --- m
m Hg --- RR

To print the stored information, press the SUMMARY
02NOV 11:43:11 Call Started
button below the screen display. Then press the 02NOV 11:40:05 Call Started
corresponding softkey to print a “call” report, summary 02NOV 3952 Call Started
report (print chart), or incident log. 02NOV 11:38:11 Call Started
02NOV 11:35:05 Call Started
Print Print Print Realtime Trend

Call Chart Log Start Print
Records Abort
#/$%
4. Press the Commit ( ) key on top of the unit, or the
35--!29 .)"0
#(!2'%2/. -!2+%2
Print Records softkey, to print the events associated
with the selected call.
The recorder prints all summary report events currently
in memory in chronological order. If the unit is equipped Printing a Partial Summary Report
with the 12-lead option, the recorder will print all 12-lead To print only a portion of the Summary Report:
patient records currently in memory at the end of the
summary report printout. If the stripchart recorder is on 1. Press the SUMMARY button.
or the defibrillator is charged, summary report printing is 2. Press the Print Chart softkey.
disabled. In addition: 3. Press the Print Range softkey.
• To stop printing a report, press the RECORDER 4. Use the scroll keys on top of the unit to scroll through
button or turn the unit off. You can print an unlimited the list of events.
number of copies of the report by pressing the
SUMMARY button and corresponding print softkey
again. NIBP --- SpO2% ECG PADS x1 70
kPa 24
• If you press the RECORDER button while printing a - --- ---
summary report, the unit stops printing the report. CO2 --- m
m Hg --- RR
Press the RECORDER button again to begin printing
an ECG trace. The stripchart recorder runs 02NOV 14:18:02 Intubate
continuously until the button is pressed again. 02NOV 14:12:29 CPR
• If you press the SUMMARY button and a 02NOV 11:54:03 DEFIB ADVISORY
02NOV 11:52:48 RECORDED ECG
corresponding print softkey while a report is already 02NOV 11:06:14 POWER ON
printing, the current report stops printing and a new
report begins to print.
• Printing is interrupted if a vital sign alarm occurs (i.e. Print
Records Abort
HR, SpO2, etc.), the ANALYZE button is pressed, or
the defibrillator is charged. 5. Press the Commit ( ) key on top of the unit, or the
• If the recorder is out of paper when the SUMMARY Print Records softkey, to print the specified event
button and a corresponding print softkey are pressed, and all subsequent events.
a CHECK RECORDER message appears on the
display. Load paper and press the SUMMARY button Printing an Incident Log
again to select the report to print.
An incident log is an abbreviated list of all major events
Printing a Call Report recorded in the summary report. You can print out an
incident log that includes the time of occurrence of the
A Call Report is an abbreviated summary report following events:
containing only those events associated with a specific
call or run. To print a call report: • E Series unit powered on
• Defibrillation advisory messages (for example,
1. Press the SUMMARY button. CHECK PATIENT and SHOCK ADVISED)
2. Press the Print Call softkey. • Defibrillation shocks (including energy level)
• Pacer mode activated
9650-1210-01 Rev. R 2-9

• Manual mode started (AED only) • Select the Enter ( ) key from the keypad and
• Alarms triggered press the Commit ( ) key on top of the unit.
• Code markers The highlight automatically advances to the
• Recorder turned on Patient ID# line.
• NIBP measurements activated (if option is included)
In addition, the incident log lists the following:
• Report start time (time when Summary Report
memory was erased)
• Last event time (time of last event in memory) PT. NAME: JOHN SMITH
JOHN SMITH
PT. ID:
• Total number of shocks
• Total pacer time J
• System serial number

• Device identification number w
Finally, a 12-lead log (if applicable) is appended to the

end of the incident log. Name Cancel Return
To print an incident log:

• Press the ID # softkey to advance to the Patient ID
1. Press the SUMMARY button.
field.
2. Press the Print Log softkey.
• Press the Return Softkey to save the information,
Adding a Patient Name and ID Number if you do not want to enter a Patient ID number.
This returns you to the main menu.
to a Report
Pressing the Cancel softkey returns you to the Patient
To add patient name and identification number to the Information menu without storing the name and ID
summary report: number.
1. Press the ID # softkey to access the Name and ID# 4. Repeat step 2 to enter up to 14 characters in the
screen. Patient ID field.
The cursor goes directly to Patient Name field. If you
don’t want to enter a name, press the ID # softkey to
move the cursor to the Patient ID field.
2. Use the scroll keys on top of the unit to select a

character on the keypad, then press the Commit ( ) PT. NAME: JOHN SMITH
JOHN SMITH
key on top of the unit to enter the character in the PT. ID:
Patient Name field. J
Name Cancel Return

PT. NAME: J
PT. ID:
5. When you have entered the ID#, you can do one of
the following things:
• Select the Enter ( ) key from the keypad and
press the Commit ( ) key on top of the unit to
store the name and ID number and return to the
Patient Information menu.
ID # Cancel Return
• Press the Return Softkey to store the name and
ID number and return to the Patient Information
Space Bar menu.
Repeat until you have entered the patient’s entire • Press the Name softkey to go back to the name
name (up to 14 characters). field to make any corrections to the name field.
3. When you have entered the patient name, you can Pressing the Cancel softkey returns you to the Patient
do one of the following things: Information menu without storing the name and ID
number.
2-10 9650-1210-01 Rev. R

Note: You cannot add a patient name to summary 5. When you have modified the patient name, move the
report events already stored in memory. The cursor to the Enter ( ) key on the keypad and press
patient name is stored only with those summary the Commit ( ) key on top of the unit.
events saved after the patient name has been
entered.
Modifying a Patient Name and ID

Number
PT. NAME: JANE SMITH
To change an existing patient name and identification PT. ID: 1234567
number:
J
1. Press ID # softkey to display the Patient Name and ID
screen and keypad. w
2. Use the scroll keys on top of the unit to select the

Next key (>>>) or the Prev key (<<<) on the keypad,
then press the Commit ( ) key, as many times as ID # Cancel Return
necessary to move the cursor to the desired position.
6. Repeat steps 2 through 5 to modify the Patient ID
field. Otherwise, press the Commit ( ) key again,
with the Enter ( ) key highlighted (or press the
Return softkey), to return to the main menu.
PT. NAME: JOHN SMITH Erasing Summary Report Memory

PT. ID: 1234567
To erase all stored information, press and hold the
J
SUMMARY button for approximately 4 seconds. Then
press the corresponding softkey to erase summary,
w
erase trend, or erase all event reports. An ERASING
‹‹‹ ›››
REPORT message appears on the display.
ID # Cancel Return
3. Use the scroll keys on top of the unit to select the

Backspace key () on the keypad, then press the
Commit ( ) key to erase the selected character. #/$%
35--!29
#(!2'%2/. -!2+%2
Repeat as necessary
Turning the unit off for more than 15 minutes, unless

configured otherwise, also erases summary and trend
report memory. All events remain stored until you erase
them or the unit has been turned off for a user-
PT. NAME: J SMITH configurable time period of 5 minutes to 36 hours.
PT. ID: 1234567
J ←
ID # Cancel Return
4. Enter the new characters in the Patient Name field,

using the scroll keys on top of the unit to select
characters from the keypad and pressing the
Commit ( ) key to enter the selection.
9650-1210-01 Rev. R 2-11


SECTION 3
MANUAL DEFIBRILLATION
Paddles/pads are a defibrillation-protected Type BF patient connection.
ECG leads are a defibrillation-protected Type CF patient connection.
Emergency Defibrillation Procedure with Paddles or MFE Pads
WARNING
• To avoid risk of electrical shock, do not allow electrolyte gel to accumulate on hands
or paddle handles.
• When defibrillating with paddles, use your thumbs to operate the SHOCK buttons in
order to avoid operator shock. No portion of the hand should be near the paddle
plates.
• The AutoPulse Plus is only intended for use on adults 18 years of age or older.
When using the E Series and AutoPulse Plus as a system, this age restriction
applies to the E Series as well.
You can perform manual defibrillation using either

paddles or MFE pads; the manual defibrillation
procedure described in this section allows for either.
WARNING
Before you begin manual defibrillation: If the APLS icon does not appear, check that the
• Determine the patient’s condition following medical E Series and AutoPulse Plus are properly connected. If
protocols and by verifying: the APLS icon still does not appear, or a
• Unconsciousness PADDLE FAULT occurs, discharge energy internally by
• Absence of breathing, and changing the energy selection, disconnect the
Multi-Function Cable and PADS from the AutoPulse
• Absence of pulse
Plus, and connect the Multi-Function Cable directly to
• If appropriate, begin CPR following medical protocol,
the PADS.
and request additional assistance.
Note: If you are using MFE pads, prepare the patient
and attach the MFE pads as described in “MFE 1 Prepare the unit for defibrillation.
Pad Application/Connection” on page 1-9.
Turn the unit to DEFIB.
If connecting to PADS through the AutoPulse Plus, refer
The unit automatically defaults to 120 J or the first shock
to the User Guide AutoPulse® Resuscitation System
energy selection configured by the user. For information
Model 100 with Defibrillator Interface addendum (part
about configuring energy levels, refer to the E Series
number 9650-0720-01) for instructions on properly
Configuration Guide (part number 9650-1201-01).
connecting the E Series to the AutoPulse Plus. It is
recommended that the user cycle through the lead
setting until the APLS icon appears in the upper right- -/.)4/2 $%&)"
hand corner of the display, indicating that the unit
recognizes the connection to the AutoPulse Plus. /&&
0!#%2
9650-1210-01 Rev. R 3-1

Note: When the unit is turned to MONITOR or DEFIB, Prepare Paddles (if applicable)
the ECG source is set either to PADDLES (if
Remove paddles from their holders by sliding each
paddles are connected to the Multi-Function
paddle toward you, out of the paddle well. Apply a liberal
cable), or to Multi-function pads (if paddles are
amount of electrolyte gel to the electrode surface of each
not connected to the Multi-Function cable). If
paddle (or you can use electrode gel patches).
connected to the AutoPulse Plus, the APLS icon
will be displayed and PADS will be the ECG Rub the electrode surfaces together to evenly distribute
source. You can select any of the other ECG lead the applied gel.
configurations — I, II, III (also aVR, aVF, aVL, and
Apply Paddles to Chest (if applicable)
V) if the unit has been so configured and ECG
cable/electrodes are in use. Apply paddles firmly to the anterior wall of the chest.
Place the Sternum paddle to the right (patient’s right) of
Energy Select the patient’s sternum, just below the clavicle.
Observe the display and verify the selected energy is Place the Apex paddle on the chest wall, just below and
appropriate. To change the energy setting, use either to the left of the patient’s left nipple, along the anterior-
pair of up-down arrow buttons. axillary line.
#(!2'% !.!,9:%
3(/#+
%.%2'9
3%,%#4 or
STERNUM
Energy Select on Energy Select on APEX

Front Panel Sternum Paddle
Rub the paddles against the skin to maximize the

paddle-to-patient contact.
WARNING
Neonatal and pediatric defibrillator energy levels
should be set based on site-specific clinical protocols.
WARNING
The selected energy level is shown in the DEFIB • Do not permit gel to accumulate between the
XXXJ SEL. message on the display. paddle electrodes on the chest wall (gel bridge).
This could cause burns and reduce the amount of
energy delivered to the heart.
• If using defibrillator gel pads make sure that the
ECG
size of the pad is large enough to cover the entire
paddle electrode area.
DEFIB 200J SEL. The paddles may be used for ECG monitoring in
emergency situations when time does not allow for
00:01 connection of standard ECG monitoring electrodes.
Sync
Param Wave 2 ID# Alar ms On/Off
If the unit is configured to do so, it automatically sets the

energy to the pre-configured levels for Shock 1, Shock 2,
and Shock 3 at power-up and after each of the first two
shocks. The ENERGY INCREMENTED message
appears when this occurs. This function is disabled if you
manually change the energy level outside the pre-
programmed sequence and deliver a shock. See the
E Series Configuration Guide for more details.
3-2 9650-1210-01 Rev. R

Manual Defibrillation
2 Charge Defibrillator 3 Deliver SHOCK

Press the CHARGE button on the front panel (if using
MFE pads) or on the apex paddle handle (if using
WARNING
paddles). • Warn all persons in attendance of the patient to
STAND CLEAR prior to defibrillator discharge.
• Do not touch the bed, patient, or any equipment
connected to the patient during defibrillation. A
#(!2'% !.!,9:%
severe shock can result. Do not allow exposed
3(/#+ portions of the patient's body to come in contact
%.%2'9 with metal objects, such as a bed frame, as
3%,%#4
or unwanted pathways for defibrillation current may
result.
CHARGE Button on CHARGE Button on

Apex Paddle Front Panel • For MFE pad users, press and hold the SHOCK
button on the front panel until energy is delivered to
Note: If using paddles, if both SHOCK buttons on the the patient.
paddles are depressed when you press the
CHARGE button, the device does not charge and #(!2'% !.!,9:%
a RELEASE SHOCK BUTTON or other message 3(/#+

appears on the display. To increase or decrease %.%2'9
the selected energy after you press the CHARGE 3%,%#4
button, use the defibrillator energy select buttons

on either the sternum paddle or the defibrillator
front panel. • For paddle users, using your thumbs, simultaneously
press and hold both SHOCK buttons (one on each
Note: If using MFE pads, use the defibrillator energy
paddle) until energy is delivered to the patient.
select buttons on the front panel to increase or
decrease the selected energy after you press
CHARGE.
CAUTION
Changing the selected energy while the unit is
charging or charged causes the defibrillator to disarm
itself. Press the CHARGE button again to charge the
unit to the newly-selected energy level.
After charging to the selected energy, the charge

indicator on the apex paddle lights. If using MFE pads,
the SHOCK button on the front panel lights. A distinctive
CAUTION
charge ready (continuous) tone sounds and the energy
Only use thumbs to depress the SHOCK buttons.
ready DEFIB XXXJ READY message is displayed. The
Failure to do so could result in the inadvertent
defibrillator is now ready.
depression of the ENERGY SELECT buttons, causing
the defibrillator to disarm itself.
Once energy is delivered, the display simultaneously

shows XXXJ DELIVERED and DEFIB XXXJ SEL. After
approximately 5 seconds, the XXXJ DELIVERED
message disappears, and the DEFIB XXXJ SEL.
message remains to indicate the selected energy level.
Note: If the defibrillator is not discharged within
60 seconds after reaching the selected energy
level, the unit automatically disarms itself.
During the 10 seconds prior to disarming, the charge
ready tone beeps intermittently. If the 10 seconds elapse
and the unit has not discharged during this period, the
9650-1210-01 Rev. R 3-3

device disarms. The charge ready tone stops, the charge

indicator light, or the front panel SHOCK button light
goes off, and the monitor message changes to DEFIB
XXXJ SEL. Press the CHARGE button again to recharge
the unit.
Paddle Cleaning
Paddle plates and handles must be thoroughly cleaned
after each use. See “General Maintenance” on page 11-
1 for correct cleaning procedure.
Troubleshooting
If your E Series unit does not function as expected,
see“Troubleshooting Guidelines” on page 13-1.
3-4 9650-1210-01 Rev. R

SECTION 4
ADVISORY DEFIBRILLATION
When MFE Pads are used, the patient connection is considered to be defibrillation-
protected Type BF.
Advisory Defibrillation Determine Patient Condition Following Medical

Protocols
Verify:
WARNING
• Do not use the unit’s Advisory function on patients • Unconsciousness
under 8 years of age. • Absence of breathing, and
• The AutoPulse Plus is only intended for use on • Absence of pulse
adults 18 years of age or older. When using the Begin CPR following medical protocols
E Series and AutoPulse Plus as a system, this age
restriction applies to the E Series as well. Request additional assistance.
Prepare the patient and attach the MFE pads
With Advisory defibrillation, the unit analyzes the This is described in “MFE Pad Application/Connection”
patient’s ECG rhythm to determine if a shockable rhythm on page 1-9.
exists. If defibrillation is advised, you charge the
defibrillator and deliver shock treatment to the patient. If connecting to PADS through the AutoPulse Plus, refer
to the User Guide AutoPulse® Resuscitation System
Note: You cannot use external paddles to defibrillate in
Model 100 with Defibrillator Interface addendum (part
Advisory mode. You must use MFE pads for
number 9650-0720-01) for instructions on properly
shock delivery.
connecting the E Series to the AutoPulse Plus. It is
The E Series unit automatically adjusts defibrillation recommended that the user cycle through the lead
energy based on configuration settings for Shock 1, 2 setting until the APLS icon appears in the upper
and 3. In its factory default configuration, the unit delivers right-hand corner of the display, indicating that the unit
the first three shocks at 120J, 150J, and 200J. You can recognizes the connection to the AutoPulse Plus.
configure the unit to deliver shocks at other energy
levels; see the E Series Configuration Guide for more
information.
The Advisory function can only be activated when: WARNING
If the APLS icon does not appear, check that the
• MFE Pads are connected and selected as the ECG E Series and AutoPulse Plus are properly connected. If
source. the APLS icon still does not appear, or a
• MFE Pads are firmly attached to the patient. PADDLE FAULT occurs, discharge energy internally by
• The selector switch is turned to DEFIB. changing the energy selection, disconnect the
Multi-Function Cable and PADS from the AutoPulse
Plus, and connect the Multi-Function Cable directly to
WARNING the PADS.
The rhythm analysis function may not reliably identify
ventricular fibrillation in the presence of an implantable
pacemaker. Inspection of the electrocardiogram and
clinical evidence of cardiopulmonary arrest should be
the basis for any treatment of patients with implantable
pacemakers.
9650-1210-01 Rev. R 4-1

1 Select DEFIB An ANALYZING ECG message is displayed for

approximately 9 to 12 seconds while the patient’s ECG is
analyzed.
-/.)4/2 $%&)"
/&&
ECG
0!#%2
The unit displays the DEFIB 120J SEL message on the

ANALYZING ECG
monitor until you press the ANALYZE button.
00:01
Sync
Param Wave 2 ID# Alarms On/Off
ECG
Once the analysis is complete, the unit indicates whether
or not a shock is advised.
When a non-shockable rhythm is detected, the message
DEFIB 200J SEL. NO SHOCK ADV. is displayed.
00:01
Sync NO SHOCK ADV.
ECG
Energy Select
Shock 1, Shock 2, and Shock 3 are set to the default
adult settings of 120 J, 150 J, and 200 J respectively. DEFIB 200J SEL.
If medical protocols allow, you may select a different
energy level using the ENERGY SELECT buttons. The 00:01
new energy setting is displayed on the monitor. Sync
Automatic energy escalation is disabled if you manually Param Wave 2 ID# Alarms On/Off
change the energy level outside the pre-programmed
In this case, you should follow local protocols to continue
Shock 1, Shock 2, Shock 3 sequence and deliver a
CPR or other cardiopulmonary life support and re-
shock. See the “Energy Level” sections (for Shock 1,
analyze the ECG at appropriate intervals.
Shock 2, and Shock 3) of the E Series Configuration
Guide for more details. When a shockable rhythm is detected (ventricular
fibrillation or tachycardia with heart rate > 150):
2 Press ANALYZE Button • Units with the automatic charge option enabled
automatically charge the defibrillator to the
preconfigured or user selected energy setting.
WARNING
• Units with the automatic charge option disabled
• A patient must be motionless during ECG analysis.
alternately display the messages SHOCK ADVISED
Do not touch the patient during analysis. Cease all
and PRESS CHARGE. In this case, charge the
movement via stretcher or vehicle before analyzing
defibrillator by pressing the CHARGE button.
the ECG.
• When using the AutoPulse Plus, stop
compressions prior to performing ECG analysis.
Compressions may be resumed following the
analysis.
Press the ANALYZE button to begin analysis of the

patient’s ECG rhythm and to detect the presence of any
shockable rhythms.
4-2 9650-1210-01 Rev. R

Advisory Defibrillation
NO SHOCK ADV. SCE LOW

SHOCK ADVISED
ECG ECG
DEFIB 200J SEL.

DEFIB 200J SEL.
00:01
Sync
00:01 Param ID# Alarms On/Off
Sync
Param Wave 2 ID# Alarms On/Off If the patient’s SPI value is greater than the configured
SPI threshold, the unit operates as previously described
and issues the SHOCK ADVISED prompt.
The Shock Conversion Estimator (Optional)
WARNING SHOCK ADVISED SCE HIGH

ECG
Performance of the Shock Conversion Estimator has
not been demonstrated in patients under 8 years of
age or less than 55 lbs (25 kg).
The Shock Conversion Estimator is an optional

DEFIB 200J SEL.
enhancement to the E Series unit’s ECG Rhythm
Analysis Function. The Shock Conversion Estimator can 00:01
assist rescuers in maximizing the effectiveness of initial Sync
therapy for cardiac arrest victims by estimating the Param ID# Alarms On/Off
probability that the current ECG rhythm will be
successfully converted by an immediate defibrillation The E Series unit can be configured to use the Shock
shock. When the probability that a shock will be Conversion Estimator for as many as the first four ECG
successful is low, the performance of CPR may be more Rhythm Analyses after the unit is powered on. For more
beneficial to victim resuscitation efforts than shock information on configuration settings for the Shock
delivery. Conversion Estimator, refer to the E Series Configuration
Guide.
After the E Series unit has performed its analysis of a
patient’s ECG rhythm and determined that it is The Shock Predictive Index
shockable, the Shock Conversion Estimator (when
By default, the Shock Predictive Index threshold is
configured) evaluates the heart rhythm and calculates a
configured for a conversion sensitivity of greater than
value called the Shock Predictive Index (SPI). The unit
95%. This value describes the likelihood that the
then compares the patient’s SPI value to the SPI factory
patient’s shockable rhythm will not be converted to an
default threshold. If the patient’s SPI value after the first
organized rhythm by shock delivery when the SPI is
ECG Rhythm Analysis is less than this threshold, there is
below the default threshold setting. Under these
a greater than 95% probability that the shock will not
conditions, it may be advisable to continue CPR for an
convert the patient’s heart rhythm to an organized
additional period before attempting defibrillation therapy.
rhythm. Under this condition, the unit issues the NO
The Medical Director can adjust the SPI threshold to
SHOCK ADVISED prompt, indicating that the preferred
favor either shock delivery or CPR performance when
method of treatment for the patient should be CPR. The
SPI values are low. For more information on adjusting
unit can, optionally, display the decision result of the SCE
the SPI threshold, refer to the E Series Configuration
system next to the shock decision, with the message
Guide.
SHOCK ADVISED SCE HIGH or NO SHOCK ADV. SCE
LOW. Note: Refer to Appendix A for more information on the
background and clinical results of the Shock
Conversion Estimator system.
9650-1210-01 Rev. R 4-3

3 Press SHOCK Continue Patient Care

Continue patient care according to medical protocols.
WARNING Advisory Function Messages

• Warn all persons in attendance of the patient to
These messages may appear during Advisory
defibrillation:
connected to the patient during defibrillation. A • SELECT DEFIB MODE
severe shock can result. Do not allow exposed The ANALYZE button is pressed, but the unit is not in
portions of the patient's body to come in contact the DEFIB mode. Move the selector switch to DEFIB
with metal objects, such as a bed frame, as to enable the defibrillator and Advisory capability.
unwanted pathways for defibrillation current may • SELECT PADS
result.
The ANALYZE button is pressed and the device is
being operated in any lead configuration other than
PADS. Press LEAD button until PADS is selected.
Once the unit has charged to the selected energy, the • DISABLE SYNC
SHOCK button illuminates, and the PRESS SHOCK The ANALYZE button is pressed and the device is in
message is displayed. Simultaneously, the monitor DEFIB mode with SYNC on. Turn off SYNC mode by
displays the energy level to which the defibrillator has pressing the SYNC softkey. Press the ANALYZE
charged in the message DEFIB XXXJ READY. button again to initiate rhythm analysis on the patient.
Warning Messages
PRESS SHOCK Warning messages prompt the operator to check the
ECG patient, the unit, the electrodes and/or connections.
WARNING
The ECG Rhythm Analysis function does not warn the
DEFIB 200J READY operator of patient asystole, as it is not a shockable
rhythm.
00:01
Sync
These warnings may appear during Advisory
defibrillation:
A continuous tone sounds for 50 seconds, followed by • NOISY ECG / RETRY ANALYSIS
an intermittent beeping for 10 seconds. The shock must Displayed for 5 seconds when the unit detects a
be delivered within this 60 second interval, or the noisy ECG signal. Check and adjust electrode
defibrillator disarms itself. placement and cable connections to help eliminate
Press and hold the illuminated SHOCK button on the the noise source. Press the ANALYZE button again
front panel until energy is delivered to the patient. An to begin ECG analysis.
XXXJ DELIVERED message appears on the display for • ECG TOO LARGE / RETRY ANALYSIS
approximately 5 seconds. ECG signal is too large for proper rhythm analysis.
Observe the patient or ECG response to be certain that Press the ANALYZE button again to begin ECG
the shock has been delivered. analysis.
• CHECK PATIENT
After the energy is delivered to the patient, the display
returns to DEFIB XXX J SEL. The unit detected a shockable rhythm during
continuous background ECG analysis without
Repeat Analysis initiating an analysis (i.e., Smart Alarms™). The
Press the ANALYZE button to restart an ECG analysis. prompt is given when the heart rate alarms are
Determine if additional shocks are required. enabled and the unit detects a shockable rhythm or if
the rhythm goes from non-shockable to shockable.
Note: Reanalysis of the ECG rhythm, either manually or The prompt persists as long as a shockable rhythm is
automatically (see E Series Configuration Guide), being detected. Press the ANALYZE button to begin
is inhibited for 3 seconds after a shock. ECG analysis.
Note: The CHECK PATIENT analysis function operates
continuously when heart rate alarms are enabled
4-4 9650-1210-01 Rev. R

Advisory Defibrillation
and does not require depression of the ANALYZE

button for operation.
• CHECK PADS / POOR PAD CONTACT
The MFE Pads are no longer properly attached to the
patient or the cable connections have become loose.
Check that the MFE Pads are making good contact
with the patient’s skin and that the cables are all
securely connected. This voice prompt is issued only
if MFE pads were previously connected to the patient.
Troubleshooting
If your E Series unit does not function as expected, see
the Defibrillator Troubleshooting section starting on
page 13-5.
9650-1210-01 Rev. R 4-5


SECTION 5
AUTOMATED EXTERNAL DEFIBRILLATOR
(AED) OPERATION
MFE Pads are a defibrillation-protected Type BF patient connection.
The AED unit has two modes of operation: This analysis normally consists of three consecutive
Semiautomatic or Manual. This section describes the 3-second ECG rhythm analyses. If at least two of the
recommended method for analysis and defibrillation for three analyses determine that the patient has a
the AED unit in Semiautomatic mode. However, if your shockable rhythm, the unit will automatically charge to
local protocol requires a different procedure, follow that the preconfigured energy level and prompt the operator
protocol.
to shock the patient. If two or more of the three 3-second
ECG analyses do not detect a shockable rhythm, the unit
WARNING will alert the operator that no shock is advised. A fourth
• Do not use the unit’s AED function on patients 3-second interval will be analyzed if any of the first three
under 8 years of age. is noisy.
• The AutoPulse Plus is only intended for use on
adults 18 years of age or older. When using the Following each shock, the continuous analysis function
E Series and AutoPulse Plus as a system, this age resumes operation and displays and announces a
restriction applies to the E Series as well. CHECK PATIENT prompt if a shockable rhythm is
• Heart rate alarms are non-operational when the detected. (Continuous analysis runs on a sliding
AED unit is in semi-automatic mode. 12 second window of ECG data, producing a result every
3 seconds. If three out of four 3-second segments are
shockable, the CHECK PATIENT message is issued.)
This section also describes how to switch the AED unit to
Manual mode (see “AED Manual Mode Operation” on The CHECK PATIENT display and voice prompt are
page 5-5). inhibited for 70 seconds (subject to the length of the CPR
interval and whether or not CHECK PULSE is displayed)
The AED unit is capable of analyzing a patient’s ECG following the completion of a user activated analysis or
rhythm in two different ways: discharge.
• The always active mode in the background of the
Semiautomatic mode (continuous analysis) when
MFE Pads or ECG cable and electrodes are in use.
WARNING
• The user activated mode, initiated by pressing the The rhythm analysis function may not reliably identify
ANALYZE button. ventricular fibrillation in the presence of an implantable
pacemaker. Inspection of the electrocardiogram and
User activated analysis can be performed only when:
clinical evidence of cardiopulmonary arrest should be
• MFE Pads are connected. the basis for any treatment of patients with implantable
• MFE Pads are firmly attached to the patient to reduce pacemakers.
any electrode noise or artifact.
• Selector switch is turned to ON.
Note: The AED unit uses the Shock Conversion
In Semiautomatic mode, pressing the ANALYZE button
Estimator function. See page 4-3 for detailed
begins an analysis of the patient’s ECG in order to
information on this function.
determine if a shockable rhythm is present.
9650-1210-01 Rev. R 5-1

AED Semiautomatic Operation If you have not yet attached MFE pads or ECG
electrodes to the patient and connected to the unit, an
Before you begin: ATTACH PADS prompt is displayed and announced.
• Determine the patient’s condition following medical
protocols and by verifying: ATTACH PADS
– Unconsciousness ECG
– Absence of breathing, and
– Absence of pulse 120J SEL
• If appropriate, begin CPR following medical protocol, ATTACH
and request additional assistance. 00:01 PADS
• Prepare the patient and attach the MFE pads as Manual
Param ID#
Mode
described in “MFE Pad Application/Connection” on
page 1-9.
Energy Select
If connecting to PADS through the AutoPulse Plus, refer
Preconfigured energy levels for Shock 1, Shock 2, and
to the User Guide AutoPulse® Resuscitation System Shock 3 are set to 120, 150, and 200 Joules
Model 100 with Defibrillator Interface addendum (part respectively. If medical protocols allow, and you have
number 9650-0720-01) for instructions on properly configured a different energy level, you may select it by
connecting the E Series to the AutoPulse Plus. It is using the ENERGY SELECT arrow buttons. The new
recommended that the user cycle through the lead energy setting is displayed on the monitor.
setting until the APLS icon appears in the upper
right-hand corner of the display, indicating that the unit 2 Press ANALYZE Button
recognizes the connection to the AutoPulse Plus.
WARNING WARNING
If the APLS icon does not appear, check that the • Do not use the unit in Semiautomatic mode during
E Series and AutoPulse Plus are properly connected. If patient movement. A patient must be motionless
the APLS icon still does not appear, or a during ECG analysis. Do not touch the patient
PADDLE FAULT occurs, discharge energy internally by during analysis. Cease all movement via stretcher
changing the energy selection, disconnect the or vehicle before analyzing the ECG. If using the
Multi-Function Cable and PADS from the AutoPulse device in an emergency vehicle, bring the vehicle
Plus, and connect the Multi-Function Cable directly to to a halt before using in Semiautomatic mode.
the PADS. • When using the AutoPulse Plus, stop
compressions prior to performing ECG analysis.
Compressions may be resumed following the
1 Prepare the unit for defibrillation. analysis.
Turn the unit to ON. Press the ANALYZE button to begin analysis of the
patient’s ECG rhythm. The device announces and

/.
displays a STAND CLEAR prompt.
An ANALYZING ECG message is then displayed for up
/&& to 12 seconds while the patient’s ECG is analyzed.
0!#%2
Note: If MFE pads are not properly attached to the
patient, a CHECK PADS message is displayed
and analysis is inhibited. Check the MFE pads for
The unit beeps 4 times to indicate that it has passed the proper application.
power-on self-test. If the audio recorder is present, the
unit begins recording audio data immediately. STAND CLEAR
ECG
ANALYZING ECG
00:09 STAND
Manual
Mode Param ID# CLEAR
Once the analysis is complete, the unit indicates whether

or not a shock is advised.
5-2 9650-1210-01 Rev. R

Automated External Defibrillator (AED) Operation
When a non-shockable rhythm is detected, the unit

displays a NO SHOCK ADV. message.
3 Press SHOCK
WARNING
NO SHOCK ADV. • Warn all persons in attendance of the patient to
ECG
connected to the patient during defibrillation. A
120J SEL. severe shock can result. Do not allow exposed
NO
SHOCK portions of the patient's body to come in contact
00:15
Manual ADVISED with metal objects, such as a bed frame. Unwanted
Mode Param ID# pathways for defibrillation current may result.
In this case, immediately check pulse and breathing and
resume other treatment per protocol. Press and hold the illuminated SHOCK button on the
front panel until energy is delivered to the patient.
If the patient’s rhythm is shockable, the unit displays a
SHOCK ADVISED message. Observe the patient or ECG response to be certain that
the shock has been delivered.
After the energy is delivered to the patient, the display
SHOCK ADVISED returns to XXX J SEL. SHOCKS: 1, indicating the
ECG number of shocks administered to the patient.
CHARGING 76J
ECG
00:15
Manual
Mode Param ID#
150J SEL. SHOCKS: 1
In this case, the defibrillator begins charging to the pre- 148J Delivered
configured energy setting and displays a CHARGING 00:34
message. Manual
Mode Param ID#
When charging is complete, the monitor displays the
energy level to which the defibrillator is charged in the Repeat Analysis
XXXJ READY message. The SHOCK button illuminates Press the ANALYZE button to restart an ECG analysis
and the PRESS SHOCK prompt is announced and and to determine if additional shocks are required.
displayed.
Note: Manual or automatic reanalysis of the ECG
Note: Rhythm analysis does not continue after the rhythm is inhibited for 3 seconds after a shock.
defibrillator is charged and ready once a decision
to shock has been made. The E Series will not Continue Patient Care
automatically disarm the defibrillator if the Continue patient care according to medical protocols.
patient’s rhythm reverts to a non-shockable
rhythm before the shock has been delivered. Operating Messages
The unit uses both audio and visual prompts to convey
PRESS SHOCK critical information. The following information describes
ECG the unit’s default message configuration. If your device
has been custom configured, some of the information
may be different.
120J READY There are 9 voice prompts used in Semiautomatic mode.
PRESS These prompts are accompanied by a prompt displayed
00:29
Manual
SHOCK on the monitor. The voice prompts are given only once,
Mode Param ID#
but the monitor continues to display the prompt until you
take new action or the device status changes.
A continuous tone sounds for 10 seconds, followed by an
intermittent beeping for 5 seconds. You must deliver the The unit also provides a beeper tone to indicate unit
shock within this 15 second interval or the defibrillator status. Four beeps immediately after turning the unit on
disarms itself. signifies the self diagnostics are complete and the unit is
9650-1210-01 Rev. R 5-3

ready for operation. Additional tone signals are • ECG TOO LARGE/RETRY ANALYSIS
described below. These messages appear when the ECG signal is too
The messages that appear on the monitor depend upon large for proper rhythm analysis. Press the
the function the unit is performing, the mode selected, ANALYZE button again to begin ECG analysis.
and the ECG information from the patient. • ANALYSIS HALTED
The unit alternately displays two different messages in This message appears when the unit has detected a
the same field of the display when two conditions are problem during ECG analysis. Check connections
detected at the same time. For example, a LOW and press the ANALYZE button again.
BATTERY message may alternately display on the same
line of the monitor as the CHECK PADS prompt. • CHARGING XXXJ
This message appears when ECG analysis is still in
The upper portion of the display indicates operator
progress and a potentially shockable rhythm has
prompts and error messages. The center portion of the
been detected. The current charge level and a
display indicates approximately 4 seconds of ECG trace.
message that the unit is charging are displayed.
The lower portion of the display indicates the energy
levels selected, the number of shocks delivered during • SHOCK ADVISED/CHARGING XXXJ
the incident, softkey function labels, and the elapsed These messages appear when ECG analysis has
time (if enabled). Additional unit status information is determined that a shockable rhythm exists and
also displayed on the monitor. defibrillation is advised. The selected charge level
When elapsed time is enabled, this feature indicates the has not yet been reached. The current charge level
elapsed time since the unit was first turned on. It is and a message that the unit is charging are
displayed in the lower left corner. The elapsed time is displayed.
displayed in MM:SS format up to 99:59. If the unit is on
• SHOCK ADVISED/XXXJ READY
for over 100 minutes, the elapsed time rolls over to 0.
The elapsed time is maintained for up to 10 seconds This message appears when ECG analysis has
after power down. This gives you adequate time to determined that a shockable ECG rhythm is present,
change the unit’s battery without resetting the elapsed the unit has charged, and the selected energy is
time. ready to be delivered.
Audio and Display Messages • PRESS SHOCK*

This prompt appears when ECG analysis has
The following messages can occur during
determined that a shock is advised and the selected
Semiautomatic operation to guide you through the
energy is ready to be delivered.
cardiac event.
Note: Messages with an asterisk (*) are accompanied • RELEASE SHOCK
by a voice prompt. This message appears when the SHOCK button is
pressed during charging (before the DEFIB XXX J
• ATTACH PADS* READY message). The unit beeps when this
This prompt appears if the unit is powered on without message appears. If the SHOCK button remains
MFE Pads or ECG leads attached. depressed for 15 seconds after the ready tone
• PRESS ANALYZE* begins, the unit disarms itself. If the SHOCK button is
This prompt appears under the following conditions: released before 15 seconds has elapsed, the PRESS
• After the unit is charged, but no shock was SHOCK prompt appears and the shock can be
delivered. delivered.
• 70 seconds (subject to the length of the CPR • SHOCKS: XX
interval and whether or not CHECK PULSE is This message indicates the number of shocks that
displayed) after completion of an analysis with a have been delivered by the unit since power on. This
NO SHOCK ADVISED outcome, if the unit is value is reset to 0 after the unit has been off for more
configured to auto analyze 3 times. than 10 seconds. (This 10 second delay allows
• 70 seconds (subject to the length of the CPR replacing a battery without resetting the shock count.)
interval and whether or not CHECK PULSE is
displayed) after delivery of the third shock in three- • NO SHOCK ADVISED*
analyses sequence, if the unit is configured to This message appears and continues for 10 seconds
auto analyze 3 times. when ECG analysis determines that a non-shockable
rhythm is detected following completion of the
• ANALYZING ECG/STAND CLEAR*
analysis. Press the ANALYZE button to start another
These messages appear after pressing the ECG analysis
ANALYZE button. They indicate that an active ECG • CHECK PULSE*
analysis is in progress.
5-4 9650-1210-01 Rev. R

Automated External Defibrillator (AED) Operation
This prompt appears when the unit has detected a have entered the access code correctly and the unit
non-shockable rhythm. Check the patient’s pulse. enters Manual mode.
• IF NO PULSE, PERFORM CPR* If you press the Return to Auto softkey, the unit returns
If you cannot detect a pulse, begin CPR protocols. to the Semiautomatic mode of operation.
• CHECK PADS*
This prompt appears when MFE pads or the MFC CONFIRM MANUAL MODE
cable has become disconnected from the patient.
• CHECK PATIENT* ECG
This message appears when background ECG

analysis has detected a shockable ECG rhythm.
Press ANALYZE to analyze ECG and, if needed,
120J SEL.
begin charging. 00:08
• MONITOR
Confirm
This message appears when the ECG cable is
connected to its input connector, attached to the If you see the screen above, the access code is not
patient and the Multi-Function cable is not in use. The configured. Press the Confirm softkey to enter the
unit selects lead II and sets the ECG size Manual mode of operation. You must press the Confirm
automatically (you cannot change the Lead and ECG softkey within 5 seconds, or the unit reverts back to
size). Semiautomatic operation.
For information on operating in Manual mode, refer to:
AED Manual Mode Operation
• “Manual Defibrillation” on page 3-1
To enter the Manual mode of operation, press the • “Advisory Defibrillation” on page 4-1
Manual Mode softkey on the front panel of the unit. • “NonInvasive Temporary Pacing (Pacer Version
Only)” on page 9-1
• “ECG Monitoring” on page 10-1
Troubleshooting
ECG
the “Troubleshooting Guidelines” on page 13-1.
120J SEL.
00:01
Manual
Mode Param ID#
Based on whether or not the device has been configured

with an access code, one of the following two screens is
displayed.
ENTER ACCESS CODE

ECG
00:03 0 0 0
Return
0 1 2 3 to Auto
If you see the screen above, you must enter a three-digit

access code to enter Manual mode. Press the individual
softkey corresponding to the digit to be entered (each
digit entered must be between 0 and 3). The highlight
automatically moves to the next space. Repeat until you
9650-1210-01 Rev. R 5-5


SECTION 6
SYNCHRONIZED CARDIOVERSION
Paddles are a defibrillation-protected Type BF patient connection.
WARNING
• Only skilled personnel trained in ACLS (Advanced Cardiac Life Support) and familiar with equipment operation
should perform synchronized cardioversion. The precise cardiac arrhythmia must be determined before
attempting defibrillation.
• Prior to attempting synchronized cardioversion, ensure that the ECG signal quality is sufficient to minimize risk
of synchronizing on artifact.
• Synchronized cardioversion is disabled when the E Series unit is connected to the AutoPulse Plus and the
AutoPulse Plus is compressing.
Certain arrhythmias, such as ventricular tachycardia • ECG electrodes (recommended for ECG source) as
(VT), atrial fibrillation, and atrial flutter, require described in “ECG Monitoring” on page 10-1.
synchronizing the defibrillator discharge with the • MFE pads described in “MFE Pad Application/
ECG R-wave to avoid the induction of ventricular Connection” on page 1-9.
fibrillation. In this case, a synchronizing circuit within the A standard ECG cable and ECG electrodes are
instrument detects the patient’s R-waves. When the recommended for monitoring during cardioversion.
SHOCK buttons are pressed and held, the unit You can use MFE Pads as an ECG source; signal
discharges with the next detected R-wave, thus avoiding quality is equal to that of standard leads except
the vulnerable T-wave segment of the cardiac cycle. immediately following a discharge when there may be
When SYNC mode is turned on, the unit places markers more noise due to muscle tremors, especially if a pad
above the ECG trace to indicate the points in the cardiac is not in complete contact with the skin.
cycle where discharge will occur. The sync markers • Paddles as described in “Emergency Defibrillation
appear as arrows () above the ECG trace. Procedure with Paddles or MFE Pads” on page 3-1.
The synchronized cardioversion procedure for MFE Note, however, that synchronized discharge with
Pads is identical to that for paddles with the exception of PADDLES as an ECG source is discouraged since
the SHOCK button location. artifacts induced by moving the paddles may
resemble an R-wave and trigger defibrillator
Synchronized Cardioversion discharge at the wrong time.
Standard ECG leads are recommended during
Determine patient condition and provide care
cardioversion since they provide signal quality that is
following medical protocols.
typically superior to that of paddles.
Prepare Patient Note: An ECG LEAD OFF condition does prevent
Remove all clothing covering the patient’s chest. Dry synchronized discharge if leads are selected as
chest if necessary. If the patient has excessive chest the ECG source. It does not, however, prevent
hair, clip it to ensure proper adhesion of electrodes. the use of the defibrillator; it simply prevents use
in a synchronized manner.
Attach the following to the patient as appropriate:
9650-1210-01 Rev. R 6-1

Turn Selector Switch to MONITOR Press the SYNC softkey again to reactivate SYNC
mode. Changing the selected energy does not turn off
Sync mode.
-/.)4/2 $%&)" You can configure the unit to stay in Sync mode after
defibrillation if desired.
/&&
2 Charge Defibrillator
0!#%2
Press the CHARGE button on the front panel or on the
apex paddle handle (if paddles are used).
Press the LEAD button to select the desired ECG lead.
The lead you select is then displayed at the top of the
screen. #(!2'% !.!,9:%
1 Select DEFIB 3(/#+
%.%2'9
Turn the selector switch to DEFIB, then select the 3%,%#4
desired energy level using the up/down arrows on the or

front panel or sternum paddle (if being used).
#(!2'% !.!,9:% CAUTION

-/.)4/2 $%&)"
Changing the selected energy while the unit is
3(/#+
charging or charged will cause the defibrillator to
/&& and %.%2'9
3%,%#4 disarm itself. Press the CHARGE button again to
0!#%2
charge the unit.
To abort charging and increase or decrease the selected

energy after you press the CHARGE button, use the
Press SYNC softkey ENERGY SELECT buttons on either the sternum paddle
The selected energy level is displayed on the monitor. (if paddles are used) or defibrillator front panel. Press the
CHARGE button again to charge the unit.
A SYNC marker () appears on the monitor above each
detected R-wave to indicate where discharge will occur. After charging to the selected energy, the SHOCK button
on the front panel lights. If paddles are used, the charge
Verify that markers are clearly visible on the monitor and indicator on the apex paddle illuminates. A distinctive
their location is appropriate and consistent from beat to audible tone sounds and the energy ready SYNC XXXJ
beat. If necessary, use the LEAD button and SIZE button READY message is displayed.
to establish settings that yield the best display.
The defibrillator is now ready.
• A SYNC XXXJ SEL. message appears on the
display. If the DEFIB XXXJ SEL. message appears,
press the SYNC softkey. Two quick beeps sound
3 Deliver SHOCK
when the SYNC softkey is pushed.
WARNING
• Warn all persons in attendance of the patient to
ECG
• Verify that no one is in contact with the patient,
monitoring cable or leads, bed rails, or any other
potential current pathways.
SYNC 200J SEL.
00:01 Verify that the ECG waveform is stable and that a marker
Sync appears only with each R-wave.
Param Wave 2 ID# Alar ms On/Off
Press and hold the illuminated, front panel SHOCK
Unless otherwise configured, Sync mode is turned off button or, if paddles are used, simultaneously press and
automatically after each shock or if the selector switch hold both SHOCK buttons (one on each paddle) until
has been moved to PACER or OFF. energy is delivered to the patient. The defibrillator
discharges with the next detected R-wave.
6-2 9650-1210-01 Rev. R

Synchronized Cardioversion
Once energy is delivered, the display simultaneously

shows the XXXJ DELIVERED and DEFIB XXXJ SEL.
messages. After approximately 5 seconds the XXXJ
DELIVERED message disappears, and the DEFIB XXXJ
SEL. message remains to indicate the selected energy
level.
If additional countershocks are necessary, re-adjust the
energy level as necessary, press the SYNC softkey and
repeat. Note the SYNC XXXJ SEL. message must be
displayed prior to pressing the CHARGE button.
If it is necessary to disarm the charged defibrillator (if
countershock is not needed), turn the selector switch to
MONITOR or change the selected energy level. Any
stored energy is discharged internally by the defibrillator.
If the ANALYZE button is pressed while the unit is in
SYNC mode, the unit displays DISABLE SYNC and
disallows ECG rhythm analysis until the unit is taken out
of SYNC mode.
If the defibrillator is not discharged within 60 seconds
after reaching the selected energy level, it automatically
disarms itself. During the ten seconds prior to this
internal disarm, the charge ready tone beeps
intermittently. The charge ready tone then stops and the
defibrillator remains in SYNC mode.
Troubleshooting
the Defibrillator Troubleshooting section starting on
page 13-5.
9650-1210-01 Rev. R 6-3


SECTION 7
REAL CPR HELP
The CPR sensor is defibrillation-proof Type BF equipment.
WARNING
• ®
The Real CPR Help function is not intended for use on patients under 8 years of age.
• The CPRD-to-MFC connector is intended for use with the E Series, or other ZOLL defibrillators where indicated.
• Real CPR Help is disabled when using CPR-D-padz through an AutoPulse Plus.
When used with CPR-D-padz, the E Series unit can

provide rescuers with feedback about the quality of CPR
they are delivering to their patients. The way in which
feedback is provided varies with respect to the
operational mode and user configuration, but is derived
from compression rate and depth measurement. The
CPR Dashboard™ contains additional features such as
the Compression Release Bar.
When applied according to package instructions, ZOLL
CPR-D-padz provide a chest compression sensor that is
located between the rescuer's hands and the patient's
lower sternum. This sensor monitors the rate and depth
of chest compressions and sends this information to the Ensure that the CPR-D-padz are making good contact
E Series unit for processing and display. with the patient’s skin. If the pads are not making good
The E Series defibrillator uses this information to provide contact, the messages CHECK PADS and POOR PAD
feedback to the rescuer in one or more of the following CONTACT will be displayed, and energy will not be
forms: delivered. If a short circuit exists between the pads, the
message DEFIB PAD SHORT will be displayed.
• CPR Index™
• CPR Idle Time Display Note: If the E Series displays the message CABLE
• CPR Rate Metronome FAULT or PADDLE FAULT, energy will not be
• Voice prompts delivered. Check the connection to the
CPRD-to-MFC connector. If the message does
• Chest Compressions Bar Graph
not clear, disconnect the CPRD-to-MFC
• Informational Messages
connector and connect the cable directly to the
CPR-D-padz. If the fault clears, CPR feedback
Prepare the Patient and Attach the
will not be available, but the device will be able to
CPRD-to-MFC Connector deliver energy.
Prepare the patient as described on page 1-9. Attach the
Real CPR Help Field
CPR-D-padz to the patient according to the instructions
on the electrode packaging. Connect the Multifunction Whenever CPR-D-padz are connected to the E Series
cable to the narrow end of the CPRD-to-MFC connector defibrillator and the CPR Dashboard is configured off,
(if not already connected). Connect the CPR-D-padz to the unit illuminates the Real CPR Help field in the upper
the wide end of the CPRD-to-MFC connector. right side of the display. This field includes the CPR
9650-1210-01 Rev. R 7-1

compression indicators and CPR idle time described in compressions have been delivered for more than 20
the next sections. minutes, dashes (---) will be displayed in this time field.
CPR Compressions Indicator
CPR Idle Time
This rectangular bar shaped figure provides a quick,
overall indicator of how well the rescuer's combined rate
and depth of chest compressions match the AHA/ERC
recommendations for adult CPR. NIBP --- SpO2% ECG II x2 120
* 24
* --- --- PADS
Before chest compressions begin (and after each
shock), the Chest Compression Indicator is displayed as CO2 --- m
m Hg --- RR 01:13 IDLE
a hollow outline. This indicator starts to fill with color as ECG
compressions begin (filling from left to right), and
CPR
becomes fully filled when consistent chest compression
depth exceeding 1.75 or 2.0 inches (depending on the
configuration) and rate exceeding 90 compressions per
minute (cpm) are achieved simultaneously. Should the
chest compression rate or depth begin to fall below the 00:17
Sync
AHA/ERC recommended levels, the indicator will only Param Wave 2 12 Lead Alarms On/Off
partially fill to indicate the need for more vigorous efforts.
Following the cessation of compressions, the indicator’s
fill level gradually decreases until a hollow outline is FULLY RELEASE Prompt
displayed after a short period of time. The E Series unit can be configured to display the text
When complete filling of the CPR Compression Indicator prompt, FULLY RELEASE, which instructs rescuers to lift
has not been achieved due to diminished compression (fully release) their hands from the patient’s chest after
rate or depth, the E Series will display the letter R for compressions to allow full recoil.
Rate and/or the letter D for depth to assist the rescuer in By default, the FULLY RELEASE text prompt is not
determining whether chest compression rate or depth enabled.
should be increased. When an appropriate rate and
depth have been achieved, these letters will disappear CPR Voice Prompts
from the display field.
The E Series can be configured to issue voice prompts
related to the depth of chest compressions as feedback
NIBP --- SpO2% ECG II x2 157
* 24 to rescuers performing CPR. Two voice prompts are
* --- --- available for this purpose:
CO2 --- m
m Hg --- RR D • Push Harder
ECG • Good Compressions
When chest compressions are detected but their depth is
CPR consistently less than 1.5 or 2 inches (3.8 or 5 cm)
depending on the configuration, the defibrillator will
periodically issue the prompt “Push Harder”. If the
rescuer responds by increasing compression depth on a
00:17
Sync consistent basis to more than 1.5 or 2 inches (3.8 or
Param Wave 2 12 Lead Alarms On/Off
5 cm), depending on the configuration, the unit will issue
a “Good Compressions” prompt.
CPR Idle Time Display See the E Series Configuration Guide for information on
This display indicates the elapsed time in minutes and enabling/disabling CPR voice prompts.
seconds since the last detected chest compression. Compressions Bar Graph
When compressions are being delivered at a rate of 11
cpm or higher, the idle time will not be displayed. Ten The E Series can display a CPR compression bar graph
seconds following the cessation of compressions, the computed from the CPR sensor signals. This bar graph,
idle time will be displayed in place of the Compression representing depth of compression, is presented on a
Indicator bar. As soon as a new compression is displacement scale with a reference marker at 1.5 or
detected, the idle time is removed from the screen. If no 2.0 inches, depending on the configuration. The E Series
displays a minimum of 12 seconds of compression data.
7-2 9650-1210-01 Rev. R

Real CPR Help
Displaying the CPR Compressions When an appropriate rate and depth are achieved, these
Bar Graph labels are not highlighted.
To manually display the CPR compression bar graph, NIBP --- SpO2% ECG II x2 0
press the Wave 2 softkey until the bar graph is displayed. * mmHg
24
* --- ---
CPR Dashboard CO2 40 mm Hg 13 RR
Whenever CPR-D-padz or CPR stat-padz are connected

to the E Series unit and the CPR Dashboard is
configured on, the unit illuminates the CPR Dashboard, CPR
Depth Rate
replacing the right half of the Wave 2 display area. You 2.2 100
can use the Wave 2 softkey to select other data for Wave in
Release PPI
2, including full width displays of the waveforms.

02:17
The Dashboard includes the indicators described in the Param Wave 2 ID# Alarms 12 Lead
following sections.
CPR Feedback Indicators and CPR Index
CPR Idle Time Display
The diamond-shaped figure provides a quick, overall
indicator of how well the rescuer's combined rate and This display indicates the elapsed time in minutes and
depth of chest compressions match the AHA/ERC seconds since the last detected chest compression.
recommendations for adult CPR. When compressions are being delivered at a rate of 35
cpm or higher, the idle time is not displayed. The idle
Before chest compressions begin (and after each shock), time is displayed in place of the Rate and Depth values
the Chest Compression Indicator appears as a hollow after compressions have ceased for ten seconds. As
outline. This indicator starts to fill with color as soon as new compressions are detected, the idle time is
compressions begin (filling from the center out), and removed from the screen.
becomes filled when consistent chest compression
depths exceed 1.5 or 2 inches and the compression rate If no compressions have been delivered for more than 20
exceeds 90 compressions per minute (cpm) minutes, dashes (---) will be displayed in this time field.
simultaneously. Should the chest compression rate or
depth begin to fall below the AHA/ERC recommended NIBP --- SpO2% ECG II x2 120
* 24
levels, the indicator will only partially fill to indicate the * --- --- PADS
need for more vigorous efforts. When compressions CO2 --- m
m Hg --- RR
cease, the indicator’s fill level gradually decreases until a
ECG
hollow outline appears.
The Compression Release Bar shows the release of the 50
chest compression by the rescuer. When the release of IDLE

the chest is properly administered, the bar will fill all the 02:15
way to the top. 0
00:17
CPR Rate and Depth Display Sync
Param Wave 2 12 Lead Alarms On/Off
If the CPR Dashboard is configured On and the CPR Idle
Time is not displayed, the Rate and Depth values will be
displayed in the CPR Dashboard. The values will be
highlighted and displayed in red if they are below the CPR Idle Time
appropriate values.
9650-1210-01 Rev. R 7-3


SECTION 8
SEE-THRU CPR
WARNING
• The See-Thru CPR filter works only when the E Series defibrillator is monitoring CPR in Manual mode.
• The See-Thru CPR filter stops if:
— Diagnostic bandwidth mode is active.
— The unit is in pace mode.
— Patient impedance is invalid.
— CPR-D-padz electrodes are no longer detected.
• The See-Thru CPR filter will not remove all CPR artifact. Always stop CPR to verify the patient’s ECG rhythm
before making treatment decisions.
• The See-Thru CPR filter does not operate during ECG rhythm analysis. Always stop chest compressions during
ECG rhythm analysis to avoid incorrect results caused by the presence of CPR artifact.
• The See-Thru CPR filter does not operate when pads are connected through an AutoPulse Plus.
See-Thru CPR® enables the rescuer to see a close See-Thru CPR filtering continues as long as the
approximation of the patient’s underlying ECG rhythm CPR-D-padz electrodes detect compressions and patient
while performing CPR. See-Thru CPR is available if the impedance is valid. When no compressions are detected
E Series is monitoring CPR. or one of the conditions noted above occurs, See-Thru
CPR filtering stops, unfiltered ECG signals are displayed,
Chest compressions introduce CPR artifact into the ECG and the unit changes the label on the second waveform
signal. See-Thru CPR uses a filter that relies on the to “ECG.” When compressions resume, filtering
correlation between CPR compressions, as detected by automatically restarts after 3 to 6 chest compressions.
the ZOLL CPR-D-padz electrodes, and the CPR artifact
to remove much, but not all, of the artifact from the ECG If configured to display the CPR Dashboard, the E Series
signal. Under some conditions, residual noise after unit can also be configured to display the filtered ECG in
filtering can obscure the ECG rhythm, requiring the Trace1.
rescuer to stop CPR to assess the ECG. For example, in Examples
the case of asystole or low amplitude PEA, the residual
artifact seen after filtering may look like fine ventricular The following examples show the effects of See-Thru
fibrillation. CPR filtering on ECG signals contaminated with CPR
artifacts.
Because the filtered ECG signal may contain residual
chest compression and/or filtering artifacts, a rescuer Each example includes:
should always follow the standard procedure of stopping • ECG signal with CPR artifact.
CPR to assess the patient’s ECG rhythm before
• ECG signal after the See-Thru CPR filter has
determining treatment.
removed CPR artifact.
Using See-Thru CPR • Indication of the period during which See-Thru CPR
is active.
To use See-Thru CPR • CPR signal to show when CPR activity occurred.
• The E Series unit must be monitoring CPR.
• CPR-D-padz electrodes must be attached to the unit.
When a rescue begins, an E Series unit automatically
starts filtering the CPR artifact after detecting the first 3 to
6 compressions. The filtered ECG, with the label
“FILT ECG,” may be displayed on the second waveform
(by pressing the Wave 2 softkey).
9650-1210-01 Rev. R 8-1

The following figure shows a patient in Fine VF. It is difficult for a rescuer to discern this rhythm during CPR
compressions. When the CPR filter turns on, the Fine VF rhythm becomes more obvious.
FineVF
Raw ECG Raw ECG
•
| Filter ON
Filtered ECG Filtered ECG
CPR CPR
0:00 0:12
FineVF
Raw ECG Raw ECG
• •
| Filter OFF | Filter ON
CPR CPR
0:12 0:24
FineVF
Raw ECG Raw ECG
•
| Filter OFF
CPR CPR
0:24 0:36
12.5 mm/sec, 5 mm/mV
8-2 9650-1210-01 Rev. R

See-Thru CPR
The following figure shows a patient in VF, which, during compressions, is slightly more difficult to discern. When
viewing this ECG, it is possible to view the underlying rhythm as the filter is able to reject all of the CPR artifact.
CoarseVF
Raw ECG Raw ECG
CPR CPR
0:00 0:12
CoarseVF
Raw ECG Raw ECG
•
| Filter ON
CPR CPR
0:12 0:24
CoarseVF
Raw ECG Raw ECG
•
| Filter OFF
CPR CPR
0:24 0:36
9650-1210-01 Rev. R 8-3

The following figure shows a patient in PEA, which could easily be mistaken for Fine VF because enough of the
compression artifact leaks through to distort this signal. When the CPR filter turns on, the PEA is still not obvious
because of the left over ripples from the CPR signal. About 14 seconds into this chart, the rhythm changes to asystole,
which could easily be mistaken for coarse VF. When the CPR filter turns on, the CPR compression ripples are still
obvious, making the rhythm look like Fine VF.
Asystole
Raw ECG Raw ECG
•
| Filter ON
CPR CPR
0:00 0:12
Asystole
Raw ECG Raw ECG
• •
CPR CPR
0:12 0:24
Asystole
Raw ECG Raw ECG
•
| Filter OFF
CPR CPR
0:24 0:36
8-4 9650-1210-01 Rev. R

See-Thru CPR
The following figure shows a patient with an organized rhythm where See-Thru CPR effectively filters out artifact
created by CPR.
SinusRhythm
Raw ECG Raw ECG
•
| Filter ON
CPR CPR
0:00 0:12
SinusRhythm
Raw ECG Raw ECG
• •
CPR CPR
0:12 0:24
SinusRhythm
Raw ECG Raw ECG
•
| Filter OFF
CPR CPR
0:24 0:36
9650-1210-01 Rev. R 8-5


SECTION 9
NONINVASIVE TEMPORARY PACING
(PACER VERSION ONLY)
Paddles are a defibrillation-protected Type BF patient connection.
WARNING
• To avoid risk of electrical shock, do not touch the gelled area of the MFE Pads while pacing.
• MFE Pads should be replaced after 8 hours of continuous pacing (2 hours for Radiolucent stat-padz) to ensure
maximum patient benefit.
• Pacing with CPR-D-padz is not recommended. For the most effective pacing, use MFE pads.
• Prolonged pacing (in excess of 30 minutes), particularly in neonates or adults with severely restricted blood flow,
may cause burns. Periodic inspection of the underlying skin is recommended.
• If the unit was not turned off and less than 10 minutes have elapsed since the pacing mode was last used,
reactivating the pacer mode causes pacing to immediately resume at the previously selected mA and ppm
settings.
• Pacing must be turned off before defibrillating with a second defibrillator. Otherwise, the E Series unit may be
damaged.
Noninvasive Temporary Pacing Attach and connect the MFE pads
Some E Series products contain a VVI demand This is described in “MFE Pad Application/Connection”
pacemaker — a safe and effective design for on page 1-9.
Noninvasive Temporary Pacemakers. Proper demand
pacing requires a reliable, high-quality surface ECG 2 Turn Selector Switch to PACER
signal.
Determine patient condition and provide care
following medical protocols.
-/.)4/2 $%&)"
Prepare Patient /&&
Remove all clothing covering the patient’s chest. Dry

0!#%2
chest if necessary. If the patient has excessive chest
hair, clip it to ensure proper adhesion of electrodes.
1 Apply Electrodes and/or MFE Pads Set Pacer Output to 0 mA

If the unit has just been turned on, the PACER OUTPUT
Connect the electrodes to the ECG cable leads, and the
is automatically set to 0 mA.
ECG cable to the E Series unit. Apply ECG electrodes
(refer to “ECG Monitoring” on page 10-1). Adjust the
ECG size and lead for a convenient waveform display.
3 Set Pacer Rate
Verify proper R-wave detection. The heart-shaped Set PACER RATE to a value 10-20 ppm higher than
symbol flashes with each R-wave when proper detection patient’s intrinsic rate. If no intrinsic rate exists, use
is taking place. 100 ppm.
9650-1210-01 Rev. R 9-1

The pacer rate increments or decrements by a value of Electrical Capture

2 ppm on the display when you turn the knob.
Electrical capture means that the unit is delivering
sufficient electrical current to stimulate the heart as seen
on the ECG trace.

0!#%2 0!#%2
/54054
M!
2!4%
PPM
WARNING
• You should only assess electrical capture by
viewing the ECG on the screen with the ECG
unit’s cable directly attached to the patient.
• Use of other ECG monitoring devices may
provide misleading information due to the
Observe the pacing stimulus marker on the display or presence of pacer artifacts.
stripchart ( ) and verify that it is well-positioned in
diastole.
The shape and size of the paced ECG waveforms can
vary depending on the ECG lead configuration chosen
and depending on the patient. Electrical capture is
indicated if:
• Each stimulus marker is followed by a wide QRS
complex
• There is no underlying intrinsic rhythm
• An extended, and sometimes enlarged, T-wave
Pacing
Pacing Stimuli
Stimuli appears.
The following figure shows ECG tracings that are typical
4 Set Pacer Output of effective pacing:
Increase PACER OUTPUT mA until stimulation is

effective (capture). Output mA value is displayed. negative R-wave
Stimulus Marker
The pacer output increments or decrements by a value large T-wave
of 2 mA on the display as you turn the knob.

0!#%2 0!#%2
/54054 2!4%
M! PPM
Note: When the device is switched out of Pacer mode

into Defib or Monitor mode for less than 10
minutes, and then switched back to Pacer mode,
the Pacer settings remain unchanged.
If the unit is turned off for more than 10 seconds, the
pacer default settings are restored.
5 Determine Capture inverted T-wave,

absence of
widened,
Capture refers to the state when the heart is being paced positive R-wave P-waves
by the unit rather than the body’s own pacemaker
mechanism. Capture consists of two parts: electrical and
mechanical capture. You must verify capture both Intermittent capture is indicated when some stimulus
electrically and mechanically to ensure appropriate markers are not immediately followed by wide QRS
circulatory support of the patient. complexes; you can compensate for intermittent capture
9-2 9650-1210-01 Rev. R

NonInvasive Temporary Pacing (Pacer Version Only)
by increasing the pacer output (mA) until every pacing • The MFE cable is defective.
marker is immediately followed by a wide QRS complex. • MFE Pads are not connected to the Multi-Function
Note that changing ECG leads and size can sometimes cable.
be helpful in determining capture. • MFE Pads are not making good skin contact.
Mechanical Capture The alarm continues to sound until the Clear Pace
Alarm softkey is pressed.
Mechanical capture is indicated when the patient’s pulse
approximates the displayed pace rate.
Because pacing stimuli generally causes muscular CHECK PADS
contractions that can be mistaken for a pulse, you should ECG
never take a pulse on the left side of the body. Similarly, _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _
pectoral muscle contractions due to pacing stimuli do not
indicate mechanical capture. To avoid mistaking
muscular response to pacing stimuli for arterial
PACE
pulsations, use ONLY the following locations for taking
palpating pulse during pacing: 00:01 50 mA 70 PPM
Clear Async
• Femoral artery Pace Pacing
• Right brachial or radial artery. Alar m On/Off
6 Determining Optimum Threshold

Special Pacing Applications
The ideal output current is the lowest value that
maintains mechanical capture. This is usually about 10% Noninvasive Temporary Pacing may be performed in the
above threshold. Threshold is the minimum current that Cardiac Cath Lab, either for emergency pacing or in
must be exceeded to begin producing a given effect, in standby mode. Radiolucent stat-padz are available to
this case ventricular capture. Typical threshold currents facilitate pacing in X-ray and fluoroscopic applications.
are between 40 and 80 mA. Location of the MFE Pads Noninvasive Temporary Pacing may also be performed
affects the current required to obtain ventricular capture. in the operating room using sterile stat-padz.
The MFE Pad placement that offers the most direct
current pathway to the heart while avoiding large chest
muscles usually produces the lowest threshold. Low
stimulation currents produce less skeletal muscle
CAUTION
contraction and are better tolerated. Under certain conditions it may not be possible to
properly monitor or pace while electrosurgical
Checking Underlying Patient Rhythm with 4:1 Mode apparatus is operating.

Observe the device carefully for evidence of proper
0!#%2 0!#%2 operation.
/54054 2!4%
M! PPM
Standby Pacing
For certain patients at risk of developing symptomatic
bradycardia, it may be advisable to use the unit in
standby mode. When used in standby mode, the unit
automatically provides a pacing stimulus whenever the
Press and hold the 4:1 button to temporarily withhold patient’s heart rate drops below a predetermined level.
pacing stimuli thereby allowing you to observe the Patient’s ECG must be monitored using ECG leads and
patient’s underlying rhythm and morphology. When patient cables for this application. To use the device in
depressed, this button causes pacing stimuli to be standby mode:
delivered at ¼ the indicated ppm setting.
1. Establish effective pacing (see instructions on previ-
Clearing Pacing Alarms ous pages). Note the mA output at capture and run
an ECG strip to document ECG morphology during
The messages CHECK PADS and POOR PAD
capture.
CONTACT are alternately displayed on the screen and
an audible alarm sounds if the unit is attempting to 2. Set the mA output 10% higher than the minimum mA
deliver pacing therapy and one of the following output necessary to effect consistent ventricular
conditions is true: capture.
3. Turn the pacing rate (ppm) below the patient’s heart
• The MFE cable is not connected to the device. rate. This suppresses pacing unless the patient’s own
9650-1210-01 Rev. R 9-3

rate drops below the set pacing rate. The pacing rate
should be set at a level sufficient for adequate
cardiac output.
4. Check the threshold periodically.
Asynchronous Pacing
If ECG electrodes are not available or there is some
circumstance that prevents or interferes with the surface
ECG, it may be necessary to operate the pacemaker
asynchronously.
Perform asynchronous pacing only in emergency
situations when there are no other alternatives.
To pace asynchronously:
1. Press the Async Pacing On/Off Softkey.
The display shows the ASYNC PACE message to
indicate that asynchronous pacing has been
activated. The annotation “ASYNC PACE” is printed
on the stripchart when activated by the RECORDER
button. This annotation is also printed on the
corresponding summary report.
2. To return to demand pacing, press the Async Pacing
On/off softkey again and the display returns to
PACE.
ASYNC PACE
00:01 50 mA 70 PPM Async
Pacing
Param ID# Alar ms On/Off
Pace stimuli is also delivered asynchronously whenever

there is an ECG LEAD OFF condition. Be aware that
there is no ECG activity on the display when pacing by
this method; you must use other means of determining
capture such as checking the patient’s pulse. When
pacing asynchronously with an ECG LEAD OFF
condition, set the rate and mA at the known capture level
or high enough (100mA) to presume capture.
Pediatric Pacing
Noninvasive pacing of pediatric patients is done in an
identical manner to adult pacing. Smaller size pediatric
MFE Pads are available for patients weighing less than
33 lbs/15 kg. Continuous pacing of neonates can cause
skin burns. If it is necessary to pace for more than 30
minutes, periodic inspection of the underlying skin is
strongly advised. Carefully follow all instructions
provided on electrode package.
Troubleshooting
the troubleshooting section “Pacer (Pacer version only)”
on page 13-4.
9-4 9650-1210-01 Rev. R

SECTION 10
ECG MONITORING
Introduction
You can use the E Series products for either short-term IEC Color AHA Color Placement of Electrodes
or long-term ECG monitoring. Coding Coding
E Series products have built-in protection circuitry to R/Red RA/White Place near patient’s right
prevent damage to their ECG monitoring circuits during Electrode Electrode mid-clavicular line, directly
defibrillation attempts. Monitoring electrodes may below clavicle.
become polarized during defibrillator discharge, causing
the ECG waveform to briefly go off screen. High quality L/Yellow LA/Black Place near patient’s left
silver/ silver chloride (Ag/AgCl) electrodes minimize this Electrode Electrode mid-clavicular line, directly
effect, and circuitry in the instrument returns the trace to below clavicle.
the monitor display within a few seconds.
F/Green LL/Red Place between 6th and 7th
ECG monitoring may be accomplished through an ECG Electrode Electrode intercostal space on
patient cable, Multi-Function Pads or through standard patient’s left mid-clavicular
defibrillation paddles. Use of an ECG patient cable and line.
electrodes is required, however, to monitor during
pacing. N/Black* RL/Green* Place between 6th and 7th
Electrode Electrode intercostal space on
You can use a 3-lead or 5-lead wire configuration for
patient’s right mid-clavicular
ECG monitoring. You can also view a summary of vital
line.
sign trends if the unit is configured with other
physiological monitoring parameters, such as pulse C/White* V/Brown* Single movable chest
oximetry (SpO2) or end tidal carbon dioxide (EtCO2). Electrode Electrode electrode.
Preparations * Not used for 3-lead monitoring

For information on precordial lead placement (V1 - V6),
Proper application and placement of electrodes is
see the 12 Lead Monitoring Operators Guide Insert.
essential for high quality ECG monitoring. Good contact
between the electrode and skin minimizes motion artifact
and signal interference. 3-lead configuration 5-lead wire configuration
Electrode Placement
Depending upon local usage, the ECG leads are marked
RA LA RA LA
either RA, LA, LL, RL, and V or R, L, F, N and C. The
following table shows the markings and color codes for
the different lead sets.
V
LL RL LL
9650-1210-01 Rev. R 10-1

Monitoring Electrodes Attachment

Attach snap-on leads to electrodes and check for good ,%!$
contact between the electrode and the lead termination.
3):%
Peel the protective backing from the ECG electrode. Be
careful to keep adhesive surface free of electrolyte gel. !,!2-
3530%.$
2%#/2$%2
CAUTION
Only use electrodes that are well within the expiration If the unit displays the ECG LEAD OFF, CHECK PADS,
date indicated on the package. POOR LEAD CONTACT, or POOR PAD CONTACT
message, inspect the ECG electrodes or MFE pads, lead
Apply the ECG electrodes firmly to the patient’s skin, wires, and associated connections.
pressing around the entire perimeter of the electrodes. If heart rate alarms are enabled with paddles selected,
Plug the patient cable connector into the ECG input the unit displays the message SELECT LIMB LEADS. If
connector (located on the rear panel of the instrument). you see this message, select limb or precordial leads.
If you want to change the size of the displayed ECG
waveform, press the SIZE button until the desired
CAUTION waveform size is displayed. Options are 0.5, 1, 1.5, 2,
To avoid electrosurgery burns at monitoring sites, and 3 times the normal size.
ensure proper connection of the electrosurgery return
If you want to shut off the heart rate beeper, press the
circuit so that the return paths cannot be made
Volume softkey, then the Dec softkey repeatedly until
through monitoring electrodes or probes.
you get to the lowest level. To turn it back on, press the
Inc softkey
During electrosurgery, observe the following guidelines .
to minimize ESU interference and provide maximum
user and patient safety:
WARNING
• Keep all patient monitoring cables away from earth Implanted pacemakers may cause the heart rate
ground, ESU knives, and ESU return wires. meter to count the pacemaker rate during incidents of
• Use electrosurgical grounding pads with the largest cardiac arrest or other arrhythmias. Pacemaker
practical contact area. patients should be carefully observed. Check the
Always assure proper application of the electrosurgical patient's pulse; do not rely solely on heart rate meters.
return electrode to the patient. Dedicated pacemaker detection circuitry may not
detect all implanted pacemaker spikes; patient history
Control Setting and physical exam are important in determining the
presence of an implanted pacemaker.
Set selector switch to the MONITOR position.
Spikes from Implanted Pacemakers

-/.)4/2 $%&)" The device is capable of detecting pacemaker signals
from a patient with an implanted pacemaker and
/&& indicates the signal on the display.
The device displays a thin, solid line on the ECG trace
0!#%2 whenever it detects a pacemaker signal. The waveform
spike produced by the pacemaker is displayed whether
the pacer is atrial, ventricular, or both.
Press the LEAD button until the desired lead
configuration is selected. The selected lead is indicated
at upper right of display.
10-2 9650-1210-01 Rev. R

ECG Monitoring
selected State value and moves the highlight to

LEAD SIZE HR
the next field on the right (Low limit field).
ECG x1 70 • If you press the Next Field softkey after selecting
PADS AUTO, the unit sets the lower and upper limits to
80% and 120% of the patient’s currently measured
heart rate if valid measurements are present for
ECG
the vital sign. (Refer to appropriate Operator’s
Guide parameter insert(s) for percentages
associated with other parameters). The highlight
shifts to the next parameter field.
MONITOR
00:15 Note: To recalculate the Low and High limits for any
parameter when these limits have previously
Param Wave 2 ID# Alarms 12 Lead been set using the AUTO State, press the Inc or
Dec softkeys until AUTO is selected again and
then press the Next Field softkey. The unit
automatically resets the Low and High limits
based upon the currently measured value of the
If you want to disable pacer detect: selected physiological parameter.
1. Press the Param softkey. 4. If you did not select AUTO, press the Inc or Dec
softkeys to set the Low alarm limit value, then press
2. Select ECG.
the Next Field softkey to confirm the selected value
3. Press the Disable Pacer Detect softkey.
and move the highlight to the next setting field to the
right (High limit field).
Alarms
Repeat this step for the High limit field.
WARNING 5. Press the Return softkey to set all values and return
Heart rate alarms are non-operational when the AED to normal operating mode.
unit is in semi-automatic mode. Vital Sign Alarms
Each vital sign has an associated alarm with a high and
Setting Alarm Limits low limit. You can set alarm limits for patient heart rate
Unless configured otherwise, heart rate alarms are and other optional monitoring parameters such as pulse
preset at 30 bpm (bradycardia) and 150 bpm oximetry (SpO2) if available.
(tachycardia). Refer to the E Series Configuration Guide The E Series unit has three levels of alarms as follows:
for details on setting power-up alarm limits.
• High Priority — Reflects physiological parameters
To set alarms: that are out of bounds. When these alerts occur, the
1. Press the Alarms softkey to view the Alarm Set unit emits a continuous audio tone, highlights the
screen and softkeys. alarming parameter, and flashes the associated
2. Press the Select Param softkey. alarm symbol.
This scrolls the highlighted area among the different • Medium Priority — Reflects equipment- related,
possible vital signs. user correctable faults such as LEAD OFF and
CHECK SPO2 SENSOR. The unit emits a two beep
audio tone and displays a message for a timed
period.
Parameter State Low High • Low Priority — Informational message only; the unit
ECG HR ENABLE 30 150 emits a two beep audio tone and displays a message
SYSTOLIC ENABLE 60 160 for a timed period.
DIASTOLIC ENABLE 50 110
MEAN ENABLE 60 130 Heart Rate Alarm Limits
MORE
The heart rate is displayed in the upper right-hand corner
Select Inc Dec Next of the screen, above the heart symbol.
Param > < Field Return
Unless configured otherwise, heart rate alarms are
preset at 30 bpm (bradycardia) and 150 bpm
3. Press the Inc or Dec softkeys to select ENABLE, (tachycardia). The low heart rate alarm limit range is
DISABLE, or AUTO in the State field. 20 bpm to 100 bpm.
• If you press the Next Field softkey after selecting When the unit is monitoring a patient’s heart rate through
either ENABLE or DISABLE, the unit sets the ECG, the range for the high heart rate alarm is 60 to
9650-1210-01 Rev. R 10-3

280 bpm with a default setting of 150 bpm. When the After the unit resets an alarm, should the
unit is monitoring a patient’s heart rate through pulse physiological parameter again go out of range,
oximetry (SpO2), however, the unit automatically lowers it triggers the alarm.
the upper limit for the high heart rate alarm to 235 bpm.
The unit restores the original high heart rate alarm limit Deactivating and Activating Alarms
when ECG monitoring resumes. To deactivate all alarms on the E Series unit, press and
hold down the ALARM SUSPEND button for 3 seconds
Suspending and Silencing Alarms
or longer. The alarm symbol for all alarms has an “X”
When a high priority alarm occurs, the unit emits a through them to indicate that the alarms are deactivated.
continuous alarm tone, highlights the value of the Alarm parameter values display normally (no
alarming parameter on the display screen, and flashes highlighting).
the alarm symbol associated with that parameter.
To reactivate the alarms, press and release the ALARM
You can either suspend the alarm tone for 90 seconds or SUSPEND button in less than 1 second.
you can silence the alarm tone.
Smart Alarms
Suspending Alarm Tones
In Defib, Monitor or ON mode, ECG/heart rate alarm
To suspend the alarm tone for 90 seconds, capabilities are enhanced with the defibrillation advisory
press and release the ALARM SUSPEND feature called Smart Alarms. When alarms are
button in less than 1 second. The alarm tone operating, this feature triggers an audible alarm
stops, the unit displays an “X” across the whenever the unit detects ventricular fibrillation or wide
alarm’s flashing alarm symbol, and the value of the complex ventricular tachycardias. For advisory-triggered
alarming parameter remains highlighted. (If you press alarms, an additional CHECK PATIENT message
the ALARM SUSPEND button again, alarm processing appears on the display and the chart recorder print out.
is reactivated.)
If alarms are operating in Pacer mode (Pacer version
After 90 seconds, if the physiological only), the unit displays the message VF ALARMS OFF
parameter remains at a value that triggers the indicating that the Smart Alarms feature has been
alarm, the unit sounds the alarm tone again. disabled.
If the alarm condition clears (the physiological
parameter returns to a value within range) after you have
Recorder Operation
suspended the alarm tone, the unit resets the alarm and The stripchart recorder documents the ECG trace with a
displays the alarm symbol (no flashing, no “X”). The 6 second delay at all times. To start the stripchart
alarm parameter displays normally (no highlighting). recorder, press the RECORDER button. The stripchart
If a second, different alarm occurs after you suspend an recorder runs continuously until you press the button
alarm tone, you can suspend the alarm tone for that again.
second parameter by pressing and releasing the Each time the strip recorder is started, the time, date,
ALARM SUSPEND button. The unit performs the same ECG lead, size, and heart rate are printed on the top part
way as described previously for the first alarm. of the paper. If the unit is pacing, the output current is
Silencing Alarm Tones also printed. Similarly, if the defibrillator has been
discharged, the delivered energy is printed.
To silence the alarm tone, press and hold down
the ALARM SUSPEND button for between 1 Note: Check the paper supply at the beginning of each
and 3 seconds (hold down button for at least shift and after each use to ensure adequate
one second, but less than 3 seconds). The recording capability. A colored stripe on the paper
alarm tone stops, the unit displays the alarm’s alarm means that the paper supply is low.
symbol with a dashed line “X” across it, and the value of A CHECK RECORDER message appears on the display
the alarm parameter remains highlighted. (If you press when the stripchart recorder is activated without paper.
the ALARM SUSPEND button again, alarm processing The stripchart recorder automatically shuts off when
is reactivated.) there is no paper.
The alarm tone does not sound again as long After loading new paper, press the RECORDER button
as the physiological parameter’s value remains to start the strip recorder.
out of range.
Diagnostic Bandwidth
If the alarm condition clears (the physiological
parameter returns to a value within range) after you When using an ECG cable for monitoring, you can
silence the alarm tone, the unit resets the alarm and switch the unit to diagnostic bandwidth (0.05-150 Hz) by
displays the alarm symbol (no inverse video, no “X”). pressing and holding the RECORDER button depressed.
The alarm parameter value displays normally (no Diagnostic bandwidth is maintained as long as the
highlighting). RECORDER button is held down. The unit reverts to
10-4 9650-1210-01 Rev. R

ECG Monitoring
standard monitoring bandwidth when you release the set to Yes in System Configuration. Refer to the E Series
RECORDER button. Configuration Guide for more information.
5-Lead Monitoring Vital Signs Trending

You can perform 5-lead ECG monitoring with the Some E Series units include a vital signs trending feature
appropriate ECG patient cable. The 5-lead wire cable that samples the instantaneous values of monitored
provides the following ECG monitor leads: physiological parameters and stores the sampled data in
a log that includes the time these values were recorded.
• I, II, III
Vital signs include:
• aVL, aVR, aVF
• V1 • Heart rate
• Pulse oximetry (SpO2)
The Smart Alarms feature is always disabled during
monitoring when augmented leads (aVR, aVF, aVL) or • End tidal carbon dioxide (EtCO2)
V-leads are selected. The messages VF ALARMS OFF • Respiration Rate
and SELECT LIMB LEADS are alternately displayed • Noninvasive blood pressure (NIBP) values.
when alarms are activated and augmented leads or V-
You can view stored trend data in tabular form on the
leads are selected. These messages are displayed only
E Series display, or you can print it on the unit’s
the first time you select the augmented or V-leads. They
stripchart recorder.
are not redisplayed as you cycle through the lead
selection. With trending enabled, the values of monitored vital
signs are sampled once every 30 seconds and stored in
Changing from 3-Lead Monitoring the unit’s trend memory. Trend memory stores up to 24
To change from 3-lead to 5-lead monitoring, simply hours of 30 second trend records. When this storage is
disconnect the 3-Lead ECG patient cable and connect filled, the newest trending sample replaces the oldest
the 5-lead wire ECG patient cable. Refer to the beginning trending sample.
of this section for appropriate preparations (i.e., placing The unit stores additional trend records whenever the
electrodes, attaching electrodes, setting the controls, unit raises a high priority vital signs alarm or when an
etc.) to be considered before performing five (5) lead additional NIBP measurement is taken. These additional
monitoring. records decrease the overall number of 30 second trend
If any ECG lead becomes disconnected during records that can be stored in the unit’s memory.
monitoring an ECG LEAD OFF message appears on the
Viewing Vital Signs Trending Data on the
display.
Display
Changing from 5-Lead ECG Monitoring The display for vital signs trending data always shows
To change from 5-lead monitoring to 3-lead monitoring, the time of the recorded data, the heart rate/pulse rate
you must power off the unit for at least 10 seconds, and the SpO2. The date of the recording appears at the
remove the 5-lead wire cable, connect the 3-lead cable, top of the trend display. EtCO2 and NIBP are optionally
then power on the unit again. If you fail to shut the unit off displayed based on the configuration of the unit.
for 10 seconds, the unit displays the ECG LEAD OFF To select either EtCO2 or NIBP data for viewing:
message after you disconnect the 5-lead wire cable,
even if leads are properly attached to the patient. 1. Press the SUMMARY button.
2. Press the Trend softkey on the Summary menu.
Simultaneous 3-Lead Printing 3. Press the Select softkey to highlight either EtCO2 or
You can print 3 separate lead views of the patient ECG NIBP.
when using a 5-lead wire and the “Print 3 Leads When 4. Press the Enter softkey to select the desired option.
Leads are Sel” option is enabled in System To view only SpO2 data when multiple parameters are
Configuration. installed, use the Select softkey to highlight SpO2 from
The lead selection shown on the display is always the the Trend submenu, then press the Enter softkey.
top ECG printed on the recorder strip. Signals
simultaneously recorded by the other leads of each
triplet (limb leads, augmented leads, etc.) are printed
below this trace. For example, if aVR is selected, the
recorder simultaneously prints aVR (top) followed by aVL
(middle) and aVF (bottom). With 5-lead monitoring, the
unit prints lead views for leads II, III, and aVF together
when the “Custom Five Wire Grouping in Use” option is
9650-1210-01 Rev. R 10-5

If only one parameter is installed on the unit, the trend Data is printed on the stripchart in order of newest data
screen automatically appears when you press the Trend to oldest data. Alarm conditions are indicated on the
softkey. stripchart by placing brackets around alarmed values. As
on the display, invalid data is indicated by a dashed line
(---) for the actual data.
09-Jun-10
TIME HR/PR SpO2 CO2 NIBP readings are considered valid for only one trend
5 MIN EtCO2 RR record (i.e., the sample during which the NIBP
measurement was completed). All other trend records
13:35 120 100 4.1 36
indicate invalid NIBP readings.
13:30 119 100 4.3 13
13:25 120 99 3.7 15
13:20 119 99 3.7 15
Print Newer Older Zoom Return
Not all trending data can be displayed on the monitor at

the same time. However, you can select the resolution of
the time between samples by using the Zoom Softkey.
You can view ALL trending data, or you can view
trending data taken at 5 minute, 10 minute, 15 minute,
30 minute, and 60 minute intervals. Data is presented
with the newest data at the top and the oldest data at the
bottom of the display.
If an alarm occurs while the unit is monitoring vital signs, If the Zoom setting is set to five minutes, when you press
such as an NIBP alarm, the unit records the data at the the Print softkey on the Trend display, a reports prints
moment of the alarm, independent of the standard out that includes only the values sampled at the five
30 seconds interval recording. minute intervals.
The unit indicates an alarm condition on the trend
display by highlighting the alarmed parameter on the
display. The unit indicates invalid data by substituting a
dashed line (---) for the actual data. Invalid data may
occur, for example, when the measuring probe or device
is not properly connected to the patient.
The most recently recorded trending sample is indicated
by highlighting the time stamp associated with the trend
data. If no time record is highlighted, older data is being
displayed. To view the newest values of recorded data,
press the Newer softkey until the highlighted time
displays.
When viewing the newest data, the display automatically
updates as each new trend record is recorded. To view
older values of recorded data, press the Older softkey
until the desired data displays. If you are viewing the NIBP Trend Operation
most recent trending data, the trending screen remains
When displaying NIBP trends, only those trending
displayed until you exit the screen. However, if you are
samples recorded for NIBP readings are displayed.
viewing anything other than the most recent trending
NIBP History trend reports contain all NIBP records
data, the trending screen times out three minutes after
regardless of the Zoom level.
the last softkey activation.
Printing a Vital Signs Trend Report
The stripchart prints the trend report using the same
zoom level that the display uses. If the Zoom setting is
set to All and you press the Print softkey on the Trend
display, all trending samples print from the starting
record shown back through to the oldest record.
10-6 9650-1210-01 Rev. R

ECG Monitoring
Clearing Vital Signs Trend Records

The unit stores at least 24 hours of normal (non-alarmed,
non-NIBP) trending samples before it is overwritten. If
the unit is powered down while recording trend data, the
corresponding gap in time is indicated on the display by
a series of asterisks in the time field and no data points in
any parameter fields. On the stripchart, this gap is
indicated by several things: the annotation “POWER
OFF DETECTED” is printed at the bottom of the display,
the stripchart paper advances and a new page of
trending data is started. If the unit is turned off for more
than a user-specified length of time, all vital signs trend
data is automatically erased.
To clear trend data, press and hold the SUMMARY
button until the display shows the Erase Summary, Erase
Trend and Erase All softkeys. Press the Erase Trend
softkey. The ERASING REPORT message displays and
the trend data is cleared.
If your unit does not function as expected, see
“Troubleshooting Guidelines” on page 13-1.
9650-1210-01 Rev. R 10-7


SECTION 11
GENERAL MAINTENANCE
Resuscitation equipment must be maintained to be ready Cleaning the Recorder Printhead

for immediate use. Perform the following operational
To clean the recorder printhead, perform the following
checks at the beginning of every shift to ensure proper
steps:
equipment operation and patient safety.
1. Open the recorder cover on top of the E Series unit.
Operator's Shift Checklists are included at the end of this
section to aid in checking and maintaining the unit. Copy 2. Remove the paper (if necessary).
and distribute the appropriate sheet to all individuals 3. Locate the row of soft, thin bristles on the front edge
responsible for the device’s use and readiness. of the paper compartment.
4. Locate a thin black line (printhead) adjacent and
Note: Self-test defibrillation and pacing data is parallel to the bristles.
automatically recorded on the PCMCIA data card,
5. Gently wipe the thin black line with an alcohol
if present. You can configure the unit to erase all
(isopropyl) moistened Q-tip.
self-test data from the data card on power-off.
6. Dry any residual alcohol with a new Q-tip.
See the E Series Configuration Guide for more
information. 7. Reload the recorder with paper.
Inspection Testing the E Series Unit

When you visually inspect the E Series unit, check the The following sections cover testing of the:
items listed in steps 1 through 7 in the Operator's Shift • stripchart recorder
Checklist. • Defibrillator (Semiautomatic mode)
• Defibrillator (Manual mode)
Cleaning • Pacer (Pacer Version Only)
E Series products and accessories are chemically
Testing the Stripchart Recorder
resistant to most common cleaning solutions and non-
caustic detergents. ZOLL recommends cleaning the Follow these steps to test the stripchart recorder:
device, paddles, and cables with a soft damp cloth, and 1. Check for adequate supply of paper.
the following cleaning agents:
2. Press the RECORDER button.
• 90% isopropyl alcohol (except adapters and patient The stripchart recorder runs until the RECORDER
cable) button is pressed again.
• Soap and water
Press and hold the SIZE button for at least 2 seconds
• Chlorine bleach (30ml/l water) to generate a calibration pulse.
The recorder parts should be cleaned with a damp, soft The calibration pulse remains on the display for as
cloth only. long as the SIZE button remains depressed. In addi-
Do not immerse any part of the device or accessories tion, the amplitude of the calibration pulse is 1 mV
(including paddles) in water. Do not use ketones (MEK, independent of the size setting.
acetone, etc.). Avoid using abrasives (e.g., paper towels) 3. Inspect the recorder waveform for uniformity and
on the display window. Do not sterilize the device. darkness, and the stripchart data for uniformity of
annotation characters and completeness of words.
Make sure to clean the defibrillation paddles after each
4. Verify that the calibration pulse is 2.5  ½ mm wide
use. Build up of gel interferes with paddle ECG
and 10 ± 1 mm high.
monitoring and may produce a shock hazard to the
operator. Keep paddle handles clean.
9650-1210-01 Rev. R 11-1

Testing the Defibrillator (Semiautomatic Mode) Note: If a LOW BATTERY message appears during
testing at the beginning of a shift, the battery
Perform these tests on all AED units periodically.
currently in use is close to depletion; replace and
Power-Up Sequence Test charge the battery. The device does not test the
battery for adequate charge to support extended
Follow these steps to verify the unit’s power-up
use of the unit; capacity can only be determined
sequence.
by testing the battery in a Base Power
1. Turn the selector switch on the front panel to the ON Charger 4x4 or SurePower Charger.
position
Testing the Defibrillator (Manual Mode)
2. Verify the following:
• The unit emits a 4-beep tone to indicate the Perform these tests on all standard E Series units
power-up self test has been successfully periodically.
completed. Note: During the Energy Delivery Test, the unit
• The CHECK PADS message is displayed and discharges only when the energy level is set to
announced. 30 joules.
Defibrillator Test Power-Up Sequence Test
Perform the defibrillator test to verify that the unit Follow these steps to verify the unit’s power-up
analyzes ECG rhythm and delivers shock treatment sequence. To perform this test, you need an ECG rhythm
correctly. To perform this test, you need an ECG rhythm simulator.
simulator.
1. Ensure the selector switch on the E Series front
1. Ensure that the selector switch on the E Series front panel is set to OFF, and connect the ECG monitoring
panel is in the OFF position. cable to the simulator.
2. Connect the patient end of the multifunction cable to 2. Turn the selector switch to the MONITOR position.
the defibrillator test connector. 3. Verify that the:
3. Turn the selector switch to ON. • The unit emits a 4-beep tone to indicate the
4. Press the ANALYZE button and verify that the unit power-up self test has been successfully
charges to 30 J (30 J READY message). completed.
• ECG size is x1
5. Once unit has charged, verify the SHOCK button
illuminates. • MONITOR message displays on the LCD
• ECG source is PADDLES or PADS
6. Press and hold the SHOCK button.
7. Verify that the unit briefly displays the TEST OK If no ECG cable is connected to the simulator, the
message and prints a stripchart. message ECG LEAD OFF is displayed and the ECG
display shows a dashed line instead of a solid line.
This message indicates that the unit delivered energy
within specifications. Delivered Energy and Shock Buttons
Note: If TEST FAILED message appears, contact the Perform this test at the start of each shift.
ZOLL Technical Service Department immediately.
8. Connect the multifunction cable to the ZOLL ECG
Simulator, and set the simulator to VF. WARNING
9. Verify that within 30 seconds the unit displays and When performing this test using paddles, use your
and announces the CHECK PATIENT prompt. thumbs to operate the SHOCK buttons in order to
avoid an inadvertent shock. No portion of the hand
10. Press the ANALYZE button on the front panel and
should be near the paddle plates.
verify the unit charges to 120 J or other preconfigured
level.
11. Once unit has charged, verify that it illuminates the Paddles Setup:
SHOCK button and that it displays and announces
the PRESS SHOCK prompt. 1. Verify adult paddles are installed and are inserted all
the way into their holders on the side of the E Series
12. Press and hold the SHOCK button and verify unit
unit.
discharges.
2. Turn the selector switch to DEFIB.
3. Set the defibrillator energy level to 30 joules.
4. Press the CHARGE button on the apex handle and
verify that the unit displays the DEFIB 30J READY
message.
11-2 9650-1210-01 Rev. R

General Maintenance
5. When charge ready tone sounds, use the defibrillator

ENERGY SELECT buttons on either the sternum
paddle or defibrillator front panel to change the

selected energy to 20 joules. 0!#%2 0!#%2
/54054 2!4%
6. Verify that the unit disarms itself. M! PPM
7. Use the defibrillator ENERGY SELECT buttons on
either the sternum paddle or defibrillator front panel to
change the selected energy back to 30 joules.
MFC Setup:
4. Press the RECORDER button to generate a strip,
1. Plug the MFC cable into the unit, making sure it is not and then again to stop printing.
plugged into the test connector.
2. Set the selector switch on the front panel to DEFIB 5. Verify that the pacing stimulus markers ( ) occur
and select 30 J. approximately every 10 small divisions (2 large
3. Verify that the unit alternately displays the CHECK divisions or 1 cm).
PADS and POOR PAD CONTACT messages. 6. Press the RECORDER button to generate another
4. Insert the end of the Multi-Function Cable into its test stripchart, then press and hold the 4:1 button on the
connector (Attached to the Multi-function cable), as front panel.
shown below. 7. Press the RECORDER button again to stop printing.
8. Verify that the frequency of the markers decreases (8
large divisions or 4 cm between each marker).
9. Turn the PACER OUTPUT control to 0 mA.
10. Verify there are no CHECK PADS or POOR PAD
CONTACT messages.
11. Disconnect MFE Pads or paddles from the
Multi-Function cable, and slowly turn the knob up to
change the pacer output to 16 mA.
12. Verify that the Pace alarm sounds and a CLEAR
PACE ALARM prompt flashes.
13. Connect the Multi-Function cable to the test
connector, and press the Clear Pace Alarm softkey.
5. Verify that the unit displays the DEFIB PAD SHORT
14. Verify that the unit Pace alarm stops and that the unit
message.
removes error messages from the LCD.
Energy Delivery Test
1. Press the CHARGE button on the front panel.
2. Wait for the charge ready tone to sound and verify
that the energy ready value displayed on the monitor
registers 30 joules (DEFIB 30J READY).
3. Press and hold the SHOCK button on the front panel
of the defibrillator (or the shock buttons on the
paddles) until discharge occurs.
4. Verify that the units displays the TEST OK message
and prints a stripchart of the event, noting the energy
delivered and impedance data.
Note: If TEST FAILED appears, contact the ZOLL
Technical Service Department immediately.
Testing the Pacer (Pacer Version Only)

Perform these tests on all pacer-equipped units
periodically.
1. Connect the ECG leads and Multi-function cable to
the simulator.
2. Turn the selector switch to PACER.
3. Turn the pacer rate control to 150 ppm.
9650-1210-01 Rev. R 11-3

Changing Recorder Paper

You should always check for adequate paper supply in the unit before operation. Failure to do so may result in
insufficient paper to print out event information during clinical rescue.
Follow these steps to change the paper:
1. Open the recorder module on top of the E Series unit.
2. Remove the paper from the tray.
3. Unfold the top sheet of a pad of thermal paper.
You should not see a thick red line (which indicates the end of the pad). If you do, turn the pad over and unfold the
top sheet
4. Align the paper above the open tray.
The proper orientation is with the black arrows pointing up, and the word “ZOLL Medical Corporation” running along
the left side, as shown.
5. Slide the paper into the tray.

The paper should extend out of the stripchart recorder when the recorder door is closed.
6. Shut the recorder module, and press down on both sides of the door until you hear both sides click.
Note: It is important to close both sides of the door firmly, otherwise the paper may jam in the recorder.
11-4 9650-1210-01 Rev. R

General Maintenance
Setting Time and Date Note: The last field does not automatically scroll (wrap)
to the beginning. You must press the Prev Field
Check the time and date on the recorder annotation. If it softkey to enter the values for the last field.
is not correct, reset the time and date (from System
If you need to make corrections, press the Prev
Utilities mode) manually, by dial-up to a National Institute
Field softkey to move the highlight to the field
for Science and Technology (NIST) site, or using the
previously entered.
GPS synchronization feature.
7. Press the Enter and Return softkey to set all values
After implementing time reset using any of the methods and return to normal monitoring mode.
described below, verify that the time and date are set
Note: Repeated display of the “SET CLOCK” or
correctly by pressing the RECORDER button to generate
“CLOCK FAULT” message may indicate that the
a stripchart recording. Check that the stripchart is
internal battery powering the unit’s Real Time
correctly annotated with the current time and date,
Clock is depleted. See the Troubleshooting
selected ECG size, source and heart rate.
Guidelines in Section 13 of this manual for more
Verify that the real-time clock is operating correctly by information.
waiting for several minutes then running the stripchart
recorder again. Automated Dial-up Method
Set the time on the unit at least once every 2 weeks to Note: To use this method, a modem connection is
prevent significant discrepancies between the unit’s time required.
and standard Greenwich Mean Time (GMT). 1. Press and hold the left-most softkey on the unit while
Turn the selector switch to OFF. The device must remain turning the selector switch to the MONITOR or ON
off for at least 10 seconds before entering System position. When the System Utilities screen appears
Utilities mode. on the monitor, release the softkey.
2. Press the MORE softkey and then the Clock Sync
Note: Time and date may require resetting if the softkey to display the set time option menu.
device’s internal battery is depleted or the time
3. Press the Dial Time Set softkey. A setting screen
zone has changed.
appears, allowing the user to choose a NIST
Note: For both automated dial-up and GPS (National Institute for Science and Technology) dial
synchronization methods, the correct time zone location and a prefix for the phone number of the
and DST option must be set in System selected NIST location, as required. For example, if
Configuration mode for the updated date and time the NIST location is outside of the local calling area,
to be correct. users within the continental United States would enter
a “1” as the dial prefix. Other users would enter a dial
Manual Method prefix as required for placing calls in the continental
1. Press and hold the left-most softkey on the unit while United States.
turning the selector switch to MONITOR (ON for AED 4. Press the Dial softkey.
units). When the “System Utilities” screen appears on The word “Initializing” appears briefly, followed by the
the monitor, release the softkey. Clock Synchronization screen, displaying the user
2. Press the MORE softkey and then the Clock Sync configurable NIST phone number with the
softkey to display the set time option menu. appropriate prefix. The word “Dialing” appears
3. Press the Manual Time Set softkey to display the Set underneath, along with a seconds counter, as the unit
Time screen. connects to the NIST site.
The month field will be highlighted. After receiving the atomic clock information from the
NIST site, the unit then displays updated date and time
information, unless one of the following errors occurs:
Set Time
Error Message Description/Corrective Action
June 30 , 05 16:37
MODEM The unit determined that there is no
Enter REQUIRED modem card installed. Install a sup-
Prev Inc Dec Next and ported modem card and retry.
Field Value Value Field Return
MODEM INIT The modem could not be initialized.
4. Press the Inc Value or Dec Value softkeys to select
ERROR Replace the modem card and retry.
the appropriate month.
5. Press the Next Field softkey to set the selected NO DIALTONE The unit could not detect a dial tone.
month and move the highlight to the next field (day). Check the connection between the
6. Repeat steps 4 and 5 to set the correct day, year, modem and the phone jack, or try a
hours and minutes field. different phone line.
9650-1210-01 Rev. R 11-5

Error Message Description/Corrective Action displayed. Press the Return softkey to return to the Main
System Utilities screen.
BUSY The unit detected a busy signal from
Note: GPS synchronization works best when the unit
the selected NIST location. Retry.
has a direct line of sight to GPS satellites. Placing
NO ANSWER The unit received no answer from the the unit outdoors or adjacent to an unblocked
selected NIST location. Retry or window when performing GPS synchronization is
select another NIST location. advised.
NO CARRIER The unit determined that the line is
broken. Correct the line break and
retry.
HANG UP The unit received a hang up indication
from the selected NIST location.
Retry.
MODEM DIAL The modem could not dial the phone
ERROR number. Ensure that the modem card
is properly connected. Ensure that the
user-selected dial prefix is correct.
(Refer to E Series Configuration
Guide for information). Retry.
NIST DATA The unit detected an error in the data
ERROR from NIST. Retry.
GPS Synchronization
1. Press and hold the left-most softkey on the unit while
turning the selector switch to MONITOR (ON for AED
units). When the System Utilities screen appears on
the monitor, release the softkey.
2. Press the MORE softkey and then the Clock Sync
softkey to display the set time option menu.
3. Press the GPS Time Set softkey to display the GPS
Clock Synchronization screen.
Clock Synchronization
GPS Acquire xxx
Abort Return
When the GPS time has been acquired, the display

shows the acquired date, time, day and the number of
seconds required to sync the clock. Latitude and
longitude may also be displayed if a complete satellite fix
was obtained. If a partial satellite fix was used to obtain
the clock information, the latitude and longitude will not
be displayed. Press the Return softkey to store the
acquired time and return to the Main System Utilities
screen.
Pressing the Abort softkey cancels the GPS
synchronization; the message GPS ABANDONED is
11-6 9650-1210-01 Rev. R

Operator’s Shift Checklist for E Series Products (Manual)
Recommended checks and procedures to be performed at the start of each shift. For more detailed information, see
the E Series Operator’s Guide.
Date____________________________Location________________________________Unit Serial Number__________________
1. Condition 1st 2nd 3rd Remarks
Shift Shift Shift
Unit clean, no spills, clear of objects on top, case intact
2. Multi-function Pads
1 set preconnected / 1 spare (check expiration dates)
3. Paddles
Paddles clean, free of gel and contaminants, not pitted
Release from paddle wells easily
4. Inspect cables for cracks, frays, broken wires, connector pins
A. ECG electrode cable, connector
B. Defibrillator paddle cables, paddle handle
C. Multi-function cable, connector
5. Batteries
A. Fully charged battery in unit
B Fully charged spare battery available.
6. Disposable supplies
A. Electrode gel or gel patches
B. MFE Pads in sealed pouches — 2 sets
C. ECG electrodes
D. Recorder paper
E. Alcohol wipes
F. Razors
7. Memory Card
Empty memory card install in unit (if applicable)
8. Operational checks
A. Power On Sequence
Turn unit to MONITOR, 4-beep tone heard
MONITOR message on display
ECG size X 1
PADDLES or PADS as lead selected
B. Pacer Operation (Pacer version only)
Multi-function cable not connected to Test Connector
Turn to PACER, set pacer rate to 150 ppm, press RECORDER button
Pacer pulses occur ever 2 large divisions (10 small divisions)
Press 4:1 button, pulses occur every 8 large divisions
Set PACER OUTPUT to 0 mA, no CHECK PADS prompt
Set PACER OUTPUT to 16 mA, CHECK PADS prompt and alarm
Reconnect Multi-function cable to test connector.
Press Clear Pace Alarm softkey; CHECK PADS prompt disappears and Pace
alarm stops.
C. Defibrillator
Multi-function cable connected to test connector: Set defib energy level to
30 joules, press SHOCK button; TEST OK message on Recorder
D. Paddles
Paddles in holders: Set defib energy level to 30 joules, and simultaneously
press and hold both paddle SHOCK buttons; TEST OK message on Recorder.
E. Recorder
Press RECORDER button; recorder runs. Press again; recorder stops.
Inspect recorder printout
9. Please check the appropriate box after each use of this checklist. Signatures
No action required 1st ____________________
Minor problem(s) corrected
2nd _________-__________
Disposable supplies replaced
Major problem(s) identified — UNIT OUT OF SERVICE 3rd ____________________
Operator’s Shift Checklist for E Series Products (Semiautomatic)
Recommended checks and procedures to be performed at the start of each shift. For more detailed information, see
the E Series Operator’s Guide.
Date_____________________________Location __________________________Unit Serial Number ______________________
1. Condition 1st 2nd 3rd Remarks
Shift Shift Shift
Unit clean, no spills, clear of objects on top, case intact
2. Multi-function Pads
1 set preconnected / 1 spare (check expiration dates)
3. Paddles (if applicable)
Paddles clean, free of gel and contaminants, not pitted
Release from paddle wells easily
4. Inspect cables for cracks, frays, broken wires, connector pins
A. ECG electrode cable, connector
B. Defibrillator paddle cables, paddle handle
C. Multi-function cable, connector
5. Batteries
A. Fully charged battery in unit
B. Fully charged spare battery available
6. Disposable supplies
A. Electrode gel or gel patches
B. MFE Pads in sealed pouches — 2 sets
C. ECG electrodes
D. Recorder paper
E. Alcohol wipes
F. Razors
7. Memory Card
Empty memory card install in unit (if applicable)
8. Operational checks
A. Power On Sequence
Turn unit to ON, 4-beep tone heard
B. Defibrillator
Multi-function cable connected to test connector: CHECK PADS displays.
Press ANALYZE button, unit charges to 30 J
Press and hold SHOCK button, TEST OK is displayed and printed
Attach MFC to ECG Simulator, set to VF
Verify CHECK PATIENT prompt is displayed
Press ANALYZE. Verify unit charges to 120 J
Press SHOCK, verify shock was delivered.
C. Paddles (if applicable) (Manual mode only)
Paddles in holders: Set defib energy level to 30 joules, and simultaneously
press and hold both defib discharge buttons; TEST OK message on recorder.
D. Pacer Operation (Manual mode only)
Multi-function cable not connected to Test Connector
Turn to PACER, set pacer rate to 150 ppm, press RECORDER button
Pacer pulses occur ever 2 large divisions (10 small divisions)
Press 4:1 button, pulses occur every 8 large divisions
Set PACER OUTPUT to 0 mA, no CHECK PADS prompt
Set PACER OUTPUT to 16 mA, CHECK PADS prompt and alarm
Reconnect Multi-function cable to test connector.
Press Clear Pace Alarm softkey; CHECK PADS prompt disappears and Pace
alarm stops.
E. Recorder
Press RECORDER button; recorder runs. Press again; recorder stops.
Inspect recorder printout
9. Please check the appropriate box after each use of this checklist. Signatures
No action required 1st ___________________
Minor problem(s) corrected
2nd __________________
Disposable supplies replaced
Major problem(s) identified — UNIT OUT OF SERVICE 3rd ___________________
SECTION 12
BATTERY MANAGEMENT
Battery Care LOW BATTERY Message

Safe, reliable use of the system requires a well designed Whenever the unit detects a low battery condition, a
battery management program to ensure that adequate LOW BATTERY message is displayed on the monitor
battery power is always available. once every minute, and a 2-beep low battery tone
sounds once every minute or once every 5 minutes. The
ZOLL has developed the ZOLL Battery Management tone emission and frequency are configurable options
Program booklet (9650-0019-01), and the ZOLL that you can set in the System Configuration screen.
SurePower defibrillator battery Operator’s Manual
(9650-0536-01). They include information for This message and beeping persists until just before
determining your particular battery requirements and device shutdown when the unit beeps twice and the
program implementation steps to set up a REPLACE BATTERY prompt appears for approximately
comprehensive, effective, and safe program. 20 seconds.
For safe disposal of batteries and disposable electrodes,

follow your national, state, and local regulations. In
WARNING
addition, to prevent risk of fire or explosion, never
Test batteries regularly. Batteries that do not pass
dispose of the battery in a fire.
ZOLL’s capacity test could unexpectedly shutdown
Battery Life Expectancy without warning.
Lead acid battery packs require full recharging after use.
Repeated short cycle recharging results in reduced
As individual battery capacity diminishes, the amount of
capacity and early battery pack failure. operating time remaining after a LOW BATTERY
message also diminishes. For newer or lesser-used
WARNING batteries, the operating time remaining after this warning
Regular use of partially charged lead acid battery is significantly longer than the operating time remaining
packs without fully recharging between uses results in with batteries having seen more use. In either case, this
permanently reduced capacity and early battery pack warning ultimately leads to defibrillator shut-off. Replace
failure. the battery with a fully-charged battery immediately after
the LOW BATTERY or REPLACE BATTERY prompt
appears.
Frequency of use, number of batteries used for
operation, and the pattern of discharging and recharging Changing the Battery Pack
batteries contribute to the loss of battery charge capacity.
The E Series products are designed for quick removal
Because of this, ZOLL recommends that operators
and replacement of the battery pack.
replace and discard used batteries on a preventive,
scheduled basis. The most effective preventive To remove the battery pack:
replacement interval should be based on anticipated use 1. Turn the unit off.
patterns, battery pack testing results and experience with
2. Insert a finger into the recess at the left end of the
the device in actual operation.
battery pack, and press it against the battery pack to
ZOLL recommends battery replacement every 18 disengage the battery pack locking clip.
months or sooner. 3. Lift the battery pack out.
To install a battery pack
1. Align the tab of the battery pack case with the battery
pack removal finger recess on the top of the unit.
2. Set the battery pack into the battery pack well.
The shape of the battery pack allows the battery pack
to seat itself.
9650-1210-01 Rev. R 12-1

3. Turn the defibrillator back on to the selected mode of installed in the unit. If a fault is detected in the battery,
operation. the fault LED is illuminated and the battery charge level
LEDs are turned off. If the fault LED is not illuminated,
Note: If a battery has been discharged below its safe
the battery charge level LEDs are illuminated as follows:
limit (8.5 V), which could occur during long-term
storage, the battery fault indicator illuminates Number of
when it is installed. In this case, the battery is not LEDs Lit Indicates Remaining Runtime of:
usable; remove it immediately. Replace with a
4 > 90 minutes
fully-charged battery. (In emergency situations,
you can use AC power.) 3 > 60 minutes
If the unit is set to PACER mode, pacing may resume 2 > 30 minutes
immediately after battery replacement. If this is not 1 > 15 minutes
desired, then turn the unit off for more than 10 seconds
0 < 15 minutes
prior to replacing the battery.
When operation of the unit is resumed subsequent to Troubleshooting
battery replacement, you must re-verify the unit’s If your E Series unit displays a BATTERY FAULT XX
settings (for example, alarms, lead, pacing amplitude message, a battery-related fault condition has occurred.
and rate). Attempt to clear the fault by removing and reinstalling the
Charging and Testing Battery Packs battery pack. Replace the battery and contact the ZOLL
Technical Service department if the condition persists.
ZOLL batteries are designed to be charged in the
E Series device or accessory chargers designed for use
with ZOLL devices. ZOLL recommends that you always
have a ZOLL auxiliary battery charger available in order
to charge spare batteries and perform periodic battery
testing; the ZOLL Base Power Charger 4x4 or
SurePower Charger was designed specifically for this
purpose.
With the E Series unit plugged in to AC mains and turned
off, the device recharges the sealed lead acid battery to
greater than 90% capacity within 4 hours, and the
lithium-ion battery pack to greater than 90% capacity in
less than 7 hours. With the E Series unit plugged in and
in use, the device recharges a fully depleted sealed lead
acid battery, or lithium-ion battery pack within 24 hours.
When the E Series products are plugged into AC mains,
the CHARGER ON indicators operate in the following
manner:
• The orange-yellow CHARGER ON indicator
illuminates continuously whenever the device is
turned OFF and charging the battery or turned ON
with a battery installed.
• The green CHARGER ON indicator illuminates
continuously whenever the unit is turned OFF and
the installed battery has been fully charged to present
capacity.
• The green and orange-yellow CHARGER ON
indicators illuminate alternately when no battery is
installed in the unit, or when a battery charging fault
has been detected.
CHARGER ON indicators remain extinguished.
Top Panel Battery LEDs
The top panel of the unit contains 4 LEDs to indicate the
battery charge level and 1 LED to indicate a battery fault.
These LEDs are active only if a SurePower battery is
12-2 9650-1210-01 Rev. R

Battery Management
Achieving Optimal Battery Pack Performance

The following general practices will ensure the longest life from your battery pack:
“Do’s and Don’ts” in using battery packs:
• DO charge battery packs completely.

When a battery pack exchange is required, place a fully charged battery in the unit.
If you use a partially charged battery pack, it may result in a very short monitor/defibrillator run time.
If a partially charged battery pack is used, a full charge is recommended before its next use. Repeated use after
partial charging quickly diminishes the battery pack’s capacity, thereby shortening its life.
Frequent use of partially charged batteries requires reassessment as to whether enough battery packs are in
service.
• DO change Battery Packs when LOW BATTERY warning message appears.

The LOW BATTERY warning ultimately leads to monitor/ defibrillator shut down. As batteries age, the run time
between the LOW BATTERY warning and monitor/ defibrillator shut down progressively diminishes. Older
batteries may provide very little run time between the LOW BATTERY warning and monitor/defibrillator shut
down. Therefore, when the LOW BATTERY warning occurs, install a fully charged battery pack as soon as
possible.
The following figure illustrates the effect of lowered battery capacity on the monitor/ defibrillator operating time
remaining after the LOW BATTERY warning. Figure 1
Time
before
LOW
BATTERY
Run Time warning
Run Time
Low Battery
Low Battery
Time Low Battery
before Low Battery
Low Battery
shut off Low Battery
Low Battery
New Battery Pack Battery Pack That Battery Pack That

Passes Test Fails Test
Age of Battery
Age of Battery Pack
• DO test battery packs regularly.

Your organization must determine and implement an appropriate testing schedule. Adherence to this schedule is
crucial to identifying battery packs that have reached end of life and should be removed from use. Battery packs
subjected to repeated short discharge and charge cycles may lose their capacity quickly. Test the battery packs that
you use this way more frequently.
• DO implement a means of indicating the charge status of battery packs.

It is important to visibly distinguish battery packs that are charged from those that are not. Establish a system for
visually indicating whether a battery pack is charged and ready for use or is in need of charging. ZOLL can provide
you with battery pack status labels for this purpose, or you can use labels or methods of your own.
9650-1210-01 Rev. R 12-3

• DO exchange your battery packs regularly.

Battery packs should be exchanged once per shift or once per day depending on their use.
• DO carry a fully charged spare battery pack at all times.
 DON’T remove a partially charged battery pack from the battery charger.
If a partially charged battery pack is used, a full charge is recommended before its next use. Repeated use after
partial charging may quickly diminish the battery’s capacity, thereby shortening its life.
 DON’T store battery packs in a fully discharged state.

Battery pack capacity diminishes if left in a fully discharged state for extended periods.
 DON’T assume that a shift check of the monitor/defibrillator verifies adequate battery pack run time.
Your Monitor/Defibrillator should be tested daily to verify the readiness of the device. This test, however, does not
verify adequate charge state or capacity of the battery pack and may leave the monitor/defibrillator with inadequate
run time.
If the device shows a LOW BATTERY warning during testing, replace the depleted battery pack with a fully charged
one, and recharge the depleted battery pack.
 DON’T charge battery packs at temperature extremes.

ZOLL recommends charging battery packs at or near normal room temperature (15°C to 35°C or 59°F to 95°F).
12-4 9650-1210-01 Rev. R

SECTION 13
TROUBLESHOOTING GUIDELINES
The troubleshooting guidelines provided on the following pages are intended for use by non-technical medical
personnel during device operation. This section addresses many of the common problems or questions that may arise
during operation.
If trouble persists after consulting this guide, contact the appropriate technical personnel or ZOLL Technical Service
Department. A more detailed troubleshooting guide is found in the E Series Service Manual.
Monitor
Symptom Recommended Action
Unit does not turn on or unexpectedly shuts off. • Check that battery pack is properly installed.
• Verify the unit is plugged into AC power.
• Replace battery pack with a fully charged battery pack.
• If the internal lithium battery that powers the Real Time
Clock is fully depleted, the unit will not power up unless
connected to mains power. Qualified service personnel
can consult the E Series Service Manual for instructions
on replacing the internal battery. You can also contact
the ZOLL Technical Service Department for assistance.
Unit displays the X FAULT XX message. • A fault has been detected.

• Attempt to clear the X FAULT XX message by turning
the selector switch to OFF then back to the desired
operating mode. Note: Some settings (e.g. alarm
settings, lead selection, ECG size) may need to be
restored.
Unit displays the SET CLOCK or CLOCK FAULT • Set time and date information (see “Setting Time and
prompt. Date” on page 11-5).
• Have qualified service personnel verify that the internal
battery has been replaced within the last 5 years, or
contact the ZOLL Technical Service Department for
assistance.
Note: Note: If the internal battery becomes fully depleted,
the unit will not power up unless plugged into AC
mains.
Unit displays the ECG LEAD OFF or the POOR LEAD • Ensure that the ECG cable is connected to patient and
CONTACT message. unit.
• Check that ECG electrodes are making good contact
and not dried out.
• If changing from 5-lead wire ECG patient cable to 3-lead
ECG patient cable, make sure to turn the unit OFF for at
least 10 seconds.
• Replace ECG cable.
9650-1210-01 Rev. R 13-1

Unit displays the TIME SYNCHRONIZATION • More than two weeks have elapsed since the clock was
REQUIRED message on power down. last synchronized. Synchronize the clock as described
in “Setting Time and Date” on page 11-5.”
Unit displays the CABLE FAULT or PADDLE FAULT • Check the connection between the Multifunction cable
message. and the MFE pads.
• Remove the CPRD-to-MFC connector, if in use, and
plug the multifunction cable directly into the
CPR-D-padz.
• Remove the multifunction cable PADS from the
AutoPulse Plus, if in use, and plug the multifunction
cable directly into the electrode pads.
Noisy ECG, artifact, wandering baseline • Consider 1 – 21Hz filter bandwidth (see E Series
Configuration Guide).
• Prepare the patient’s skin prior to electrode attachment.
• Check for proper adhesion of electrodes to patient.
• Reduce or eliminate ECG artifact due to electrode or
patient cable movement.
• Route cables so that they don’t pull on electrodes or
swing excessively.
• Ensure patient is motionless.
• Check for possible excessive radio frequency
interference.
Poor ECG signal level observed with normal calibration • Select another lead.
pulse. • Apply new electrodes using different placement.
Inconsistent QRS beep or heart rate is observed. • Increase beeper volume.

• Select another lead.
• Alter ECG electrode placement and/or use new
electrode.
Sync marker is absent or inconsistent with QRS • Ensure device is in SYNC mode.
waveform on display and stripchart. • Change ECG lead selection.
• Alter ECG electrode placement and/or use new
electrode.
• Ensure paper is at least 90 mm wide.
13-2 9650-1210-01 Rev. R

Troubleshooting Guidelines
Recorder
Unit displays the CHECK RECORDER prompt. • Ensure the recorder door is shut properly.
• Ensure adequate paper supply in recorder paper tray
(see “Changing Recorder Paper” on page 11-4).
• Remove paper, check paper type, check recorder for
paper jam, and then reload paper.
Recorder makes stuttering sound when activated. • Check recorder for paper jam.
Light or poor quality printing is observed. • Ensure correct paper type (ZOLL P/N 8000-0300) is in
use.
• Ensure paper is installed grid-side against recorder print
head.
• Ensure that door is latched shut properly. You must
listen for clicks on both corners of the door when
latching the door shut.
• Clean recorder print head (see “Cleaning the Recorder
Printhead” on page 11-1).
Summary report does not print when you press • Wait 15 seconds and try again. (The unit requires 15
SUMMARY button. seconds after an event occurs to finish storing a record
of the event. A summary report cannot be printed during
this time.)
9650-1210-01 Rev. R 13-3

Pacer (Pacer version only)
Unit displays the CHECK PADS prompt. • Ensure MFE Pads are connected to Multi-Function
cable.
• Ensure electrode gel is not dry. Replace MFE Pads if
necessary.
• Ensure good electrode-to-patient contact.
• Check integrity of Multi-Function cable by plugging into
test connector. CHECK PADS prompt should disappear.
No pacing marker ( ) present on the ECG trace. • Ensure unit is in PACER mode.
• Ensure PACER RATE (ppm) is set greater than patient
heart rate.
No ventricular capture beat after pacing marker is seen • Check patient’s pulse.
on ECG display. • Increase output current (mA).
• Ensure MFE Pads are making good contact with the
patient, or review MFE pad placement.
• Select different ECG lead configuration.
Patient receives intermittent pacing stimulus during • Ensure proper ECG electrode connection and
standby pacing. placement. If ECG lead wire comes off, pacer
automatically paces asynchronously.
• Check ECG cable for damage.
• Patient R-to-R interval varying. Pace rate close to
patient rate. Verify rate is set appropriately.
Heart rate display reads 0 with proper pacing capture • Check patient’s pulse.
displayed on ECG trace. • Select different ECG Lead configuration.
Bedside/Central Station/Telemetry ECG display • Patient monitor ECG inputs overloaded by pacer
becomes erratic when pacing. signals. ECG can only be monitored by the device while
pacing.
13-4 9650-1210-01 Rev. R

Defibrillator
Excessive artifact when using paddles as ECG source. • Ensure PADDLES is selected.
• Firmly press paddles against patient skin.
• Use gel on paddles.
• Clean paddle surface.
• Check and clean between adult and pediatric shoe.
• Check cable for damage.
• Use MFE electrodes for ECG analysis.
Defibrillator will not charge (energy level does not • Check SHOCK button(s) on paddles or front panel are
increment on display). not stuck on.
• Replace battery with a fully charged battery pack.
Charge time to 200 J exceeds 10 seconds. • Typical in a low battery condition (up to 20 seconds)
• Change battery pack.
• Plug device into AC power.
• Install fully charged battery pack.
Energy does not discharge when you press SHOCK • 60 seconds have elapsed in Manual mode since initial
button(s). charge ready. Energy was internally discharged.
• 15 seconds have elapsed in automatic mode since
initial charge ready. Energy was internally discharged.
• Device is in SYNC mode and no QRS complex is
detected.
• Energy internally discharged because energy selection
was changed during charge or after the device was
ready.
• Unit not completely charged when you pressed SHOCK
button(s). Wait for DEFIB XXXJ READY message and
ready tone.
• Press and hold SHOCK button(s) until energy is
delivered to the patient.
• Device is connected to the AutoPulse Plus and no
relaxation period of the compression cycle has been
detected yet.
Unit is unable to SHOCK when in SYNC mode. • Ensure SYNC XXXJ SEL message is displayed on
monitor.
• Check for SYNC marker above R wave. If not present,
change ECG size, lead selection, or electrode
placement.
• Press and hold SHOCK button(s) until energy is
delivered to the patient.
• Alter ECG electrode placement.
• Make sure ECG signals are displayed.
9650-1210-01 Rev. R 13-5

No energy delivery to patient is apparent. • Under certain circumstances, some patients do not
twitch when energy is delivered.
• Perform defibrillator self test as described in “General
Maintenance” on page 11-1.
• Check for CHECK PADS and POOR PAD CONTACT
messages alternating on the monitor.
• If Multi-Function electrodes are used, ensure proper
placement and contact.
Unit displays PADDLE FAULT message when • Discharge energy internally by changing the energy
connected to the AutoPulse Plus. selection.
• Disconnect the Multi-Function Cable and PADS from the
AutoPulse Plus, and connect the Multi-Function Cable
directly to the PADS.
Unit displays the CHECK PADS prompt. • Verify proper Multi-Function Cable/MFE Pad connection
by disconnecting and reconnecting the Multi-Function
cable and MFE Pads.
• Ensure proper contact of Multi-Function Pads and that
the patient does not have excessive hair beneath the
electrodes.
• If message persists, disconnect Multi-Function cable
from MFE Pads and plug cable into test connector.
CHECK PADS prompt should change to DEFIB PAD
SHORT (Manual mode only).
• If test fails, try using paddles to defibrillate.
Unit displays the USE PADS prompt. • The ECG analysis function operates only when MFE
pads are attached to the patient. You must either:
• Disconnect paddle and connect MFE Pads for use in
Semiautomatic defibrillation.
• Activate Manual mode to use paddles.
Unit displays the NOISY ECG or the • Check for proper application and adhesion of Multi-
RETRY ANALYSIS prompt. Function electrodes.
• Check to make sure that nobody is touching the patient
and that the patient is motionless.
Unit displays the ECG TOO LARGE, or the RETRY • Press ANALYZE button again to begin analysis.
ANALYSIS prompt.
No TEST OK message appears when performing a • Check to make sure unit is set to 30 Joules.
defibrillator self-test. • If testing with Multi-Function Cable, make sure that
cable is firmly inserted into test connector.
• If testing with paddles, make sure to press the paddles
firmly against the sides of the unit while discharging.
Unit displays the DEFIB MAINT. REQUIRED message. • Contact ZOLL Technical Service Department.
Unit displays a DEFIB FAULT XX message. • If problem persists, contact ZOLL Technical Service
Department.
13-6 9650-1210-01 Rev. R

AC Charger
The green and orange-yellow CHARGER ON indicators • Verify battery is installed.

illuminate alternately. • Turn unit ON to identify the fault condition.
• Replace battery pack with a fully charged battery pack.
• If problem persists, replace battery pack, unplug device
from AC mains and plug device back into AC mains.
Unit displays the LOW BATTERY message when it is • Replace battery pack with a fully charged battery pack.
plugged into AC mains. • Unplug device from AC mains and plug device back into
AC mains.
• Verify AC mains is working properly.
None of the CHARGER ON indicators are illuminated • Unplug device from AC mains and plug device back into
when the device is plugged into AC mains. AC mains.
• Verify AC mains is working properly.
9650-1210-01 Rev. R 13-7


APPENDIX A
SPECIFICATIONS
General
Size 5.75 in. high x 13.1 in. wide x 10.5 in. deep
14.6 cm high x 33.3 cm wide x 26.7 cm deep
Weight Approximately 13.2 lbs (5.99 kg)
Power 5 cells, 2 V/cell; wired in series (sealed lead acid battery pack)
3 cells, 4.2 V/cell; wired in series (lithium-ion battery pack)
AC Power 100-120V ~ 50/60 Hz, 220-240V ~ 50 Hz, 220 VA
DC Input (Optional) 10-29 V. 130 W
Device Classification Class I and internally powered per IEC 60601-1.

Class II and internally powered per IEC 60601-1 (DC input ONLY).
Design Standards Meets or exceeds UL 60601-1, AAMI DF-80, IEC 60601-2-4, EN 60601-2-25, and
EN 60601-2-27.
Patient Safety All patient connections are electrically isolated.
Environmental
Temperature: Operating: 0C to 55C (32F to 131F)

Storage Temperature: -20 to 60C (-4F to 140F)
Note: The E Series device may not perform to specifications when stored at the upper or
lower extreme limits of storage temperature and immediately put into use.
Humidity: 5 to 95% relative humidity, non-condensing
Vibration: Mil-Std-810F, Minimum Integrity Test
Shock: IEC 68-2-27, 100 g 6 mS half sine
Operating Pressure: 594 to 1060 mBar
Material Ingress: IP34 per EN 60601-1
Electromagnetic CISPR 11 Class B - Radiated and Conducted Emissions

Compatibility (EMC): CISPR 11 Class A - Radiated and Conducted Emissions (DC input only)
Electromagnetic AAMI DF-80, IEC 61000-4-3 to 10 V/m

Immunity
Electrostatic Discharge AAMI DF-80, IEC 61000-4-2
Conducted IEC 61000-4-4, IEC 61000-4-5, IEC 61000-4-6

Susceptibility
9650-1210-01 Rev. R A-1

Pacemaker (Pacer version)

Type VVI demand; asynchronous (fixed rate) when used without ECG leads or in ASYNC pacing
mode
Pulse Type Rectilinear, constant current
Pulse Shape and Rectilinear, 40 milliseconds ±2 milliseconds

Duration
Pulse Amplitude Variable 0 mA to 140 mA ±5% or 5 mA, whichever is greater

Digitally displayed on the monitor (increments or decrements by a value of 2 mA)
Pacing Rate Variable from 30 ppm to 180 ppm ±1.5% (increments or decrements by a value of 2 ppm)
Output protection Fully defibrillator protected and isolated
Multi-Function Specifically designed adult anterior/posterior pre-gelled ZOLL MFE Pads and
Electrode (MFE) Multi-Function stat-padz packaged in pairs
Pads
Defibrillator
Waveform Rectilinear Biphasic
Energy Selection Adult Mode: Selectable at 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10, 15, 20, 30, 50, 70, 85, 100, 120, 150,
200 J
(Delivered into 50  load).
Selected using controls on sternum paddles or unit front panel.
Charge Time • Less than 6 seconds with a new, fully charged battery (first 15 charges to 200 joules).
Depleted batteries result in a longer defibrillator charge time.
• Less than 15 seconds when operating without a battery, using AC power alone at 90% of
the rated mains voltage.
• Less than 15 seconds with a new, fully charged battery pack, depleted by up to 15 200
Joule discharges.
• Less than 25 seconds from the initial power on, with a new, fully charged battery pack,
depleted by up to 15 200 Joule discharges.
• Less than 25 seconds from the initial power on when operating without a battery, using AC
power alone at 90% of the rated mains voltage.
• Less than 30 seconds from initiation of rhythm analysis (Semiautomatic mode) with a new,
fully charged battery pack, depleted by up to 15 200 Joule discharges.
• Less than 30 seconds from initiation of rhythm analysis (Semiautomatic mode) when
operating without a battery, using AC power alone at 90% or greater of the rated mains
voltage.
• Less than 40 seconds from initial power on (Semiautomatic mode) with a new, fully
charged battery pack, depleted by up to 15 200 Joule discharges.
• Less than 40 seconds from initial power on (Semiautomatic mode) when operating without
a battery, using AC power alone at 90% or greater of the rated mains voltage.
Patient Impedance Minimum: 15 oms

Range Maximum: 250 ohms
Energy Display Monitor display indicates both selected and delivered energy.
Synchronized Mode Synchronizes defibrillator pulse to patient’s R-wave. SYNC message displayed on monitor.
Marker on display and recorder paper identifies R-wave discharge point. Meets the
DF-80:2003 requirement of 60ms maximum time delay between sync pulse and delivery of
energy, where the ECG is derived via an applied part, once the output has been activated.
Charge Controls Control on apex paddle and on device front panel.
A-2 9650-1210-01 Rev. R

Paddles Standard apex/sternum adult and pediatric.
Adult paddles slide off to expose pediatric paddles.
Multi-Function Specifically designed adult anterior/posterior pregelled ZOLL MFE Pads and
Electrode (MFE) Multi-Function stat-padz packaged in pairs.
Pads
Built-in Defibrillator Provides verification of the defibrillator charging and discharging without removing paddles
Tester from storage wells or verification of unit configured with Multi-Function Cable.
Multi-Function Range: 0 ohms - 250 ohms

Electrode Accuracy: ±10% or 5 ohms, whichever is greater.
Impedance
Measurement
Defibrillation Evaluates electrode connection and patient ECG to determine if defibrillation is required.
Advisory
Shockable Rhythms: Ventricular fibrillation with amplitude > 100 V and wide complex
ventricular tachycardia with rates greater than 150 bpm. Refer to the ECG Analysis Algorithm
Accuracy section for sensitivity and specificity performance.
ECG Monitoring
Patient Connection 3-lead ECG cable, 5-lead wire ECG cable, paddles or MFE Pads. Selectable by front panel
switch.
Input Protection Fully defibrillator-protected. Special circuit prevents distortion of ECG by pacer pulse. (Pacer
version only).
Implanted Dedicated circuitry detects most implanted pacemaker spikes and provides standard display
Pacemaker Spike marker of spike on ECG trace.
Display
Implanted Pulses ±2mV to ±700mV, 0.1ms to 2ms width, with a recharge constant of 0 to 100ms.
Detected
Note: The pacemaker pulse rejection capability for the E Series with pacemaker pulses
alone includes pulses between ±2mV and ±700mV amplitude, with widths between
0.1ms and 2ms, without overshoot, and between ±100mV and ±500mV, with widths
between 0.1ms and 2ms, with overshoot from 4 to 100ms.
The pacemaker pulse rejection capability for the E Series with pacemaker pulses and a
normally paced QRS and T wave includes pulses between ±2mV and ±700mV
amplitude, with widths between 0.1ms and 2ms, without overshoot, and between ±2mV
and ±500mV, with widths between 0.1ms and 2ms, with overshoot from 4 to 100ms.
The pacemaker pulse rejection capability for the E Series with pacemaker pulses with an
ineffectively paced QRS pattern includes pulses between ±100mV and ±700mV
amplitude, with widths between 0.1ms and 2ms, without overshoot, and between
±100mV and ±500mV, with widths between 0.1ms and 2ms, with overshoot from 4 to
100ms.
The E Series is not capable of rejecting A-V Sequential pacemaker pulses.
Bandwidth 0.67 Hz - 21 Hz (-3 dB) standard/0.05 Hz - 150 Hz Diagnostic

0.67 Hz - 27 Hz and 1 Hz - 21 Hz user-configurable
Lead Selection Displayed on monitor
ECG Size 0.5, 1, 1.5, 2, 3 cm/mV (Centimeter per millivolt) display on monitor
Heart Rate Digital display

Range: 0 bpm - 300 bpm
Accuracy: ±5%
9650-1210-01 Rev. R A-3

Heart Rate Alarm Screen icon indicates activated/deactivated status. User-selectable.

Tachycardia 60 bpm - 280 bpm, bradycardia 20 bpm - 100 bpm
Tall T-wave 1.0 mV

Rejection
Heart Rate The E Series averages the interval between the last 5 detected beats. On startup, the
Averaging E Series averages the rate between detected beats once two beats are detected, until a full 5
beats have been received. The rate is updated every beat. After this condition is met, the
meter is updated every beat with an average of the last 5 beats.
If a period of time greater than 5 seconds elapses without a beat detected, the heart rate
meter reports a rate of 0 bpm, which is repeated every 5 seconds.
Accuracy and Averaging over 5 R-R intervals, per AAMI EC 13:2002:

Response Time to
• Ventricular Bigeminy (Figure 3a) - 40 bpm
Irregular Rhythm
• Slow alternating ventricular bigeminy (Figure 3b) - 60 bpm
• Rapid alternating ventricular bigeminy (Figure 3c) - 120 bpm
• Bidirectional systoles (Figure 3d) - 90 bpm
Response Time to 80 to 120 bpm: 4 seconds

Change in Heart 80 to 40 bpm: 4 seconds
Rate
Time to Alarm for 206 bpm (1 mV): 4.80 seconds

Tachycardia 206 bpm (halved amplitude): 9.90 seconds
206 bpm (doubled amplitude): 4.00 seconds
195 bpm (2 mV): 4.20 seconds
195 bpm (halved amplitude): 8.00 seconds
195 bpm (doubled amplitude): 4.00 seconds
Leads Off Sensing A DC current of 0.04 A per lead wire is supplied to the patient.
Active Noise The sum of all leadwire currents is returned via the active noise suppression leadwire:
Suppression
• 0.08 A DC in 3 lead mode
1 Volt ECG Out 1.0 Volt/cm (volt per centimeter) of deflection on stripchart recorder
< 25 ms delay from patient ECG input
Bandwidth 150 Hz
Output impedance = 250 ohms
Internal pacemaker pulses represented as on display
ECG x 1000 provided at rear connector panel via a standard 3.5 mm mono jack. ECG signal
is on tip; ground is on ring
Display Format Non-fade moving bar display
CPR Monitoring
Compression Depth 0.75 to 3 inches ±0.25 inches
1.9 to 7.6 cm ±0.6 cm
Compression Rate 50 to 150 compressions per minute
A-4 9650-1210-01 Rev. R

Display
Screen Type High resolution, color liquid crystal display (LCD)
Screen Size 5.63 inches (14.3 cm) diagonally
Sweep Speed 25 mm/s
Viewing Time 4 seconds
Messages ERASING REPORT, INSERT CARD, CARD FULL, REPLACE BATTERY, LOW BATTERY,
PERFORM CPR, ECG TOO LARGE, NOISY ECG, RETRY ANALYSIS, CHECK PATIENT,
ANALYSIS HALTED, PRESS ANALYZE, NO SHOCK ADV., CHECK PULSE,
SHOCK ADVISED, PRESS CHARGE, SELECT PADS, SELECT ECG LEADS,
SELECT DEFIB MODE, VF ALARMS OFF, DISABLE SYNC, ANALYSIS RESTARTED,
CHECK PADS, POOR PAD CONTACT, DEFIB PAD SHORT, PADDLE FAULT,
ECG LEAD OFF, USE PADDLE DISCHG, OPEN AIR DISCHARGE, CANNOT CHARGE,
RELEASE SHOCK, PRESS SHOCK, TEST OK, TEST FAILED, PACER DISABLED,
DEFIB DISABLED, SET PACE MA, SET PACE RATE, CHECK RECORDER,
ANALYZING ECG, FULLY RELEASE.
Recorder
Paper 80 mm thermal (grid width)
90 mm (paper width)
Speed 25 mm/s or 50 mm/s (apparent), configurable for 12 lead output
Delay 6 seconds
Annotations Time, date, defib energy, heat rate, pacer output (Pacer version only), QRS sync marker,
ECG SIZE, lead, alarm, DEFIB TEST OK/FAIL, ANALYZE ECG, PADS OFF, ANALYSIS
HALTED, NOISY ECG, SHOCK ADVISED, NO SHOCK ADVISED, ECG TOO LARGE, and
diagnostic bandwidth.
Printing Method High resolution, thermal array print head
Print out Modes Manual or automatic; user-configurable
On/Off Control Front panel and paddle
Automatic Function 15 second recording initiated by alarm activation or defibrillator discharge
PCMCIA Card
Capacity Standard Series II Flash card - 8, 16, or 32 Mb
Audio Recording Digital compressed audio data
Battery Packs
Type Rechargeable, sealed lead acid Lithium ion
Weight 1 kg (2.2 lbs) 0.68 kg (1.5 lbs)
Voltage 2 Volts per cell; 5 cells wired in series 4.2 Volts per cell; 3 cells wired in series
Recharge Time 4 hours or less with integral charger 7 hours or less with integral charger
(to 90% capacity)
9650-1210-01 Rev. R A-5

Operating Time For a new, fully charged battery pack at For a new, fully charged battery pack at
20 °C: (68F) 20 °C: (68F)
• 40 defibrillator discharges at maximum • 100 defibrillator discharges at maximum
energy (200 J), or energy (200 J), or
• 2.75 hours of continuous ECG • 4.25 hours of continuous ECG
monitoring, or monitoring, or
• 2.25 hours of continuous ECG • 3.75 hours of continuous ECG
monitoring/pacing at 60 mA, 80 beats per monitoring/pacing at 60 mA, 80 beats
minute. per minute.
Standby Life: one month before retest and

recharge.
Note: Each monitoring option added to the E Series device decreases the Operating Time
that can be obtained from a fully charged battery. Refer to the individual option insert
for the operating run time specific to your device. For further details specific to your
device, contact the ZOLL Technical Service Department.
Low Battery Message is displayed on the monitor and a 2-beep, low battery tone sounds once a minute
Indicators until just before shutdown, when it beeps twice every 2 seconds. The time from display of
the LOW BATTERY or REPLACE BATTERY prompt until the instrument shuts down varies
depending upon the battery age and condition.
A-6 9650-1210-01 Rev. R

Guidance and Manufacturer’s Declaration — Electromagnetic Emissions
The E Series unit is intended for use in the electromagnetic environment specified below. Ensure that the E Series unit
is used in such an environment.
Emissions Test Compliance Electromagnetic Environment — Guidance

RF emissions Group 1 The E Series unit uses RF energy only for its internal func-
CISPR11 tion. Therefore, its RF emissions are very low and are not
likely to cause any interference in nearby electronic equip-
ment.
RF emissions Class B The E Series unit is suitable for use in all establishments,
CISPR 11 including domestic establishments and those directly con-
nected to the public low-voltage power supply network that
supplies buildings used for domestic purposes.
Class A Class A equipment is equipment suitable for use in all estab-
lishments other than domestic and those directly connected
to a low voltage power supply network which supplies build-
ings used for domestic purposes.
Harmonic Emission Class A
IEC 61000-3-2
Voltage Fluctuations/ Complies
Flicker Emission
IEC 61000-3-3
Medical Electrical Equipment needs special precautions regarding EMC and needs to be installed and put into ser-
vice according to EMC information provided in this document.
9650-1210-01 Rev. R A-7

Electromagnetic Immunity Declaration (EID)

Immunity Test IEC 60601 Test Level Compliance Level Electromagnetic Environ-
ment — Guidance
Electrostatic discharge ± 6 kV contact ± 6 kV contact Floors should be wood, con-
(ESD) ± 8 kV air ± 8 kV air crete or ceramic tile. If floors are
IEC 61000-4-2 covered with synthetic material,
the relative humidity should be
at least 30%.
Electrical fast ± 2 kV for power supply ± 2 kV for power supply Mains power quality should be
transient/burst lines lines that of a typical commercial or
IEC 61000-4-4 ± 1 kV for input/output Not applicable hospital environment.
lines
Surge ± 1 kV differential mode ± 1 kV differential mode Mains power quality should be
IEC 61000-4-5 ± 2 kV for common ± 2 kV for common that of a typical commercial or
mode mode hospital environment.
Voltage dips, short <5% UT (>95% dip in UT) <5% UT (>95% dip in UT) Mains power quality should be
interruptions and volt- for 0.5 cycle for 0.5 cycle that of a typical commercial or
age variations on power hospital environment. If the user
40% UT (60% dip in UT) 40% UT (60% dip in UT)
supply input lines of the E Series unit requires
for 5 cycles for 5 cycles
IEC 61000-4-11 continued operation during
70% UT (30% dip in UT) 70% UT (30% dip in UT) power mains interruptions, it is
for 25 cycles for 25 cycles recommended that the E Series
<5% UT (>95% dip in UT) <5% UT (>95% dip in UT) unit be powered by an uninter-
for 5 sec. for 5 sec. ruptible power supply or a bat-
tery.
Power frequency 3 A/m 3 A/m Power frequency magnetic
(50/60 Hz) magnetic fields should be at levels char-
field acteristic of a typical location in
IEC 61000-4-8 a typical commercial or hospital
environment.
Note: UT is the AC mains voltage prior to application of the test level.
A-8 9650-1210-01 Rev. R

EID for Life-Support Functions
The life-support functionsa of the E Series unit are intended for use in the electromagnetic environment specified
below. Ensure that the E Series unit is used in such an environment.
Immunity Test IEC 60601 Test Level Compliance Level Electromagnetic Environment — Guidance
Portable and mobile RF communications equip-
ment should be used no closer to any part of the
E Series unit, including cables, than the recom-
mended separation distance calculated from the
equation applicable to the frequency of the trans-
mitter.
Recommended Separation Distance
Conducted RF 3 Vrms 3 Vrms d = 1.2 P
IEC 61000-4-6 150 kHz to 80 MHz
outside ISM bandsb
10 Vrms 10 Vrms d = 1.2 P
150 kHz to 80 MHz
in ISM bandsb
Radiated RF 10 V/m 10 V/m d = 1.2 P 80 MHz to 800 MHz

IEC 61000-4-3 80 MHz to 2.5 GHz
d = 2.3 P 800 MHz to 2.5 GHz
where P is the maximum output power rating of
the transmitter in watts (W) according to the
transmitter manufacturer, and d is the recom-
mended separation distance in meters (m).c
Field strengths from fixed RF transmitters, as
determined by an electromagnetic site survey,d
should be less than the compliance level in each
frequency range.e
Interference may occur in the vicinity
of equipment marked with the follow-
ing symbol:
NOTE 1 At 80 MHz, the higher frequency range applies.
NOTE 2 These guidelines may not apply in all situations. Electromagnetic propagation is affected by absorption and
reflection from structures, objects and people.
a The life-support functions on the E Series unit are pacing and defibrillation.
bThe ISM (industrial, scientific, and medical) bands between 150 KHz and 80 MHz are 6.765 MHz to 6.795 MHz;
13.553 MHz to 13.567 MHz; 26.957 MHz to 27.283 MHz; and 40.66 MHz to 40.70 MHz.
c The compliance levels in the ISM frequency bands between 150 kHz and 80 MHz and in the frequency range
80 MHz to 2.5 GHz are intended to decrease the likelihood that mobile/portable communications equipment could
cause interference if it is inadvertently brought into patient areas. For this reason, an additional factor of 10/3 is used
in calculating the recommended separation distance for transmitters in these frequency ranges.
dField strengths from fixed transmitters, such as base stations for radio (cellular/cordless) telephones and land
mobile radios, amateur radio, AM and FM radio broadcast and TV broadcast cannot be predicted theoretically with
accuracy. To assess the electromagnetic environment due to fixed RF transmitters, an electromagnetic site survey
should be considered. If the measured field strength in the location in which the E Series unit is used exceeds the
applicable RF compliance level above, the E Series unit should be observed to verify normal operation. If abnormal
performance is observed, additional measures may be necessary, such as reorienting or relocating the E Series unit.
e
Over the frequency range 150 kHz to 80 MHz, field strengths should be less than 10 V/m.
9650-1210-01 Rev. R A-9

Recommended Separation Distances from RF Equipment for E Series Life-Support

Functions
The life-support functionsa of the E Series unit is intended for use in an environment in which radiated RF disturbances
are controlled. You can help prevent electromagnetic interference by maintaining a minimum distance between
portable and mobile RF communications equipment (transmitters) and the E Series unit as recommended below,
according to the maximum output power of the communications equipment.
Rated Maximum Separation Distance According to Frequency of Transmitter (m)

Output Power of 150 kHz to 80 MHz 150 kHz to 80 MHz 80 MHz to 800 MHz 800 MHz to 2.5 GHz
Transmitter outside ISM bands in ISM bands
(W)
d = 1.2 P d = 1.2 P d = 1.2 P d = 2.3 P
0.01 0.12 0.12 0.12 0.23
0.1 0.38 0.38 0.38 0.73
1 1.2 1.2 1.2 2.3
10 3.79 3.79 3.8 7.3
100 12 12 12 23
For transmitters rated at a maximum output power not listed above, the recommended separation distance d in
meters (m) can be determined using the equation applicable to the frequency of the transmitter, where P is the max-
imum output power rating of the transmitter in watts (W) according to the transmitter manufacturer.
NOTE 1 At 80 MHz and 800 MHz, the separation distance for the higher frequency range applies.
NOTE 2 The ISM (industrial, scientific and medical) bands between 150 kHz and 80 MHz are 6.765 MHz to 6.795
MHz; 13.553 MHz to 13.567 MHz; 26.957 MHz to 27.283 MHz; and 40.66 MHz to 40.70 MHz.
NOTE 3 An additional factor of 10/3 is used in calculating the recommended separation distance for transmitters in
the ISM frequency bands between 150 kHz and 80 MHz and in the frequency range 80 MHz to 2.5 GHz to decrease
the likelihood that mobile/portable communications equipment could cause interference if it is inadvertently brought
into patient areas.
a The life-support functions on the E Series unit are defined to be any function associated with Pacing and Defibrilla-
tion. Specifically, these functions include, but are not limited to, the pacing pulse output and defibrillation energy dis-
charge.
A-10 9650-1210-01 Rev. R

EID for Non-Life-Support Functions
The non-life-support functionsa of the E Series unit are intended for use in the electromagnetic environment specified
below. Ensure that the unit is used in such an environment.
Immunity Test IEC 60601 Test Level Compliance Level Electromagnetic Environment — Guidance
Portable and mobile RF communications equip-
ment should be used no closer to any part of the
E Series unit, including cables, than the recom-
mended separation distance calculated from the
equation applicable to the frequency of the trans-
mitter.
Recommended Separation Distance
Conducted RF 3 Vrms 3 Vrms d = 1.2 P
IEC 61000-4-6 150 kHz to 80 MHz
Radiated RF 3 V/m 10 V/m d = 0.35 P 80 MHz to 800 MHz

IEC 61000-4-3 80 MHz to 2.5 GHz
d = 0.7 P 800 MHz to 2.5 GHz
where P is the maximum output power rating of
the transmitter in watts (W) according to the
transmitter manufacturer, and d is the recom-
mended separation distance in meters (m).
Field strengths from fixed RF transmitters, as
determined by an electromagnetic site survey,b
should be less than the compliance level in each
frequency range.c
Interference may occur in the vicinity
of equipment marked with the follow-
ing symbol:
NOTE 1 At 80 MHz, the higher frequency range applies.
a
The non-life-support functions on the E Series unit are defined to be any function not listed as a life-support function
in the “EID for Life Support Functions” table (Note a).
b
Field strengths from fixed transmitters, such as base stations for radio (cellular/cordless) telephones and land
mobile radios, amateur radio, AM and FM radio broadcast and TV broadcast cannot be predicted theoretically with
accuracy. To assess the electromagnetic environment due to fixed RF transmitters, an electromagnetic site survey
should be considered. If the measured field strength in the location in which the E Series unit is used exceeds the
applicable RF compliance level above, the E Series unit should be observed to verify normal operation. If abnormal
performance is observed, additional measures may be necessary, such as reorienting or relocating the E Series unit.
c
Over the frequency range 150 kHz to 80 MHz, field strengths should be less than 3 V/m.
9650-1210-01 Rev. R A-11


Non-Life-Support Functions
The non-life-support functionsa of the E Series unit is intended for use in an environment in which radiated RF
disturbances are controlled. You can help prevent electromagnetic interference by maintaining a minimum distance
between portable and mobile RF communications equipment (transmitters) and the E Series unit as recommended
below, according to the maximum output power of the communications equipment.
Rated Maximum Output Power of Separation Distance According to Frequency of Transmitter

Transmitter (m)
(W) 150 kHz to 80 MHz 80 MHz to 800 MHz 800 MHz to 2.5 GHz
d = 1.2 P d = 0.35 P d = 0.7 P
0.01 0.12 0.035 0.07
0.1 0.38 0.111 0.22
1 1.2 0.35 0.7
10 3.8 1.11 2.2
100 12 3.5 7.0
For transmitters rated at a maximum output power not listed above, the recommended separation distance d in
meters (m) can be determined using the equation applicable to the frequency of the transmitter, where P is the
maximum output power rating of the transmitter in watts (W) according to the transmitter manufacturer.
NOTE 1 At 80 MHz and 800 MHz, the separation distance for the higher frequency range applies.
a
The non-life-support functions on the E Series unit are defined to be any function not listed as a life-support function
in the “EID for Life Support Functions” table (Note a). Specifically, these functions are noninvasive blood pressure
(NIBP), end-tidal CO2 (EtCO2), and SpO2.
A-12 9650-1210-01 Rev. R

Rectilinear Biphasic Waveform Characteristics
The following table shows the Rectilinear Biphasic™ waveform’s characteristics when discharged into 25 ohm, 50
ohm, 100 ohm, and 125 ohm loads at a maximum energy setting of 200 Joules.
Discharged Discharged Discharged Discharged

into 25 Load into 50 Load into 100 Load into 125 Load
IMAX01 =First Phase Maximum Initial Current 31A 27A 22A 18A
IAVG01 =First Phase Average Current 27A 24A 17A 15A
TD 01 =First Phase Duration 6 ms 6 ms 6 ms 6 ms
TINTD = Interphase duration between first and 150 s 150 s 150 s 150 s
second phases.
IMAX02 = Second Phase Maximum Initial 32A 19A 13A 12A

Current
IAVG02 =Second Phase Average Current 17A 14A 11A 10A
TD 02 =Second Phase Duration 4 ms 4 ms 4 ms 4 ms
The efficacy of ZOLL's Rectilinear Biphasic waveform has been clinically verified during a ventricular fibrillation (VF)
and ventricular tachycardia (VT) defibrillation study. This study (which was conducted using ZOLL M Series
defibrillators) and the findings are described below. Since the E Series unit's rectilinear biphasic waveform employs the
same first and second phase timing, the same first and second phase currents/voltages and essentially the same
mechanisms for controlling defibrillation waveshape, the ZOLL M Series and ZOLL E Series defibrillation waveforms
are considered equivalent.
9650-1210-01 Rev. R A-13

Table A-1. Delivered Energy at Every Defibrillator Settings into a Range of Loads
Load
Selected
Energy 25 50 75 100 125 150 175 Accuracy
1J 1J 1J 1J 1J 1J 1J 1J ±3J
2J 1J 2J 3J 2J 2J 2J 2J ±3J
3J 2J 3J 4J 4J 3J 3J 3J ±3J
4J 3J 4J 5J 5J 5J 4J 4J ±3J
5J 4J 5J 6J 6J 6J 5J 5J ±3J
6J 4J 6J 8J 7J 7J 6J 6J ±3J
7J 5J 7J 9J 9J 8J 8J 7J ±3J
8J 6J 8J 10 J 10 J 9J 9J 8J ±3J
9J 7J 9J 11 J 11 J 10 J 10 J 9J ±3J
10 J 7J 10 J 13 J 12 J 12 J 11 J 10 J ±3J
15 J 11 J 15 J 19 J 19 J 17 J 16 J 15 J ±3J
20 J 15 J 19 J 25 J 25 J 23 J 22 J 20 J ±3J
30 J 22 J 29 J 38 J 37 J 35 J 32 J 30 J ±15%
50 J 37 J 48 J 63 J 62 J 58 J 54 J 50 J ±15%
70 J 53 J 69 J 90 J 89 J 83 J 77 J 71 J ±15%
85 J 65 J 86 J 112 J 110 J 103 J 96 J 89 J ±15%
100 J 74 J 97 J 126 J 125 J 116 J 108 J 100 J ±15%
120 J 88 J 116 J 151 J 149 J 139 J 129 J 120 J ±15%
150 J 110 J 145 J 188 J 186 J 174 J 161 J 150 J ±15%
200 J 146 J 214 J 238 J 234 J 213 J 195 J 179 J ±15%
Figures A-1 through A-20 show the rectilinear biphasic waveforms that are produced when the E Series defibrillator is
discharged into loads of 25, 50, 75, 100, 125, 150, and 175 ohms at each energy setting (200, 150, 120, 100, 85, 70,
50, 30, 20, 15, 10, 9, 8, 7, 6, 5, 4, 3, 2 and 1 joule[s]).
The vertical axis shows the current in amperes (A); the horizontal axis shows the duration in milliseconds (ms).
A-14 9650-1210-01 Rev. R

25Ω
50Ω
75Ω
100Ω
125Ω
150Ω
40
175Ω
30
20
10
A 0
-10
-20
-30
-40
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
ms
Figure A-1. Rectilinear Biphasic Waveforms at 200 Joules
25Ω
50Ω
75Ω
100Ω
125Ω
150Ω
40
175Ω
30
20
10
A 0
-10
-20
-30
-40
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
ms
25Ω
50Ω
75Ω
100Ω
125Ω
150Ω
40
175Ω
30
20
10
A 0
-10
-20
-30
-40
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
ms
9650-1210-01 Rev. R A-15

25Ω
50Ω
75Ω
100Ω
125Ω
150Ω
40
175Ω
30
20
10
A 0
-10
-20
-30
-40
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
25Ω
50Ω
75Ω
100Ω
125Ω
150Ω
40
175Ω
30
20
10
A 0
-10
-20
-30
-40
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
ms
25Ω
50Ω
75Ω
100Ω
125Ω
150Ω
40
175Ω
30
20
10
A 0
-10
-20
-30
-40
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
ms
A-16 9650-1210-01 Rev. R

25Ω
50Ω
75Ω
100Ω
125Ω
150Ω
40
175Ω
30
20
10
A 0
-10
-20
-30
-40
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
ms
25Ω
50Ω
75Ω
100Ω
125Ω
150Ω
40
175Ω
30
20
10
A 0
-10
-20
-30
-40
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
ms
25Ω
50Ω
75Ω
100Ω
125Ω
150Ω
40
175Ω
30
20
10
A 0
-10
-20
-30
-40
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
ms
9650-1210-01 Rev. R A-17

25Ω
50Ω
75Ω
100Ω
125Ω
150Ω
40
175Ω
30
20
10
A 0
-10
-20
-30
-40
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
ms
25Ω
50Ω
75Ω
100Ω
125Ω
150Ω
40
175Ω
30
20
10
A 0
-10
-20
-30
-40
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
ms
25Ω
50Ω
75Ω
100Ω
125Ω
150Ω
40
175Ω
30
20
10
A 0
-10
-20
-30
-40
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
ms
A-18 9650-1210-01 Rev. R

25Ω
50Ω
75Ω
100Ω
125Ω
150Ω
40
175Ω
30
20
10
A 0
-10
-20
-30
-40
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
ms
25Ω
50Ω
75Ω
100Ω
125Ω
150Ω
40
175Ω
30
20
10
A 0
-10
-20
-30
-40
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
ms
25Ω
50Ω
75Ω
100Ω
125Ω
150Ω
40
175Ω
30
20
10
A 0
-10
-20
-30
-40
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
ms
9650-1210-01 Rev. R A-19

25Ω
50Ω
75Ω
100Ω
125Ω
150Ω
40
175Ω
30
20
10
A 0
-10
-20
-30
-40
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
ms
25Ω
50Ω
75Ω
100Ω
125Ω
150Ω
40
175Ω
30
20
10
A 0
-10
-20
-30
-40
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
ms
25Ω
50Ω
75Ω
100Ω
125Ω
150Ω
40
175Ω
30
20
10
A 0
-10
-20
-30
-40
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
ms
A-20 9650-1210-01 Rev. R

25Ω
50Ω
75Ω
100Ω
125Ω
150Ω
40
175Ω
30
20
10
A 0
-10
-20
-30
-40
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
ms
25Ω
50Ω
75Ω
100Ω
125Ω
150Ω
40
175Ω
30
20
10
A 0
-10
-20
-30
-40
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
ms
Clinical Trial Results for the Biphasic Waveform

The efficacy of ZOLL’s Rectilinear Biphasic waveform has been clinically verified during a study of defibrillation of
Ventricular Fibrillation (VF)/Ventricular Tachycardia (VT). A feasibility study was performed initially for defibrillation of
VF/VT (n=20) on two separate groups of patients to ensure waveform safety and energy selection. Subsequently, a
separate, multi-center, randomized clinical trial was performed to verify the waveform’s efficacy. A description of this
study is provided below. The study was performed using ZOLL defibrillation systems consisting of ZOLL defibrillators,
the ZOLL Rectilinear Biphasic Waveform and ZOLL Multi-Function pads.
Randomized Multi-Center Clinical Trial for Defibrillation of
Ventricular Fibrillation (VF) and Ventricular Tachycardia (VT)
Overview: The defibrillation efficacy of ZOLL’s Rectilinear Biphasic waveform was compared to a monophasic damped
sine waveform in a prospective, randomized, multi-center study of patients undergoing ventricular defibrillation for VF/
VT during electro-physiological studies, ICD implants and tests. A total of 194 patients were enrolled in the study. Ten
(10) patients who did not satisfy all protocol criteria were excluded from the analysis.
Objectives: The primary goal of this study was to compare the first shock efficacy of the 120 J rectilinear biphasic
waveform with a 200 J monophasic waveform. The secondary goal was to compare all shock (three consecutive 120,
150, 170 J) efficacy of the rectilinear biphasic waveform with that of a monophasic waveform (three consecutive 200,
9650-1210-01 Rev. R A-21

300, 360 J). A significance level of p=0.05 or less was considered statistically significant using Fischer’s Exact test.
Also, differences between the two waveforms were considered statistically significant when the customary 95% or AHA
recommended 90%* confidence interval between the two waveforms was greater than 0%.
Results: The study population of 184 patients had a mean age of 63 ±14 years. 143 patients were males. 98 patients
were in the biphasic group (ventricular fibrillation/flutter, n=80; ventricular tachycardia, n=18) and 86 patients were in
the monophasic group (ventricular fibrillation/flutter, n=76; ventricular tachycardia, n=10). There were no adverse
events or injuries related to the study.
The first shock, first induction efficacy of biphasic shocks at 120 J was 99% versus 93% for monophasic shocks at 200
J (p=0.0517, 95% confidence interval of the difference of -2.7% to 16.5% and 90% confidence interval of the difference
of -1.01% to 15.3%).
Monophasic Biphasic
1st Shock Efficacy 93% 99%
p-value 0.0517
95% Confidence Interval -2.7% to 16.5%
Successful defibrillation with rectilinear biphasic shocks was achieved with 58% less delivered current than with
monophasic shocks (14 ±1 vs. 33 ±7 A, p=0.0001).
The difference in efficacy between the rectilinear biphasic and the monophasic shocks was greater in patients with
high transthoracic impedance (greater than 90 ohms). The first shock, first induction efficacy of biphasic shocks was
100% versus 63% for monophasic shocks for patients with high impedance (p=0.02, 95% confidence interval of the
difference of -0.021% to 0.759% and 90% confidence interval of the difference of 0.037% to 0.706%).
Monophasic Biphasic
1st Shock Efficacy 63% 100%
(high impedance patients)
p-value 0.02
90% Confidence Interval 0.037% to 0.706%
A single patient required a second biphasic shock at 150 J to achieve 100% defibrillation efficacy versus six patients
for whom shocks of up to 360 J were required for 100% total defibrillation efficacy.
Conclusion: The data demonstrate the equivalent efficacy of low energy rectilinear biphasic shocks compared to
standard high energy monophasic shocks for transthoracic defibrillation for all patients at the 95% confidence level.
The data also demonstrate the superior efficacy of low energy rectilinear biphasic shocks compared to standard high
energy monophasic shocks in patients with high transthoracic impedance at the 90% confidence level. There were no
unsafe outcomes or adverse events due to the use of the rectilinear biphasic waveform.
Randomized Multi-Center Clinical Trial for Cardioversion of Atrial Fibrillation (AF)
Overview: The defibrillation efficacy of ZOLL's Rectilinear Biphasic waveform was compared to a monophasic
damped sine waveform in a prospective randomized multi-center study of patients undergoing cardioversion of their
atrial fibrillation. A total of 173 patients entered the study. Seven (7) patients who did not satisfy all protocol criteria
were excluded from the analysis. ZOLL disposable gel electrodes with surface areas of 78 cm2 (anterior) and 113 cm2
(posterior) were used exclusively for the study.
Objective: The primary goal of the study was to compare the total efficacy of four consecutive rectilinear biphasic
shocks (70 J, 120 J, 150 J, 170 J) with four consecutive monophasic shocks (100 J, 200 J, 300 J, 360 J). The
significance of the multiple shocks efficacy was tested statistically via two procedures, the Mantel-Haenszel statistic
and the log-rank test, significance level of p=0.05 or less was considered statistically significant. The data are
completely analogous to the comparison of two survival curves using a life-table approach where shock number plays
the role of time.
The secondary goal was to compare the first shock success of rectilinear biphasic and monophasic waveforms. A
significance level of p=0.05 or less was considered statistically significant using Fisher Exact tests. Also, differences
A-22 9650-1210-01 Rev. R

between the two waveforms were considered statistically significant when the 95% confidence interval between the
two waveforms was greater than 0%.
Results: The study population of 165 patients had a mean age of 66±12 years with 116 male patients.
The total efficacy of consecutive rectilinear biphasic shocks was significantly greater than that of monophasic shocks.
The following table displays the Kaplan-Meier (product-limit) survival curves for each of the two waveforms. As all
patients begin in the failure mode, the estimated life-table probabilities refer to the chance of still being in failure after
the kth shock (k=1,2,3,4):
Shock # Kaplan-Meier Estimate for the Probability of Shock Failure

Biphasic Monophasic
0 1.000 1.000
1 0.318 0.792
2 0.147 0.558
3 0.091 0.324
4 0.057 0.208
As can be seen from the table, the biphasic experience is superior over the entire course of shocks delivered. The one
degree of freedom chi-square statistic for the Mantel-Haenszel test is 30.39 (p<0.0001). Similarly, the log-rank test,
also a one degree of freedom chi-square statistic, is 30.38 (p<0.0001). The residual number of patients not
successfully treated after four shocks is 5.7% for biphasic compared to 20.8% for monophasic.
There was a significant difference between the first shock efficacy of biphasic shocks at 70 J of 68% and that of
monophasic shocks at 100 J of 21% (p=0.0001, 95% confidence interval of the difference of 34.1% to 60.7%).
Successful cardioversion with rectilinear biphasic shocks was achieved with 48% less delivered current than with
monophasic shocks (11 ±1 vs. 21 ±4 A, p<0.0001).
One half of the patients who failed cardioversion after four consecutive escalating monophasic shocks were
subsequently successfully cardioverted using a biphasic shock at 170 J. No patient was successfully cardioverted
using a 360 J monophasic shock after the patient had failed cardioversion with biphasic shocks.
Conclusion: The data demonstrate the superior efficacy of low energy rectilinear biphasic shocks compared to high
energy monophasic shocks for transthoracic cardioversion of atrial fibrillation. There were no unsafe outcomes or
adverse events due to the use of Rectilinear Biphasic Waveform.
Synchronized Cardioversion of Atrial Fibrillation
Cardioversion of atrial fibrillation (AF) and overall clinical effectiveness is enhanced by proper pad placement. Clinical
studies (refer to above) of the M Series Biphasic Defibrillator Waveform demonstrated that high conversion rates are
achieved when defibrillation pads are placed as shown in the diagram below.
Recommended Anterior/Posterior Placement
Back/ Front/
Posterior Apex
Place the front (apex) pad on the third intercostal space, mid clavicular line on the right anterior chest. The back/
posterior pad should be placed in the standard posterior position on patient’s left as shown.
9650-1210-01 Rev. R A-23

Shock Conversion Estimator

Use of a defibrillator shock is currently the best option for terminating ventricular fibrillation and restoring a life
sustaining ECG rhythm [1]. Maintaining blood flow through the heart via cardiopulmonary resuscitation (CPR) has
been shown to improve the chances of a successful defibrillation [1]. The cessation of blood flow through the heart that
occurs when CPR is stopped decreases the likelihood of a successful shock in proportion to the amount of time that
has elapsed without CPR [1]. The repeated use of defibrillator shocks that do not restore a life sustaining rhythm may
cause additional damage to the myocardium and reduce the patient's chances for survival. The use of an accurate
shock outcome predictor can help reduce the duration of CPR interruptions and the number of ineffective (non-
converting) shocks delivered.
Properly performed CPR has been shown to increase blood flow to the heart and increase the neurologically intact
patient survival rate [2]. Following current rescue protocols that alternate periods of CPR and defibrillator shocks, the
rescuer must stop CPR while the defibrillator analyzes the patient's ECG rhythm to determine whether it is shockable.
If the rhythm is non-shockable, the rescuer immediately resumes CPR. When the patient's rhythm is shockable,
however, the rescuer must withhold CPR for an additional period of time while the defibrillator changes, shocks are
delivered, and the outcome evaluated. Should the defibrillator shocks be ineffective, CPR is immediately resumed after
the loss of precious seconds without cardiac blood flow augmentation. If the non-perfusing rhythm can be identified as
unlikely to convert before the delivery of ineffective shocks, non-CPR time can be reduced and there will likely be an
increase in post resuscitation as well as neurologically intact survival. The ability to predict that the current ECG rhythm
will not convert may also help reduce the number of non-converting shocks delivered. This reduction in total shocks
delivered would reduce the damage sustained by the heart during resuscitation. The Shock Conversion Estimator
(SCE) addresses these problems by computing a Shock Prediction Index (SPI) number which measures the
probability that a shockable rhythm will be successfully converted by immediate defibrillation.The SPI number is
directly related to the AMSA measure developed by the Weil Institute of Critical Care Medicine [3].
The Shock Conversion Estimator algorithm was developed and tested using data collected from a registry of ZOLL
AED Pro® and AED Plus® defibrillator field cases. Since the AED Pro and AED Plus defibrillators are first responder
units, all patient records correspond to first responder cardiac arrest situations. The defibrillator shock results from
these cases were annotated as "converted" if a transient return of spontaneous circulation (tROSC) occurred following
the shock. tROSC was defined as post shock ECG rhythms meeting both of the following characteristics:
1. Spontaneous ECG rhythms lasting at least 30 seconds that began within 60 seconds after shock
delivery; and
2. Rhythms exhibiting a heart rate of 40 beats per minute or more.
The post shock rhythm was annotated as "non-converted" if it exhibited any other conversion outcome, e.g. VF, VT,
and asystole.
The total database consisted of 258 patient records containing 586 shocks. The first 109 patient records were used in
the Validation Database which consisted of 251 delivered shocks. The Development Database was constructed from
the remaining patient records, 149 patients, resulting in 535 delivered shocks. The Development Database was used
to develop the algorithm and to establish the threshold SPI values for 95% sensitivity. The Test Database was used to
prospectively validate the performance of the algorithm against the default and other user configurable SPI thresholds.
Figure A-21 on page A-25 presents the sensitivity and specificity curves for the combined datasets. The vertical line
indicates the position of the 7.4 mV-Hz default threshold. 7.4 correlates to a sensitivity and specificity of 95% and 57%,
respectively. Table A-2, “Accuracy Table of SCE Levels and Corresponding SPI Thresholds,” on page A-26 lists the
SCE Level settings (HIGH, MEDIUM, and LOW) and corresponding SPI thresholds, sensitivities, and specificities that
can be configured on the E Series unit. Column 1 is the SPI threshold in mv-Hz. Columns 2 and 3 are the sensitivity
and specificity as described below (expressed in percent).
The preferred treatment for non-converting rhythms may be the delivery of aggressive CPR. The use of the SPI
measure to determine when shock treatments are likely to succeed will help minimize time between the advisory
decision and the start of CPR. Minimizing non-perfusing time during resuscitation is a key contributor to improving
patient outcomes [4].
A-24 9650-1210-01 Rev. R

Number of ECG Rhythms with SPI > Threshold that were successfully converted
Sensitivity = -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Total number of ECG rhythms that were successfully converted
Number of ECG rhythms with SPI  Threshold that did not convert
Specificity = -----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Total number of ECG rhythms that did not convert
Sensitivity or Specificity
SPI
Figure A-21. Sensitivity and Specificity Curves vs. SPI (mV-Hz) for the Combined Datasets
9650-1210-01 Rev. R A-25

Table A-2. Accuracy Table of SCE Levels and Corresponding SPI Thresholds
SCE Level SPI Threshold Sensitivity Specificity
(mV-Hz) % %
HIGH 7.4 95 57
MEDIUM 8.3 90 65
LOW 10.8 80 80
References:
[1] Eftestol T, Sunde K, Steen PA. Effects of Interrupting Precordial Compressions on the Calculated Probability of
Defibrillation Success during Out-of-Hospital Cardiac Arrest. Circulation 2002; 105:2270-2273.
[2] Sota Y, Weil MH, Sun S, Tang W. Xie J, Noc M, Bisera J. Adverse effects of interrupting precordial compression
during cardiopulmonary resuscitation. Critical Care Medicine 1997; 25:733-736.
[3] Young C, Bisera J, Gehman S, Snyder D, Tang W, Weil MH. Amplitude spectrum area: measuring the probability of
successful defibrillation as applied to human data. Critical Care Medicine 2004; 32:S356-S358.
[4] Wik L. Rediscovering the importance of chest compressions to improve the outcome from cardiac arrest.
Resuscitation 2003; 58:267-269.
A-26 9650-1210-01 Rev. R

ECG Analysis Algorithm Accuracy • Filters and measures noise, artifact, and baseline
wander.
Sensitivity and specificity are expressions of ECG • Measures baseline content (‘waviness’ at the correct
analysis algorithm performance when compared to ECG frequencies — frequency domain analysis) of signal.
interpretation by a clinician or expert. Sensitivity refers to • Measures QRS rate, width, and variability.
the algorithm’s ability to correctly identify shockable
• Measures amplitude and temporal regularity (‘auto-
rhythms (as a percentage of the total number of
correlation’) of peaks and troughs.
shockable rhythms). Specificity refers to the algorithm’s
• Determines if multiple 3 second segments are
ability to correctly identify non-shockable rhythms (as a
shockable then displays SHOCK ADVISED
percentage of the total number of non-shockable
message.
rhythms). The data in the following table summarizes the
accuracy of the ECG analysis algorithm as tested Clinical Performance Results
against ZOLL’s ECG Rhythm Database.
The performance of the incorporated analysis algorithm
The algorithm sequence takes approximately 9 seconds in a single analysis sequence satisfies the applicable
and proceeds as follows: requirements specified in ANSI/AAMI DF80 (section
• Divides the ECG rhythm into three-second segments. 6.8.3) and the recommendations by Kerber et al.
(Circulation. 1997;95(6):1677).
Table A-3. Clinical Performance Results
Rhythms Sample Performance Goals Observed 90% One-sided

Size Performance Lower Confidence
Limit
Shockable Sensitivity
Coarse VF 536 >90% >95% >97%

Rapid VT 80 >75% >98% >96%
Non-shockable Specificity
NSR 2210 >99% >99% >99%

AF, SB, SVT, Heart block, 819 >95% >99% >99%
idioventricular, PVCs
Asystole 115 >95% >98% >97%
Intermediate Sensitivity
Fine VF 69 Report only >88% >80%
Other VT 28 Report only >96% >84%
References:
Young KD, Lewis RJ: “What is confidence? Part 2:
Detailed definition and determination of confidence
intervals”. Annals of Emergency Medicine, September
1997; 30; 311-218
William H. Beyer, Ph.D.: “CRC Standard Mathematical
Tables 28th Edition,” CRC Press, Inc, Boca Raton, FL.,
1981, Percentage Points, F-Distribution Table, pg 573.
9650-1210-01 Rev. R A-27


APPENDIX B
MEDICAL REPORT CAPABILITY
The unit's medical report capability automatically records facing you. Slide the card into the unit until it is firmly
incident information for subsequent review and archiving. seated in the card slot.
Data is stored on a removable PCMCIA Type II data card
Note: Closing the PCMCIA slot’s protective cover does
(memory card) for uploading to a properly equipped
not guarantee that the card is fully inserted. Make
personal computer or hand held device.
sure the card is firmly seated before you close the
The medical report capability begins recording when the cover.
unit is turned on and continues until the unit is turned off.
To remove the card, press the release button and pull the
Patient ECG, unit status, date, time and control settings
card out of the unit. If the memory card is removed while
are recorded. Audio recording using a microphone
the unit is on, the unit still operates properly but no event
located on the front of the unit is optional.
information is recorded.
Data recorded during an incident is retained on the
memory card until erased. Shutting the unit off with the Erasing a Memory Card
memory card installed or removing the memory card
If the unit is configured to allow card erasure, memory
from the unit does not erase the data.
cards can be erased. See the E Series Configuration
PCMCIA Data Card Guide for further details on the ALLOW CARD ERASE
configuration option.
The memory card is a self-contained, electronic storage
To erase card memory:
unit similar to a floppy disk.
1. Turn off the unit.
• Do not subject the card to extreme temperatures.
• Do not immerse the card in liquids. The unit must remain turned off for at least
10 seconds.
• Do not place the card near magnetic objects.
2. Hold down the left-most softkey for 4 seconds while
• Do not place heavy objects on the card.
turning selector switch to MONITOR (ON for AED).
• Protect the connector located on the card from
physical damage. The E Series powers on in System Utilities mode.
3. Press the Erase Cards softkey.
Contact ZOLL Technical Service Department for the
4. Press the Next Item softkey to select YES.
current list of supported PCMCIA cards.
5. Press the Enter softkey.
You can store up to two hours of incident data (ECG and The E Series unit erases the card and displays the
unit status) or up to 38 minutes of incident data and ERASING CARD message. A progress bar appears
simultaneous audio recording on one 4-megabyte while erasing the card. Next, the unit verifies the card
memory card. The E Series can also be configured to to ensure that the card was properly erased. During
record the continuous SpO2 waveform and/or the this verification, a new progress bar and the message
continuous EtCO2 waveform. Overall recording time on a VERIFYING CARD appears. When the card is
4 Mb memory card is reduced by approximately 20 completely verified, the CARD ERASED message is
minutes when recording SpO2 waveform data, and by 12 displayed.
minutes when recording EtCO2 waveform data. ZOLL
recommends that you keep a spare memory card with The unit can be turned off, or the card removed,
the unit at all times and that you change the memory during the verification phase without affecting either
card after each incident. the card or the unit. ZOLL strongly recommends that
cards be verified again after erasure to ensure
Installing the PCMCIA Data Card against possible data loss or corruption.
If the No Card Inserted message displays, insert a
Check that there is no physical damage to the connector PCMCIA into the card slot. If the Card Operation
edge and that the connector edge is clean and free of dirt Failed message displays, the card is damaged. In
and debris. Insert the memory card into the right rear slot this case you should either:
located on the top of the unit. The label side should be
• Press the Enter softkey to erase another card.
9650-1210-01 Rev. R B-1

• Press the Next Item softkey and then the Enter Example: ZE12345678_20050425_183005A.crd
softkey to exit.
Unit 12345678 April 25, 2005, 6:30:05 PM.
When finished erasing memory cards, return the unit to
Note: Upload times vary. For example, a 2 MB card
normal use by powering the unit off and then back on.
containing 30 minutes of recorded incident and
audio data may take up to 10 minutes to upload
Transferring Data to a PC with a
at a baud rate of 38,400 bps. At a baud rate of
PCMCIA Data Card Reader 9600 bps, the same upload may take up to
40 minutes.
RescueNet Code Review for Windows software version
4.00 or later must be installed on the PC to access any RS-232 Serial Port
information stored on PCMCIA cards.
The E Series unit provides serial communication
Remove the data card from the unit. Insert the card into capability through an RS-232 serial port on the rear
the PCMCIA data card reader on the PC. panel.
For instructions on information retrieval and PC • For data transmission through the RS-232 serial port
equipment requirements, refer to the RescueNet Code to a handheld device, you must use a ZOLL RS-232
Review Enterprise Reference Manual. data transfer cable. For connection to a handheld
device, a compatible serial data cable must be
Uploading Memory Card Data or Trend connected to the ZOLL data cable. The ZOLL
History to a PC or Handheld RS-232 data cable terminates in a female DB9
connector; the serial data cable that connects to the
Data can be uploaded to a PC or handheld device via handheld must terminate in a male DB9 connector. A
two transmission methods. The RS232 serial port allows null modem adapter may be required to connect the
transfers using cable connections. Bluetooth wireless two cables.
technology is available to allow wireless communication. • For data transmission through the RS-232 serial port
Specific details about hardware and settings for each connection to a PC, a 9-pin to 25-pin adapter may be
method are described below. required.
On a PC, you can use RescueNet Code Review software
as the data communications package or another utility
software package such as HyperTerminal for data
transfer.
RescueNet Code Review software must be installed on RS-232
the remote PC to access any information stored on port
PCMCIA cards. For instructions on information retrieval
and PC equipment requirements, refer to the RescueNet
Code Review Enterprise Reference Manual.
Bluetooth Transceiver (Optional)
ZOLL Data Relay software must be installed on the
remote handheld device or PC to access any data Some E Series units include a wireless communication
transmitted from the E Series unit. Refer to the ZOLL option that uses Bluetooth technology to communicate
Data Relay user documentation for installation and with a ZOLL-approved, Bluetooth-equipped host system
operating instructions. (handheld device or PC running ZOLL Data Relay
software).
After memory card transmission, file names created by
the communications program on your PC have the E Series units that are equipped with a Bluetooth
following format: transceiver have a status LED on the top of the unit that
indicates power (green) and transceiver activity (blue).
ZEssssssss_YYYYMMDD_HHMMSSL.crd
LED activity Condition
where:
Solid green E Series unit is supplying power to
ssssssss = Unit serial number the transceiver.
YYYYMMDD = Year, month and day of transmission Solid blue Bluetooth transceiver is negotiating
HHMMSS = Hour, minute, and second of connection with a receiver. Bluetooth
transmission transceiver is connected to a receiver.
L = A unique identifier associated with the Flashing blue Bluetooth transceiver is transmitting
file that increments sequentially through and green data to a receiver.
the alphabet (e.g., A, B, C, etc.) (intermittent)
B-2 9650-1210-01 Rev. R

Communication Settings upload the entire contents of the data card.
You must configure the same communication settings on
both the E Series unit and the PC or hand-held device for Upload
proper data transmission. The correct communication
settings are:
[008] 12 FEB 10 06:25:37
[007] 12 FEB 10 02:42:27
Parameter Appropriate Setting [006] 12 FEB 10 21:53:19
[005] 12 FEB 10 14:37:22
Baud rate (bits per second) 115 200 bps [004] 12 FEB 10 10:12:37
[003] 12 FEB 10 07:42:57
38 400 bps (default) MORE
9600 bps
Upload Upload
Prev Next Call Card Return
Data bits 8
Parity None If the device is equipped with Bluetooth, a
Stop bits 1 transmission mode selection appears, prompting you
to choose either Bluetooth or RS-232. If it is not
Flow control None
equipped with Bluetooth, then the Upload screen
See the E Series Configuration Guide for instructions on appears; go directly to Step 7.
how to configure the E Series baud rate. 6. Select either Bluetooth or RS-232.
Transferring Data The main Upload screen displays.

1. Turn the selector switch to OFF.
2. After 10 seconds, press and hold the left-most Upload
softkey and turn the selector switch to MONITOR
Approx. Upload Time
(ON for AED units).
00:00:02
After approximately 4 seconds, the unit powers on in
System Utilities mode.
System Utilities 00:08

Press a Key or Send Return
Power Off to Exit
7. Press the Send softkey to begin data transmission.
The unit displays a progress bar that indicates the
percentage of data transferred to the PC.
00:05
Blue- Erase Upload Upload
tooth Cards Card Trend MORE Upload
Uploading
3. If uploading a data card, insert the data card to be
uploaded into the rear PC card slot on top of the unit.
20%
4. Activate the communication software on the receiving
host system. If not done already, prepare the host
system to receive a data file by entering the Power Off to Abort
communications settings as noted above. 00:18
5. Press the Upload Card or Upload Trend softkey.
If you have selected Upload Card, a list of all calls
stored on the data card will be displayed (after a brief To stop data transmission, turn the selector switch to
pause, while the data is read). Select either an OFF.
individual call from the list and then press the Upload Note: You must retransmit card data if the unit is shut
Call softkey, or press the Upload Card softkey to off before all data stored in the card has been
transmitted.
Following a successful transmission, the unit displays
the Card Uploaded screen. To upload another card,
remove the current card, insert a new card, and press
the Send softkey again. (The Send softkey appears
when the new card is inserted.)
9650-1210-01 Rev. R B-3

Activating Automatic Data 1. Press the Param softkey from the main menu to dis-
play the Parameter menu.
Transmission
The unit can be placed into realtime mode for automatic NIBP --- SpO2% ECG II x2 120
24
data transmission. In this mode, you can transmit data in --- ---
real time to a remote device running ZOLL Data Relay CO2 --- m
m Hg --- RR
software. The remote device in turn sends the data to a
ZOLL Data Relay service for appropriate processing and ECG
formatting. In realtime mode, the E Series unit displays

MONITOR
two asterisks (*) in the top left-hand corner of the screen. ECG
ZDR Dest.
When the unit is transmitting trend data or a 12-lead SpO2
EtCO2
patient record (if equipped), the asterisks flash
Select Enter Return
alternately; otherwise the asterisks remain static.
Realtime NIBP --- SpO2% ECG II x2 120 2. Use the Select softkey to scroll through the available
* 24
mode * --- --- parameter options to highlight the ZDR Dest.
indicator CO2 --- m
m Hg --- RR (realtime) destination option, and press the Enter
softkey.
ECG
The unit displays the Realtime Channel screen.
MONITOR NIBP --- SpO2% ECG II x2 120

00:17
24
--- ---
Param Wave 2 ID# Alarms 12 Lead CO2 --- m
m Hg --- RR
In realtime mode, the E Series unit only transmits trend ECG
data collected since the unit was powered-up, and does

NOT transmit all trend data stored in memory. To MONITOR
transmit all trend data, you must initiate transmission 01:03
using the Upload Trend softkey in the System Utilities ZDR ZDR ZDR
RS-232 Mobile Server Return
screen. Until you exit realtime mode, trend data is
transmitted each time a new trend record is recorded. 3. Press the ZDR RS-232 softkey if you are transmitting
In realtime mode, the E Series unit transmits 12-lead data via an RS-232 serial cable, or press the
data to the host system automatically. However, if the ZDR Mobile softkey if are transmitting data via
“Auto Transmit after 12-lead Analysis” option is enabled, Bluetooth to a PC or handheld device.
the E Series unit displays the Transmission Setup 4. Press the Return softkey to return to the main menu.
screen after the 12-lead data has been acquired. If you
To activate automatic data transmission:
press the Dial Phone # softkey, the unit transmits the
12-lead data again; press the Cancel Xmit softkey to 1. Press the SUMMARY button on the front panel to dis-
prevent redundant data transmissions and return to the play the Summary menu.
12-lead menu.
NIBP --- SpO2% ECG II x2 120
If you are using realtime mode on a regular basis, you 24
--- ---
can disable the “Auto Transmit after 12 Lead Analysis”
CO2 --- m
m Hg --- RR
option to eliminate the additional Transmission Setup
screen; see the E Series Configuration Guide for more
ECG
information.
To change the automatic data transmission port:
MONITOR
01:15
Print Print Print Data
Config Chart Log Relay On Trend
2. Press the Data Relay On softkey to activate

automatic data transmission.
Note that the unit displays the realtime mode
indicator in the upper left-hand corner of the screen.
In addition, the Data Relay On softkey label changes
to Data Relay Off.
B-4 9650-1210-01 Rev. R

3. To deactivate automatic data transmission, display 3. Press the Patient Records softkey to display the
the Summary menu (by pressing the SUMMARY Patient Records menu.
button) and press the Data Relay Off softkey
Note: If you change the destination port while a record
is already being transmitted, that transmission
continues to the previously selected port. All other
records in the queue will be transmitted to the
newly-selected port.
Note: If you change ports from Bluetooth to RS-232, 17 JUN 04
17 JUN 05 14:07:32 200506171407
14:07:32
and then you want to change back to Bluetooth,
17 JUN 05 13:24:03 200506171324
the host system must reestablish a connection 17 JUN 05 11:52:48 200506171152
with the E Series unit. However, power to the
Bluetooth module is not turned on again until a
record starts transmitting out the Bluetooth port. Print Print
Record All
Transmitting 12-Lead Patient Records

4. Select a Patient record and press the Transmit
You can transmit 12-lead ECG patient records to a softkey.
remote host system running ZOLL Data Relay software 5. Select the Data Relay option and press the Dial
without placing the E Series unit into Realtime mode. Phone# softkey.
1. With the E Series unit in Monitor mode (ON for AED If you are transmitting via Bluetooth, then the green
units), press the 12 Lead softkey to access the 12 power LED on the E Series unit illuminates. You must
Lead menu. now establish a connection between the host system
and the E Series unit.
NIBP 120 SpO2% ECG II x2 120
100 80
24
98
Troubleshooting
CO2 38 m
m Hg 24 RR If configured, the unit displays the following messages
when it encounters problems during data transmission.
ECG
Message Possible Causes and

12 LEAD MONITOR Corrective Action
01:20 CARD FULL Data card is full. No more data

can be stored on the card, but the
Acquire Settings PT Info Alar ms Retur n unit continues to operate. This
prompt is only issued when the
unit is not analyzing or charging.
2. Press the PT Info softkey to access the Patient
Insert another card, or print event
Information menu.
data on stripchart recorder.
NIBP 120 SpO2% ECG II x2 120 INSERT CARD Card is not installed or not seated
24 properly in the unit.
100 80 98
CO2 38 mm Hg 24 RR CARD NOT An Erase Card operation was
ERASED interrupted, or the card is
PROPERLY / damaged. The unit operates, but
PATIENT INFORMATION: ERASE CARD no data is being stored.
Press Return to Exit to
Erasing the card may allow return
12 Lead Monitor Mode to normal data storage operation.
01:22 60 Male CARD WRITE- The card is write-protected. The
Patient PROTECTED unit operates, but no data is
ID # Age Gender Records Retur n
being stored.
Adjust the write-protect tab on
the card to allow writing.
9650-1210-01 Rev. R B-5

Message Possible Causes and Message Possible Causes and

Corrective Action Corrective Action
NOT AN E SERIES The wrong type of card is SERIAL FAULT or E Series unit aborted
DATA CARD installed. The unit operates, but transmission. Data retrieval
UPLOAD
no data is being stored. pre-empted by other E Series
ABORTED
operations (such as alarm
Insert the correct type of card.
conditions or defibrillation
REPLACE CARD The wrong type of card type is activity); unit could not retrieve
installed, or the card is defective. data from memory.
The unit operates, but no data is
being stored. Wait for E Series events to clear
and retry.
Erasing the card may allow return
to normal data storage operation Ensure remote device is on and
ready to accept data.
AUDIO NOT Note: Only possible with the
RECORDING audio recording option. Check communication settings
on unit and on the host system to
Data card has been removed ensure they match.
from the unit while the unit is
turned on. The unit does not For serial data transmission:
record event or audio • Check and secure the ZOLL
information. RS 232 data transfer cable at
CARD REMOVED Card was removed from PCMCIA the back of the unit, the ZOLL
slot or is not seated properly. cable connection to the
RS-232 cable, as well as the
Reinsert card. RS-232 cable connection at
EMPTY CARD Empty data card inserted into the back of the PC.
PCMCIA slot, or card was
For Bluetooth data transmission:
erased.
• Move the host system closer
Record data on card before
to the E Series unit and retry.
transmission, or insert different
card. CARD User inserted a valid data card
PREVIOUSLY that was already uploaded
NOT A DATA The wrong type of card is
UPLOADED successfully. Data on card not
CARD installed.
erased.
Insert a different card
Use a different data card, erase
VERIFICATION The card was not erased the data on the card you are
FAILED successfully and is defective. using, or resend the data again.
Insert a different card.
HOST FAULT Remote device aborted
transmission. Ensure remote
UPLOAD
device is on and ready to accept
ABORTED
data.
Transmission aborted because
the host system detected an error
or user cancelled transmission
via communication program.
Check communication package
on the remote device or PC for
the source of the error. Retry.
B-6 9650-1210-01 Rev. R

E Series Service Manual: 9650-1450-01 Rev. D January 2014

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

E Series Service Manual: 9650-1450-01 Rev. D January 2014

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

E Series Service Manual: 9650-1450-01 Rev. D January 2014

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

E Series® Service Manual

9650-1450-01 Rev. D January 2014

ZOLL Medical Corporation

ZOLL International Holding B.V.

Chapter 1 Maintenance Tests

Chapter 3 Replacement Parts

Chapter 4 Functional Description

Chapter 5 Disassembly Procedures

Appendix A Overview .......................................................................................................................................A-1

Additional Reference Material

Note: Notes contain additional information on using the defibrillator.

Service Policy Warranty

ZOLL Medical Corporation

Technical Service for International Customers

9650-1450-01 Rev. D 1-1

14. Summary Report

Before You Begin the Maintenance Tests

1-2 9650-1450-01 Rev. D

Equipment that You Need to Perform the E Series Maintenance Tests

Equipment You Need for the E Series Options Maintenance Tests

9650-1450-01 Rev. D 1-3

• Fluke Biomedical Cufflink Analyzer (if NIBP option is installed)

1-4 9650-1450-01 Rev. D

1.0 Physical Inspection of the Unit

Observe this... Pass/Fail/NA

1.2 Does the unit show signs of excessive wear? o o

9650-1450-01 Rev. D 1-5

Observe this... Pass/Fail/NA

1.15 Is the battery seated in the battery well correctly? o o

1-6 9650-1450-01 Rev. D

2.0 Front Panel Button Test

Do this... Verify that... Pass/Fail/NA

9650-1450-01 Rev. D 1-7

Do this... Verify that... Pass/Fail/NA

1-8 9650-1450-01 Rev. D

Do this... Verify that... Pass/Fail/NA

Record your results on the Maintenance Test Checklist.

9650-1450-01 Rev. D 1-9

3.0 3, 5, and 12 Leads Test

Do this... Observe this... Pass/Fail/NA

Record your results on the Maintenance Tests Checklist.

1-10 9650-1450-01 Rev. D

4.0 Power Supply Test (Optional)

9650-1450-01 Rev. D 1-11

Do this... Verify that... Pass/Fail

4.2 Turn the selector switch to the OFF position.

Record your results on the Maintenance Tests Checklist.

1-12 9650-1450-01 Rev. D

5.0 Leakage Current Test

Maximum Leakage Acceptance Limits

Normal Condition Single Fault Condition*

ECG 10 50

MFC 100 100

Earth 500 1000

*Single fault considered AC mains on applied part.

9650-1450-01 Rev. D 1-13

6.0 Paddles Test (If applicable)

Do this... Verify that... Pass/Fail/NA

Record your results on the Maintenance Tests Checklist.